7 - 1626 Light Manager R5.0A Operation and Maintenance

1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.
0A
Operation and Maintenance
TOP18025D0SGDENI1.0 Issue 1.0
STUDENT GUIDE
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
All rights reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its
contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel-Lucent

1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A Operation and Maintenance - Page 1
Empty page
Switch to notes view!
2 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Operation and Maintenance

This page is left blank intentionally

Terms of Use and Legal Notices
Switch
1. Safetyto notes view!
Warning
Both lethal and dangerous voltages may be present within the products used herein. The user is strongly advised not to
wear conductive jewelry while working on the products. Always observe all safety precautions and do not work on the
equipment alone.
The equipment used during this course may be electrostatic sensitive. Please observe correct anti-static precautions.
2. Trade Marks
Alcatel-Lucent and MainStreet are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent.
All other trademarks, service marks and logos (“Marks”) are the property of their respective holders, including Alcatel-
Lucent. Users are not permitted to use these Marks without the prior consent of Alcatel-Lucent or such third party owning
the Mark. The absence of a Mark identifier is not a representation that a particular product or service name is not a Mark.
Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the information presented herein, which may be subject to
change without notice.
3. Copyright
This document contains information that is proprietary to Alcatel-Lucent and may be used for training purposes only. No
other use or transmission of all or any part of this document is permitted without Alcatel-Lucent’s written permission, and
must include all copyright and other proprietary notices. No other use or transmission of all or any part of its contents may
be used, copied, disclosed or conveyed to any party in any manner whatsoever without prior written permission from
Alcatel-Lucent.
Use or transmission of all or any part of this document in violation of any applicable legislation is hereby expressly
prohibited.
User obtains no rights in the information or in any product, process, technology or trademark which it includes or
describes, and is expressly prohibited from modifying the information or creating derivative works without the express
3written consent of Alcatel-Lucent. All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
4. Disclaimer
In no event will Alcatel-Lucent be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental or consequential damages, including
lost profits, lost business or lost data, resulting from the use of or reliance upon the information, whether or not Alcatel-
Lucent has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
Mention of non-Alcatel-Lucent products or services is for information purposes only and constitutes neither an
endorsement, nor a recommendation.
This course is intended to train the student about the overall look, feel, and use of Alcatel-Lucent products. The
information contained herein is representational only. In the interest of file size, simplicity, and compatibility and, in some
cases, due to contractual limitations, certain compromises have been made and therefore some features are not entirely
accurate.
Please refer to technical practices supplied by Alcatel-Lucent for current information concerning Alcatel-Lucent equipment
and its operation, or contact your nearest Alcatel-Lucent representative for more information.
The Alcatel-Lucent products described or used herein are presented for demonstration and training purposes only. Alcatel-
Lucent disclaims any warranties in connection with the products as used and described in the courses or the related
documentation, whether express, implied, or statutory. Alcatel-Lucent specifically disclaims all implied warranties,
including warranties of merchantability, non-infringement and fitness for a particular purpose, or arising from a course of
dealing, usage or trade practice.
Alcatel-Lucent is not responsible for any failures caused by: server errors, misdirected or redirected transmissions, failed
internet connections, interruptions, any computer virus or any other technical defect, whether human or technical in
nature
5. Governing Law
The products, documentation and information contained herein, as well as these Terms of Use and Legal Notices are
governed by the laws of France, excluding its conflict of law rules. If any provision of these Terms of Use and Legal
Notices, or the application thereof to any person or circumstances, is held invalid for any reason, unenforceable including,
but not limited to, the warranty disclaimers and liability limitations, then such provision shall be deemed superseded by a
valid, enforceable provision that matches, as closely as possible, the original provision, and the other provisions of these
Terms of Use and Legal Notices shall remain in full force and effect.

Blank Page


Course Outline
1. Product
About Overview
This Course 4. Topic/Section is Positioned Here
1. System General Description
Course outline
Technical
2.support
System Operation Overview 5. Topic/Section is Positioned Here
Course objectives
3. Boards Description
4. Cabling
1. Topic/Section DescriptionHere
is Positioned 6. Topic/Section is Positioned Here
2.
XxxNE Operation
Xxx 1. Subrack and Board Declaration 7. Topic/Section is Positioned Here
Xxx
2. Optical Channel Configuration
3. Optical Power Tuning
2. Topic/Section is Positioned Here
3. NE Maintenance
1. Performance Monitoring
3. Topic/Section is Positioned Here
2. Alarms Handling
3. Boards Replacement
4. SPLM Operation
1. SPLM Overview
2. Topology Management
3. Line Optimization
5. RMPM Operation and Maintenance
5 1. RMPM Description All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
2. RMPM Handling and Maintenance

6. Appendix
1. Miscellaneous

Course Outline [cont.]


Course Objectives
Welcome to 1626 LM (Light Manager) R5.0A Operation and Maintenance
Upon completion of this course, you should be able to:
describe the main characteristics of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A,

describe the main management facilities of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A,
describe the faceplate and the main features of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A boards,
perform optical and electrical cabling between the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A boards,
declare and remove in the MIB a channel respecting the appropriate sequence and the
software associations,
configure optical channels to complete the NE configuration or for maintenance reasons,
monitor and tune the optical power levels in case of channel addition and removal or for
maintenance reasons,
monitor the signal transmission quality in line,
handle the alarms raised by the NE,
replace any 1626 LM R 5.0A board respecting the safety rules and applying the appropriate
7
procedure,
describe the SPLM tool and get started on SPLM workspace,

setup the relevant SPLM configuration,
run the APE sequencer for channel optimization or deletion,
describe the Alcatel-Lucent RMPM,
get started and maintain the RMPM in operating conditions.

Course Objectives [cont.]


About this Student Guide

Conventions
Switch used
to notes in this guide
view!
Note
Provides you with additional information about the topic being discussed.
Although this information is not required knowledge, you might find it useful
or interesting.
Technical Reference
(1) 24.348.98 – Points you to the exact section of Alcatel-Lucent Technical
Practices where you can find more information on the topic being discussed.
Warning
Alerts you to instances where non-compliance could result in equipment
damage or personal injury.
Where you can get further information

If you want further information you can refer to the following:

Technical Practices for the specific product
Technical support page on the Alcatel website: http://www.alcatel-lucent.com

About this Student Guide [cont.]


Self-assessment of Objectives
Contract number :
At the end of each section you will be asked to fill this questionnaire
Course title :
Please, return this sheet to the trainer at the end of the training
Client (Company, Center) :
Switch
Language : to notes view! Dates from : to :
Number of trainees : Location :
Surname, First name :
Did you meet the following objectives ?

Tick the corresponding box
Please, return this sheet to the trainer at the end of the training
Yes (or No (or

Instructional objectives globally globally Comments
yes) no)
1 To be able to describe the main
characteristics of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A
2 To be able to describe the main

management facilities of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626
LM11R 5.0A All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008
3 1626 LM (Light
ToManager)
be able to describe the
R 5.0 Operation and Maintenance faceplate and the
main features of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A
boards
4 To be able to perform optical and electrical
cabling between the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A
boards
5 To be able to declare and remove in the
MIB a channel respecting the appropriate sequence
and the software associations
6 To be able to configure optical channels to
complete the NE configuration or for maintenance
reasons
7 To be able to monitor and tune the optical
power levels in case of channel addition and
removal or for maintenance reasons
8 To be able to monitor the signal
transmission quality in line
9 To be able to handle the alarms raised by

the NE
10 To be able to replace any 1626 LM R 5.0A
board respecting the safety rules and applying the
appropriate procedure
11 To be able to describe the SPLM tool and
get started on SPLM workspace
12 To be able to setup the relevant SPLM

configuration
13 Run the APE sequencer for channel

optimization or deletion

Self-assessment of Objectives [cont.]
Yes (or No (or

Instructional objectives Globally globally Comments
yes) no)
14 To be able to describe the Alcatel-Lucent

RMPM
15 To be able to get started and maintain the

RMPM in operating conditions
Other comments
Thank you for your answers to this questionnaire


Do not delete this graphic elements in here:
Section 1
Product Overview
Module 1
System General Description
3JK11704AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0
1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A


Section 1 Module 1 Page 1
Blank Page

Product Overview System General Description
1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A Operation and Maintenance
Document History
Edition Date Author Remarks
01 2009-03-25 Steunou L. First edition

Module Objectives
Upon completion of this module, you should be able to:
Describe the main characteristics of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R5.0A


Module Objectives [cont.]



Table of Contents
Switch to notes view! Page
1 General points 7
1.1 Alcatel-Lucent WDM portfolio 8
1.2 Regional Terrestrial Application 9
1.3 Upgrading Existing Infrastructure 10
1.4 Unrepeatered Submarine Applications 11
1.5 Raman applications 12
1.6 Towards Zero-Touch Transparent Photonic Networking 13
1.7 Technology Enablers for “Zero-Touch Photonics” 14
1.8 Enabling “Zero Touch Photonics” transformation: the Multi-Degree Node 15
1.9 “Zero Touch Photonics”: the targets 16
2 Main features 17
2.1 Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM – up to Release 4 18
2.2 Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM – What’s New in Release 5.0x ? 20
2.3 Loading plan at 50GHz 22
2.4 Loading plan at 100GHz 23
3 Line structures 25
3.1 Line configuration without A/D 26
3.2 Line configuration with A/D 27
3.3 Ring configuration 28
3.4 Meshed Topology 29
4 1626 LM NE type configurations 31
4.1 NE types 32
4.2 R/TR-OADM system capacity table (total number of ch.: pass-through) 34
115
4.3 R/TR-OADM system capacity table (total© Alcatel-Lucent
All Rights Reserved number2009of channels: add/drop) 35
4.4
Product Overview Line
System Terminal
General Description (Long Haul application) 36
4.5 Line Terminal (Regional application_Unidir) 37
4.6 Line Terminal (Regional application_Bidir) 38

4.7 Line Repeater 39
4.8 Degree-2 Line Repeater-PGE 40
4.9 Degree-2 Line Repeater-AGE 41
4.10 Band-OADM 42
4.11 Small OADM 43
4.12 ROADM (WB based) 44
4.13 Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based) 45
4.14 Degree-1 TR-OADM (WSS based) 46
4.15 Degree-2 TR-OADM (WSS based) 48
4.16 Degree-3 TR-OADM (Y Node_WSS based)) 51
4.17 Degree-2 TR-OADM + 2 Multidirectional Add/Drop 52
4.18 Back-to-Back Terminal 54
5 Existing infrastructure upgrade 55
5.1.1 1626 LM Transponders directly connected 56
5.1.2 Upgrade up to 52 channels 58
5.2.1 Upgrade based on 1640 WM TSC boards 59
5.2.2 Upgrade based on 1640 WM MDX boards 60
5.3 1626 LM Transponders directly connected 61
6 Ethernet applications 63
6.1 Traffic concentration and mapping 64
6.2 Boards interconnections: examples 65
6.3 GbE and FC transport in Point to Point service 66
7 1626 LM system layout 67
7.1 Optinex Rack layout 68
7.2 1626LM Central Office Shelf 69
7.3 Line Terminal Master shelf – LH application - Example 70
7.4 Line Terminal Secondary shelf – LH application - Example 71
7.5 Line Terminal Master shelf – Regional application - Example 72

Table of Contents [cont.]
7.6 Line Terminal Secondary shelf – Regional application - Example 73

7.7 Line Repeater Master shelf - Example 74
7.8 Line Repeater-PGE Master shelf - Example 75
7.9 Line Repeater-AGE Master shelf - Example 76
7.10 BOADM Master shelf - Example 77
7.11 TRBD4312 Secondary shelf - Example 78
7.12 TRBD4412 Secondary shelf - Example 79
7.13 Mixed 40Gb/s & 10 Gb/s Transponder Secondary shelf - Example 80
7.14 Degree-3 TR-OADM Rack - Example 81
7.15 TR-OADM Line Shelf for OTS 1 - Example 82
7.18 TR-OADM Transponder Shelf per OTS - Example (8 first channels) 85
7.19 TR-OADM Transponder Shelf per OTS - Example (From 9th to 72nd channel) 86
7.20 Master shelf configuration for ROADM - Example 87
7.21 Degree-2 ROADM MASTER Line Shelf for OTS 1 - Example 88
7.22 Degree-2 ROADM SLAVE Line Shelf for OTS 2 - Example 89
7.23 1626LM Compact Office Shelf 90
7.24 Power Feeding sub-system 91


1 General points


1 General points
1.1 Alcatel-Lucent WDM portfolio
1626 LM A Complete
WDM Product Line
Core 96 λ at 10 G
80 λ at 40 G
DWDM Simple design
Aggregation & transport
TR-OADM
ROADM Fast install &
commission
1830 PSS-32 Easy upgrade
Metro 44 λ at 10 G
C&DWDM Reduced
TR-OADM maintenance
ROADM
Bandwidth
optimization
1830 PSS-1
GBE Best-in-class
Access 8 λ at 10 G footprint
CWDM
1626 LM : The Alcatel-Lucent 1626 Light Manager (1626 LM in the following) is the platform of Dense Wavelength
Division Multiplexing (DWDM) Multi Reach systems for Regional, National, Pan-continental Networks.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM is designed to address efficiently green field applications for new networks and links
as well as to upgrade legacy platforms without traffic interruption. Carriers can keep their installed DWDM
base and increase its capacity by loading new wavelengths from the 1626 LM. This provides to carriers a state-
of-art technology and advanced features without wasting the investment previously granted.
The 1626 LM (Light Manager) provides a high transmission capacity on a single optical fiber by multiplexing up to
96x10Gb/s (STM64/OC-192) channels on a 50GHz grid within the extended C-Band (1530nm to 1568.6nm) or
80x40Gb/s (STM256/OC-768) channels on a 50GHz grid within the C-Band (1530nm to 1561,82nm) in Rel5.0A.
1830 PSS-32 : The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 Photonic Service Switch PSS-32 is part of the 1830 PSS Metro WDM product
family, which also includes the 1830 PSS-1 edge devices, including the 1830 PSS-1 GBE Edge Device.
The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 is the next generation zero-touch transparent photonic network solution. A
service-optimized, flexible platform delivers advanced OADM/CWDM/DWDM transport capabilities in a highly
scalable and versatile package that supports interoffice facility/converged core transport and wavelength
services such as SDH/SONET, GbE/10GbE and storage. The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 R1.0 supports up to 44
DWDM wavelength channels in the C-band from the standardized optical grid specified by the ITU-T G.692
recommendation. Channel spacing is 100 GHz. A future release of Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-32 will support 88
channels on a 50-GHz grid.
It supports up to eight CWDM wavelength channels from the standardized optical grid specified by the ITU-T
G.694.2 recommendation.
1830 PSS-1 GBE : The Alcatel-Lucent 1830 PSS-1 GBE Edge Device provides an optimized WDM access Platform.
The 1830 PSS-1 GBE is an Edge Device providing the concentration of 10 GbE services over an 10.709 Gb/s
optical channel. It is well-suited to provide GbE backhauling in a very compact format for Metro Access
applications and interwork fully with the 1830 PSS-32 designed for Metro Core and Regional applications. In
addition, the 1830 PSS-1 GBE can work as a GbE ADM which makes it uniquely efficient and flexible for building
Metro Access Ethernet networks and meet the growing demand for Triple Play, Video services and Business LAN
services.

1 General points
1.2 Regional Terrestrial Application
The 1626 Light Manager is a multi-reach WDM system capable of

supporting different reaches on different wavelengths to easily match
the demand.
Unified Management
Regional Regional National &

Pan-Continental
Up to 1500 km
Up to 200 km Up to 600 km 96 channels at 10Gb/s or
32 channels 48 channels 80 channels at 40Gb/s
Traffic Aggregation Transport

The Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM addresses terrestrial applications from Metro-Core (few hundreds of
kilometers) to Ultra Long-Haul (up to 4500 km) and unrepeatered submarine applications (400 Km
single span), from average capacity for regional networks up to large capacity for pan-continental
networks.

1 General points
1.3 Upgrading Existing Infrastructure
1626 LM provides
in-service upgrades, reusing the line terminal and line repeater
from existing Alcatel DWDM links
flexibility to upgrade other vendors’ DWDM links
Simply add
the Optical
Network
Extender shelf
at both ends of
the link where Equipment
upgrade
access to the
Existing
traffic is Line Terminal
needed Existing
Line Repeater
New access
to traffic
1 1 10 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

1626 LM is able to extend nominal capacity of installed 1686WM and 1640WM links by adding an Optical
Network Extension shelf in traffic access points, composed of higher performance 1626 LM
Transponders and corresponding Multiplexer/Demultiplexer modules.

1 General points
1.4 Unrepeatered Submarine Applications
The Alcatel 1626 Light Manager provides an efficient solution

When the terrestrial route crosses difficult terrain
When operator incurs costly access problems
Optimized features
for single-span long
distance transmission
Festoon Mainland-to-island Island-to-island

along a coast connection connection


1 General points
1.5 Raman applications
Standard EDFA for standard span attenuation

Selected use of Raman pump in some high loss attenuation spans
High
attenuation High loss span
span(s) in a Raman pump

series of
Line Terminal
standard
attenuation Line Repeater
spans
Access
to traffic
RMPM Front Panel

EDFA: Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier

RMPM : Raman Multi Pump Module
A Raman amplifier is based on the Raman scattering process. In this process an incident photon is
scattered to a lower energy photon, while at the same time initiating a transition of the fiber
molecules between two vibration states. In the Raman amplifier, stimulated Raman scattering
produces a photon with the same wavelength, phase and polarization as the signal and thus the
stimulated scattering mechanism can be used to amplify the signal. The gain medium in the case of
the distributed Raman amplifier is the silica transmission fiber itself and amplification occurs along a
few tens of kilometers adjacent to the pump unit.
The Raman unit is called RMPM1x00 which stands for Raman Multi Pump Module and where « x »
represents the number of pumping diodes inside the module.
Only 2 different RMPM exist today : dual and triple pumps (RMPM1200 and RMPM1300 respectively).
The RMPM1x00 is an add-on board to the 1626LM from R3.0A. It does not fit into the 1626LM shelf but
in the Optinex ETSI rack. The RMPM is managed through its own Graphical User Interface running on
a PC, either locally or remotely through a LAN. However some alarms and commands can be received
or activated from the 1626LM Housekeeping board.
The Raman Multi Pump Module (RMPM) is to be used for long span masking in 1626LM terrestrial
applications. It has to be inserted between the output of the long span and the input of the Line
Optical Fiber Amplifier (LOFA). The LOFA can be either in a Line Terminal, in a Line Repeater or in a
OADM site. Several RMPM can be used in a transmission system but only a few of them can be
cascaded between regenerators due to optical performance reasons.
1 General points
1.6 Towards Zero-Touch Transparent Photonic Networking
Pure photonic traffic processing, limited electrical

WDM technology offers regeneration and processing (OEO) only at the end points
the lowest cost per Integrated any-type client interfaces and aggregation
transported bit ‘by design’ But… not flexible, requires careful planning, manual
intervention and troubleshooting
+
End to end wavelength rerouting up to the end points (clients)
by NOC
Networking flexibility Flexible reuse of wavelengths for more available bandwidth
Support of 40G for increasing service demand, along with
existing line rates (2.5G, 10G) for compatibility
+ Multi-degree for meshed topologies
No need for planning, easy network reconfiguration from NOC
without manual intervention
Operational automation End to end service provisioning in minutes
Extended photonic OAM and restoration capabilities
Transforming WDM into a manageable transport networking layer for

simplified operations, accelerated time-to-service and controlled TCO
OEO : Optical Electrical Optical

OAM : Operation And Maintenance
TCO : Total Cost of Ownership

1 General points
1.7 Technology Enablers for “Zero-Touch Photonics”

WSS TR-OADM Architecture
Traditional ROADM Architecture unique ONDP & SPLM

unique
standard
Multi-degree E2E Photonic
TR-OADM (WSS) Management
Colorless ports Centralized
automated
Directionless ports intelligence
(Multicasting)
Path set-up,
Multi-degree Wavelength monitoring, QoS
Degree-2 ROADM (WSS) routing e2e
ROADM (WB) Increased Full Flexibility Full Operations
Wavelength connectivity Simple, NOC
(mesh) Ultimate
routing at simplification of based, path set-up
intermediate design, planning, NOC based
nodes Easier design operations and automated
Still need to go to Still need to go to inventory commissioning,
sites for the sites for the No need to go to supervision and
add/drop add/drop sites operations
1626 LM transforms WDM into a true Transport Layer

WB: Wavelength Blocker

WSS: Wavelength Selective Switch
QoS: Quality of Service
ONDP: Optical Network Design Platform
SPLM: Smart Photonic Layer Manager
NOC: Network Operating Center

1 General points
1.8 Enabling “Zero Touch Photonics” transformation: the Multi-Degree Node
A Multi-Degree Node is a Node that allows wavelengths connectivity across

several directions
The degree of the Node equals the number of directions
Examples of Multi-Degree Nodes:
Degree-2 Degree-3 Degree-4 Degree-5 Degree-6
In a Multi-Degree Node the wavelengths connectivity is managed in a “true”

optical domain without OEO conversions
In a Multi-Degree Node the wavelength connectivity can be managed
“manually” (cabling) or remotely (R/TR-OADM)


1 General points
1.9 “Zero Touch Photonics”: the targets
Simplification of planning, commissioning and overall operations

Flexibility in network design and planning
“Plug and Play” Turn-up, commissioning, and SLA assurance
Acceleration of time-to-service
Unified Photonic Layer Management for rapid end-to-end services delivery
Turn-up in minutes by NOC and not by field operations
Optimization of Network Resilience
Restoration at the Photonic layer
Detection and management of degraded performance before outage events occur
Optimization of overall network expenses

Better resource utilization and CAPEX savings
Networking capability, OPEX savings
Helping Service Providers to quickly deliver simplified, reliable, highly

flexible, fully managed, bandwidth on demand at the lowest TCO
NOC: Network Operating Center

CAPEX: Capital Expenditure
OPEX: Operating Expenditure
TCO: Total Cost of Ownership
SLA: Service Level Agreement

2 Main features


2 Main features
2.1 Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM – up to Release 4
A leading platform for Multi-Reach and Long Haul WDM networks

National & Pan-Continental networks
96 x 10G wavelengths (50GHz grid) with high performance amplifiers, high capacity
fixed optical add-drop multiplexers (OADMs)
Regional networks
32 x 10G wavelengths (100GHz grid) with cost-optimized amplifiers, capacity-
optimized fixed OADMs (48 x 10G wavelengths supported mixing 50 & 100 GHz grid)
Tunable universal transponders
pluggable XFP optics for 10GE LAN/WAN, SDH, G.709, tunable C-band line
Integrated SDH and GbE transparent aggregation
4x2.5 Gb/s concentrator (TRBC)
2xGbE for 2.5 Gb/s applications and 9xGbE for 10G applications
Optical Protection support: 1+1 O-SNCP with tributary protection
Reconfigurable Optical Add-Drop Multiplexers (ROADM)
Improved network flexibility
Easy upgrade from fixed OADM based on Wavelength Blocker (WB) technology
Release 5 sets now a new milestone in product’s support for Zero-Touch

Transparent Photonic Networking
Other supported features

- 1626 LM as a stand alone shelf can be used to upgrade legacy 1686 WM and 1640 WM
- 1626 LM can be associated to 1696 MS in Greenfield installation

2 Main features
2.1 Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM – up to Release 4 [cont.]
Line optical fibre amplifiers with G709 10Gb/s transponder

optimized regional amplifiers Q3 management interface
B-OADM (Band – Optical Add and Drop Digital Performance Monitoring (SDH
Multiplexer) and Ethernet layer 1)
Point-to-point and ring configurations Optical supervisory channel
4x2.5 Gb/s concentrator (TRBC) 2Mb/s UDC via TRBD and TRBC
Enhanced FEC Auxiliary channels via OSC
Ethernet aggregation and transport Analog Performance Monitoring
JO and OTU2 traces management


2 Main features
2.2 Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM – What’s New in Release 5.0x ?
Tunable and reconfigurable OADM (TR-OADM)
New, unique Wavelength Selective Switch (WSS)
based architecture for ROADM and Tunable
mux/demux filters (all colorless ports)
Multi-degree ROADM (1-2-3-4 directions)
Programmable WSS grid (50/100GHz)
Up to 72 x add/drop colorless ports (10G or 40G)
per/from direction
40G Wavelength Transport

Modulation formats optimized for different
applications
Phased-Shaped Binary transmission (PSBT, 50GHz grid)
for regional networks
Differential Phase-Shift Keying DPSK (100GHz grid) or
Partial P-DPSK (50GHz grid) for long-haul networks
Support of multiple grids (50/100GHz) in the same
fiber for concurrent transport of 10G and 40G
channels
Plug&play into deployed systems (non WSS-based
architecture)
Ethernet L2 Performance Monitoring

SPLM : Smart Photonic Layer Manager WSS Functional Description
1626 LM R5.0A is able to multiplex up to 96x10Gb/s (STM64/OC-192) channels on a 50GHz grid within
the extended C-Band (1530nm to 1568.6nm) or 80x40Gb/s (STM256/OC-768) channels on a 50GHz
grid within the C-Band (1530nm to 1561,82nm).
40G Wavelength Transport:

PSBT modulation format is available from R5.0.
DPSK and P-DPSK modulation formats are available from R5.0A.
WSS is an optoelectronic device which is used to implement TR-OADM and ROADM functions.
From an optoelectronic point of view, WSS implementation varies from one provider to another.
From a service point of view, WSS can be considered as an array of Nx1 optical switches placed
between several demultiplexers and a single multiplexer, variable attenuators.
Performance Monitoring for Ethernet layer 2 is available on ETHC1000 board.
Smart Photonic Layer Management

The Alcatel-Lucent Smart Photonic Layer Manager is a GUI-based tool dedicated to optical line
optimization for a given photonic Subnetwork.
The Alcatel-Lucent Smart Photonic Layer Manager (SPLM)
SW-application oriented to the photonic layer, intended to enable:
Fast, reliable and fully-automatic provisioning, commissioning and upgrade
Automatic optical parameters tuning
Simplified diagnostics
SPLM is integrated in the 1350OMS from NR9.1 (1626LM R5.0A)
SPLM is also available as a side application of the Craft-Terminal from 1626LM R5.0

2 Main features
2.2 Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM – What’s New in Release 5.0x ? [cont.]
40G G709 solution (50 GHz grid): TRBD4312 (PSBT)
Fully tunable over the C band
Up to 80x40 Gb/s supported in the C Band
Three slots wide, supporting OSNCP protection
High performance 40G G709 solution (100 GHz grid): TRBD4412 (DPSK) and
TRBC4412 (DPSK)
Three slots wide, supporting OSNCP protection (only for TRBD4412)
Dedicated CMDX1052 card
Embedded TDCM, supporting PMDC to enhance performances with poor PMD fibers
Improved performance 40G G709 solution (50 GHz grid): TRBD4612 (P-DPSK),
TRBC4612 (P-DPSK)
Three slots wide, supporting OSNCP protection (only for TRBD4612)
Dedicated CMDX1012 card
Embedded TDCM, supporting PMDC to enhance performances with poor PMD fibers
TRBD4x12 is a bidirectional 3R 43.018413 Gb/s G709 transponder.

TRBC4x12 is a bidirectional 3R G709 transponder concentrating 4 B&W STM64/OC192 optical signals
(TDM concentrator) in a 43.018413 Gb/s.
TDCM: Tunable Mode Dispersion Compensation Module

PMDC: Polarization Mode Dispersion Compensation Module

2.1 Used channels
2.3 Loading plan at 50GHz
On G652 fiber in extended C-band

OSC ALC
8 Ch
Ch11.5
Ch19.5
Ch59.0
BAND1 … BAND4 BAND5 BAND6 … BAND10 BAND11 BAND12

1510 nm
1568.57 nm
1530.33 nm
Submarine
Terrestrial
191.950 THz
195.900 THz
191.150 THz
194.000 THz

The extended C-band is divided into 12 bands of 8 channels maximum for a 50GHz channel spacing
plan (from 1530.33nm up to 1568.57nm). This corresponds to the maximum capacity for a LH/ULH
application (96 channels). The recommended band loading order with ALCT in band 5 is : band 7, 8,
6, 4, 9, 3, 2,10, 1,11, 12 and 5 (ALCT removed).
Warning: when ALCT is used, it takes 3 channel slots at 50GHz.
In an unrepeatered submarine system, we can use the first 10 bands (80 channels). The recommended
band loading order with ALCT in band 5 is : band 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5 (ALCT removed), 4, 3, 2 and 1.
The communication between two adjacent WDM Network Elements is achieved via an “out-of-band”
channel (Optical Supervisory Channel) at 1510 nm.

2.1 Used Channels
2.4 Loading plan at 100GHz
On G652 fiber in C transmission band

OSC
BAND1 BAND3 BAND5 BAND7 BAND9

1510 nm
1561.42 nm
1529.53 nm
BAND2 BAND4 BAND6 BAND8 BAND10
192.000 THz
196.000 THz

The 100GHz channel spacing plan corresponds to the 1626 LM regional application.
This plan is based on the 50GHz WDM grid where some channels are “unused” in a way to group
channels by 4, these groups being spaced from 200GHz.
It covers the bands #1 to #10 of the 50GHz WDM grid with one extra wavelength at 1529.53nm (left
side of band 1).

Notes Page


3 Line structures


3 Line structures
3.1 Line configuration without A/D
Line Terminal Line Terminal
Line Terminal Line Repeater Line Terminal


3 Line structures
3.2 Line configuration with A/D
Back to Back
WDM Terminal Terminal WDM Terminal
ROADM / Band OADM

WDM Terminal / Small OADM WDM Terminal

Point-to-point topologies can be implemented with or without OADM. These networks are
characterized by ultra-high channel speeds (10 to 40Gbps), high signal integrity and reliability, and
fast path restoration. In long-haul networks, the distance between transmitter and receiver can be
several hundred kilometers, and the number of amplifiers required between endpoints is typically less
than 10. In metro networks, amplifiers are often not needed.
There are two main differences between the Back-to-Back Terminal and B-OADM configurations
regarding the channels management :
All channels can be added and dropped in a BtB Terminal where as some channels are
“forbidden” in case of a BOADM configuration (1 channel lost in each band for a 50GHz channel
spacing).
Pass-through channels are fully optical in BOADM where as they are regenerated in BtB Terminal
(two TRBD used).
Most powerful configurations such as ROADM (Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer) and
TR-OADM (Tunable ROADM) are described in the next pages of this module.

3 Line structures
3.3 Ring configuration
Back to Back
Terminal
Band OADM
Line Repeater
Back to Back
Terminal


3 Line structures
3.4 Meshed Topology
ROADM
TR-OADM
Back to Back
Line Terminal TR-OADM Terminal
TR-OADM
ROADM

Meshed architectures are the future of optical networks. As networks evolve, rings and point-to-point
architectures will still have a place, but mesh will be the most robust topology. This development will
be enabled by the introduction of configurable optical cross-connects and switches that will in some
cases replace and in other cases supplement fixed DWDM devices.
From a design standpoint, there is a graceful evolutionary path available from point-to-point to
meshed topologies. By beginning with point-to-point links, equipped with OADM nodes at the outset for
flexibility, and subsequently interconnecting them, the network can evolve into a mesh without a
complete redesign. Additionally, meshed and ring topologies can be joined by point-to-point links.
DWDM meshed networks, consisting of interconnected all-optical nodes, will require the next
generation of protection. Where previous protection schemes relied upon redundancy at the system,
card, or fiber level, redundancy will now migrate to the wavelength level. This means, among other
things, that a data channel might change wavelengths as it makes its way through the network, due
either to routing or to a switch in wavelength because of a fault. The situation is analogous to that of a
virtual circuit through an ATM cloud, which can experience changes in its virtual path identifier
(VPI)/virtual channel identifier (VCI) values at switching points. In optical networks, this concept is
sometimes called a light path.
Meshed networks will therefore require a high degree of intelligence to perform the functions of
protection and bandwidth management, including fiber and wavelength switching. The benefits in
flexibility and efficiency, however, are potentially great. Fiber usage, which can be low in ring
solutions because of the requirement for protection fibers on each ring, can be improved in a mesh
design. Protection and restoration can be based on shared paths, thereby requiring fewer fiber pairs
for the same amount of traffic and not wasting unused wavelengths.

Notes Page


4 1626 LM NE type configurations


4.1 NE types
Multi lambda support

LT
Simple NE for point to point topologies
Double stage amplifier, maximum output power of +20dBm

LR Programmable or Automatic Gain Equalization
No regeneration, just optical amplification
Regenerative Back to back terminal configuration

BtB Traffic distribution & collection point
Regeneration for non added/dropped channels
Double stage amplifier

BOADM Maximum output power of +20dBm
Optical pass-through for non added/dropped channels
Double stage amplifier

Small
OADM Maximum output power of +17dBm
LT : Line Terminal
LR : Line Repeater
BtB : Back to Back Terminal
BOADM : Band OADM

4.1 NE types [cont.]
Reconfigurable channels add/drop scheme
ROADM Wavelength Blocker (WB) or Wavelength Selective Switch (WSS)
based architecture
Degree-2 (WB) or Degree-1 to Degree-4, Degree-6 upgradeability
(WSS)
Multi-degree configuration (Degree-1 to Degree-4, Degree-6
upgradeability)
TR-OADM Up to 72 channels added/dropped
Wavelength Selective Switch (WSS) based architecture
Connection point in a meshed network (Y Node)
Multidirectional configuration (Local OTS)
Directionless Single port configuration (four line fibers supported: Degree-4)
TR-OADM Dual port configuration to enable diverse route (four line fibers
supported: Degree-4)

ROADM : Reconfigurable OADM

TR-OADM : Tunable & Reconfigurable OADM

4.2 R/TR-OADM system capacity table (total number of ch.: pass-through)
50GHz signals (10G, 100GHz signals (40G

Configuration
PSBT, P-DPSK) DPSK) (*)
88 for 10G (11x8), 72

ROADM (WB) Not possible
for PSBT/P-DPSK (9x8)
93 for 10G (96-3), 77
ROADM (WSS) 39 (40-1)
for PSBT/P-DPSK (80-3)
93 for 10G (96-3), 77
TR-OADM 39 (40-1)
93 for 10G (96-3), 77
Directionless TR-OADM 39 (40-1)
40G transponders do not support B11-B12 Bands today, but this is

achievable in future.
(*) 100GHz signals can be used, if the specific WMAN3374 board that
supports mixed grid is used (board availability and SW support of
mixed grid: 1626 LM R 5.0B)

4.3 R/TR-OADM system capacity table (total number of channels: add/drop)
50GHz signals (10G, 100GHz signals (40G

Configuration
PSBT, P-DPSK) DPSK) (*)
88 for 10G (11x8), 72

ROADM (WB) Not possible
for PSBT/P-DPSK (9x8)
93 for 10G (96-3), 77
ROADM (WSS) 39 (40-1)
72 for 10G and
TR-OADM 39 (40-1)
PSBT/P-DPSK
64 for 10G and
Directionless TR-OADM 39 (40-1)
PSBT/P-DPSK
40G transponders do not support B11-B12 Bands today, but this is

achievable in future.
(*) 100GHz signals can be used, if the specific WMAN3374 board that
supports mixed grid is used (board availability and SW support of
mixed grid: 1626 LM R 5.0B)

4.4 Line Terminal (Long Haul application)
CMDX 1
To/from
TRBD/TRBC LT
(up to 8)
LOFA11y0_Unidir
Booster
To/from CMDX 2
TRBD/TRBC 1 VOA 2
(up to 8)
BMDX1000
OSC To/from
WDM
line
ALCT
2 VOA 1
OSC
LOFA11y0_Unidir
CMDX 12
To/from Preamplifier
TRBD/TRBC
(up to 8)

The Line Terminal, in Long Haul application, is able to multiplex/demultiplex up to 96 channels on a

50GHz grid in the Extended C Band (1530nm -> 1568.6nm).
The Multiplexing/Demultiplexing architecture is composed of two stages :

One BMDX1000 : Band Multiplexer/Demultiplexer addressing up to 12 bands
Up to 12 CMDX : Channel Multiplexer/Demultiplexer addressing up to 8 channels for a 50GHz
channel spacing
The OSC (Optical Supervisory Channel, transmitted over a 1510nm extra-band wavelength with a 4.864
Mbps bit rate, is dedicated to the transport of a 2 Mbps supervision frame and a 2 Mbps UDC.
1626LM Loading plan in Long Haul application

ALCT1010 unit must be in Band 5 and removed from the 88th channel.
Channel loading order : B7, B8, B6, B4, B9, B3, B2, B10, B1, B11, B12, B5

4.5 Line Terminal (Regional application_Unidir)
To/from
OMDX8100_S2 +
OMDX8100_S1
EXP Up to 16λ
LT
To/from Up to 8λ EXTRA IN/OUT
IN/OUT
OMDX8100_L2
LOFA11y1_Unidir
To/from λ1 Booster
TRBD/TRBC
OMDX8100_L1_X
To/from 1 VOA 2
λ2
TRBD/TRBC
OSC To/from
WDM
line
2 VOA 1
OSC
LOFA11y1_Unidir
Preamplifier
To/from
λ8
TRBD/TRBC

The Line Terminal, in Regional application, is able to multiplex/demultiplex up to 32 channels on a

100GHz grid in the standard C Band (1529.55nm -> 1561.42nm).
1626LM Loading plan in Regional application

Channel loading order : L1, S2, L2, S1.

4.6 Line Terminal (Regional application_Bidir)
To/from
OMDX8100_S2 +
OMDX8100_S1
EXP Up to 16λ
LT
To/from Up to 8λ EXTRA IN/OUT
IN/OUT
OMDX8100_L2
To/from λ1
LOFA11y1_Bidir
TRBD/TRBC
OMDX8100_L1_X
To/from 2
λ2
TRBD/TRBC
OSC To/from
WDM
line
1 VOA
OSC
To/from
λ8
TRBD/TRBC

The Line Terminal, in Regional application, is able to multiplex/demultiplex up to 32 channels on a

100GHz grid in the standard C Band (1529.55nm -> 1561.42nm).
1626LM Loading plan in Regional application

Channel loading order : L1, S2, L2, S1.

4.7 Line Repeater
LR
LOFA11y0_Unidir
1 VOA 2
To/from OSC OSC To/from

WDM WDM
line line
2 VOA 1
OSC OSC
LOFA11y0_Unidir

The line repeater consists of 2 optical double-stage in-line amplifiers.

4.8 Degree-2 Line Repeater-PGE
LOFA11y0_Unidir LOFA11y0_Unidir
OADC0104
1 VOA 2 WMAN1 1 VOA 2
OSC OSC
ALCT
ALCT

OADC0104
OSC OSC

PGE functionality is available in R-OADM and LR nodes.
Programmable Gain Equalizer (PGE)

The WMAN1100 board (including the wavelength blocker that is used as building block of the
1626LM ROADM) is used to compensate channel-by-channel for ripple and non-uniformities
accumulation
It is called “programmable” because it must be SW-adjusted in field (by a skilled operator)
Typically, WMAN1100 is used for equalization (PGE functionality) when the link is composed of 17
amplifiers or more. Furthermore, a link requires a PGE (and/or ROADM used as PGE) every around 6
amplifiers.

4.9 Degree-2 Line Repeater-AGE
OADC0104
OSC OSC
ALCT
ALCT

OADC0104
OSC OSC

AGE: Automatic Gain Equalizer

4.10 Band-OADM
To/from TRBD/TRBC
(up to 7)
BOADM
CMDX 1
CMDX 1
Band 1
1 VOA 2 BMDX1100 1 VOA 2
BMDX1100
OSC OSC
ALCT
ALCT
2 VOA 1 2 VOA 1
OSC Band 12 OSC


The non added/dropped channels are in complete pass-through, without any regeneration.
A link with BOADM supports a maximum of 12 Bands of 7 channels (maximum of 84 channels).
With the BMDX1100, 1 channel out of 8 is lost to guarantee a better band separation (reduced crosstalk
for pass-through traffic).

4.11 Small OADM
Expansion loop
Up to 16λ Small
OADM
Extra loop
Up to 8λ
To/from TRBD/TRBC
OMDX8100_L1_X
OMDX81000_L1_X
1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2
λ1 λ1
OSC OSC
2 VOA 1 2 VOA 1
OSC Channel loop OSC

λ8

The non added/dropped channels are in complete pass-through, without any regeneration.
The LOFA11y1 in Bidirectional configuration can be used for the Small OADM as well.
A link with Small OADM supports a maximum of 32 channels.

4.12 ROADM (WB based)
ROADM
WMAN1100
Band 1
CMDX 1
CMDX 1
1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2
OADC1102
BMDX1x00
OADC1102
BMDX1x00
OSC OSC
To/from TRBD/TRBC
(up to 8)
2 VOA 1 2 VOA 1
CMDX 12
CMDX 12
OSC OSC
Band 12
WMAN1100

WMAN : Wavelength MANager board

OADC : Optical Add Drop Coupler
The incoming WDM spectrum is split in two parts in OADC1102 module. One part continues through
WMAN1100 (“direct” wavelengths), the other part being dropped to BMDX1000. For each wavelength
to be added in the ROADM - via CMDX and BMDX – the equivalent “direct” wavelength has to be
blocked in WMAN1100 to avoid wavelength superposition into line when “added” and “direct”
wavelengths are coupled via OADC1102.
The WMAN1100 is reconfigurable allowing flexibility in add / drop scheme. In a given band, some
channels can be thus added/dropped and some others be bypassed without regeneration.
Up to 100% of the traffic may be added/dropped for a total of 96 channels (88 channels if ALCT is
present).

4.13 Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)
Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s
OCNC1230 Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s
OADC0104
Express
OSC ADD OSC

ALCT
LOFA1110
CMDX 1
2 VOA 1
R-OADM
To/from TRBD / BMDX1000
TRBC (up to 8)
CMDX 1
BMDX1000
To/from TRBD /
CMDX 12
TRBC (up to 8)
1 VOA 2
LOFA1110
To/from TRBD /
TRBC (up to 8)
To/from TRBD /
CMDX 12
TRBC (up to 8)
OTS 1 OTS 2
ALCT
ADD

Express
OADC0104 Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s

OSC Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s OCNC1230 OSC
Multi-degree R-OADM : Degree-1 to Degree-4

The multi-degree R-OADM is a cost optimized architecture based on:
WSS managing the traffic to be passed through or added to the node;
Fixed Mux/Demux for the drop and add parts to reduce the cost of the overall solution.
This architecture is suitable whenever the customer favours capex optimization vs maximum node
flexibility. In fact the Multi-degree R-OADM provides part of the functionalities of the T&R-OADM,
such as the use of WSS cards and multi-degree management, but does not provide full flexibility in
terms of remote configuration of the node. In particular, any change in the association between
the transponders and the WDM channels requires on-site interventions.
The node architecture is similar to the one of the TR-OADM: the optical amplifiers, the splitter
card providing multi-directionality (OCNC) and the WMAN3 are in the same logical position. The
changes are in the add and drop parts: both are based on fixed Mux/Demux BMDX1000 + CMDX. The
fixed Mux/Demux provide an overall insertion loss for the add and drop parts lower than that of
the T&R-OADM node, fully based on non-filtering splitters and couplers; this allows to dedicate
just one port of the WMAN3 to the whole added traffic and to strongly reduce the number of
optical amplifier necessary within the node.

4.14 Degree-1 TR-OADM (WSS based)
OCNC1220 LOFA11y0_Unidir
TR-OADM 2 VOA 1
Rx side OSC
OADC1100 30% 70% OADC1300

1:2 1:8
1
LOFA1110
LOFA1110
VOA
VOA
TDMX1180
x8
2
To/from TRBD/TRBC To/from TRBD/TRBC
(up to 8) (up to 8)
TDMX1180 TDMX1180

(up to 8) (up to 8)
TR-OADM: Degree-1 to Degree-4 with directional add/drop

The TR-OADM is a fully flexible and reconfigurable OADM node based on Wavelength Selective
Switch (WSS) optical devices. The TR-OADM node provides the capability to reconfigure both the
pass-through traffic and the added/dropped traffic without on-site intervention and it is the first
building block of new optical networks supporting Optical Restoration capability
The WSS, the main building block of the TR-OADM nodes, is an N port device with the following
functionalities:
Control of WDM channels passed-through and WDM channels added/dropped
WDM channels Multiplexing and De-multiplexing
Hitless switching of WDM channels between WSS ports
WDM channels spectrum equalization
The architecture of the Degree-1 TR-OADM is easily derived from that of higher degree nodes and
is reported in the following slide:
On the receive side the aggregate signal is first amplified by the pre-amplifier, then several drop
paths are created through the use of a cascade of splitter cards (OADC1102, OADC1100 and
OADC1300). The demultiplexing at channel level is performed by the tuneable demultiplexers
(TDMX cards) by groups of 8 channels.
Up to 16 channels can be demultiplexed without adding any additional optical amplifier.
On the transmit side the channels are multiplexed by means of a cascade of couplers (OADC1750
and OADC1300) and then connected to the WMAN3, which implements the power equalization.
The saturation channel is added to the aggregate signal by means of a dedicated coupler
(OADC0104).
Up to 16 channels can be multiplexed without adding any additional optical amplifier.

4.14 Degree-1 TR-OADM (WSS based) [cont.]
LOFA11y0_Unidir
ALCT
Express
TR-OADM
2 VOA 1 WMAN3174
Up to 32λ Tx side
ADD
OADC0104 Up to 32λ
OSC
2
Up to 4λ Up to 4λ Up to 4λ Up to 4λ
LOFA1110
LOFA1110
OADC1750
4:1 4:1 4:1 4:1
VOA
VOA
1
1
(up to 8) (up to 8)
Up to 32λ Up to 32λ
OADC1300 OADC1300
8:1 8:1
Up to 4λ Up to 4λ x8 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ x8
OADC1750 OADC1750
4:1 4:1 4:1 4:1
To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8)


4.15 Degree-2 TR-OADM (WSS based)
OADC0104
Express
OSC ADD OSC

ALCT
D M TR-OADM

(up to 72) (up to 72)
OTS 1 OTS 2
M D
ALCT

M : Multiplexing part
D : Demultiplexing part
TR-OADM: Degree-2 node architecture explanation

All the traffic coming from direction 1 and direction 2 is first amplified by an optical preamplifier,
then it is sent both to the WMAN3 card and the Tunable Demultiplexer by means of the OADC
splitter card. Both the WMAN3 and the Tunable Demultiplexer are cards based on WSS devices.
WMAN3 provides the following functions:
WDM channels Multiplexing
The Tunable Demultiplexer implements the WDM channels De-multiplexing function.
This node architecture makes it possible to switch wavelengths connected to the WMAN3 card
between the ports of the WMAN3 itself and to dynamically select the WDM channel to be received
by any transponder locally installed, removing the need for sites interventions unless new
add/drop transponders are required

OCNC1230
Up to 72λ
1:2 OADC1100
TR-OADM
D
OADC1300
De-multiplexing
part
TDMX1180 1:8
To/from TRBD/TRBC
(up to 8)
1
LOFA1110
LOFA1110
VOA
VOA
x8
2
TDMX1180 TDMX1180

(up to 8) (up to 8)
M : Multiplexing part D : Demultiplexing part
OCNC : Optical Connectivity Coupler

- OCNC1230 is recommended for TR-OADM Degree 2 application for the following reason:
- Having one “not used” output in case of TR-OADM Degree 2 application, it provides the opportunity
to upgrade at Degree 3 application latter in the network life.
- OCNC1240 is mandatory fore TR-OADM Degree 4 application. Nevertheless, it can be used also for
Degree 2 and 3 applications. In particular when at Degree 3 application installation, it is already
know that a Degree 4 application upgrade will be made in the future.
OADC1102 : if already in place for R-OADM, before TR-OADM Degree 2. it can be kept instead of
OCNC1230.
Internal attenuators in WMAN3174 board are adjusted to take into account the following board choice:
OCNC1230, OCNC1240 or OADC1102.
TR-OADM is a configuration that brings the capability to add and drop one or more wavelengths
to/from the aggregate signal for both directions.
Up to 72 channels may be added/dropped for a total of 96 channels at 10Gb/s or 80 channels at

40Gb/s.
Each channel of the Degree-2 TR-OADM configuration may be in any of the 5 following states :
Express from OTS12 : the channel is transmitted from OTS 1 to OTS 2 and from OTS 2 to OTS 1.
AddDrop_1 : the channel from OTS 1 is dropped and the same channel is added to OTS 1.
AddDrop_1 and AddDrop_2 : the channel is added and dropped for both directions.
Blocked : the channel is blocked.

WMAN3174 TR-OADM
ADD
Up to 4λ Up to 32λ Up to 32λ
OADC1750 Up to 4λ
M
4:1 4:1
Multiplexing
2
LOFA1110
LOFA1110
part
VOA
VOA
To/from TRBD/TRBC
(up to 8)
1
OADC1300 OADC1300
8:1 8:1
OADC1750 OADC1750
4:1 4:1 4:1 4:1


4.16 Degree-3 TR-OADM (Y Node_WSS based))
OCNC Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s OADC LOFA11y0
LOFA11y0
1230 0104
1 VOA 2 Express WMAN3174 1 VOA 2
OSC ADD OSC

ALCT
D M
OTS 1 (up to 72)
OTS 3
(up to 72)
ALCT
M D
ADD
Express
2 VOA 1 2 VOA 1
WMAN3174
OSC
OSC OADC Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Express OCNC
LOFA11y0 0104 Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s 1230 LOFA11y0
WMAN3174
ADD Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s
M
To/from TRBD/TRBC
OCNC
1230
OADC
ALCT
TR-OADM
(up to 72)
0104
1
2
LOFA11y0
LOFA11y0
VOA 2
VOA
OSC
OSC
1
OTS 2

The Y Node is connected to 3 lines in 3 different directions. A Y Node configuration may be used as a
connection point in a meshed network. Up to 72 channels may be added/dropped for a total of 80
channels.
OCNC 1230 is the recommended board for Degree-3 application. Nevertheless, OCNC1240 can be used
also (mainly when at the installation phase, it is already known that a Degree 4 application upgrade
will be done in the future).
Each channel of the Degree-3 TR-OADM (Y Node) configuration may be in one or more of the following
states :
AddDrop_1 and AddDrop_2 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 1 and OTS 2 directions.
AddDrop_1 and AddDrop_2 and AddDrop_3 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 1, OTS 2
and OTS 3 directions.
AddDrop_1 and Express from OTS23 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 1 direction and
transmitted from OTS 2 to OTS 3 and from OTS 3 to OTS 2.
4.17 Degree-2 TR-OADM + 2 Multidirectional Add/Drop
OCNC
LOFA11y0
1280
1 VOA 2 DEMUX part

OSC (DROP side)
OTS 1 ALCT
Express
2 VOA 1
MUX part
WMAN3174
(ADD side)
OSC OADC Up to 64λ
LOFA11y0 0104
Connectivity Block
Directionless
TR-OADM
LOFA11y0 OCNC
1280
1 VOA 2 DEMUX part
OSC (DROP side)
OTS 2 ALCT
Express
2 VOA 1 WMAN3174
MUX part
(ADD side)
OSC OADC Up to 64λ
LOFA11y0 0104
Connectivity Block
TR-OADM with Multidirectional add/drop architecture (Local OTS)

The TR-OADM described in R.5.0 provides the capability to re-configure any nodes remotely in
terms of wavelength assignment to each channel and pass-through. The only missing degree of
flexibility is the capability to add/drop channels dynamically to/from any direction supported by
the TR-OADM node.
This additional functionality is supported through the so-called Multidirectional add/drop
configuration.
Each Multidirectional add/drop block is able to manage up to 64 chs in add/drop and these
channels can be dynamically associated to any direction supported by the TR-OADM node

4.17 Degree-2 TR-OADM + 2 Multidirectional Add/Drop [cont.]
DEMUX part
(DROP side) 8:1 x8
OADC LOFA11y0 To/from
0104 TRBD/TRBC
WMAN3174 1 VOA 2 (up to 8)
Up to 64λ
ALCT
TDMX1180
MUX part OADC1300 4:1

(ADD side) Up to 4λ
To/from
OCNC 8:1 Up to 4λ TRBD/TRBC
ALCT 4:1
1280 (up to 8)
2 VOA 1 WMAN3174 2 VOA 1 x8

Up to 64λ
OADC
LOFA1110 LOFA1110
0104
Up to 32λ 4:1
Up to 4λ
To/from
8:1 Up to 4λ TRBD/TRBC
DEMUX part Up to 32λ 4:1 (up to 8)
(DROP side)
2 VOA 1 x8
MUX part
(ADD side) LOFA1110 OADC1750


4.18 Back-to-Back Terminal
To/from TRBD/TRBC
(up to 8)
BtB
CMDX 1
CMDX 1
LOFA11yz_Unidir LOFA11yz_Unidir
Band 1
1 VOA 2 BMDX1000 1 VOA 2
BMDX1000
OSC OSC
ALCT
ALCT
2 VOA 1 2 VOA 1
OSC TRBD TRBD OSC

CMDX 12
LOFA11yz_Unidir CMDX 12 LOFA11yz_Unidir
Band 12

When all the DWDM line channels are added and dropped or electrically regenerated, the 1626 LM is a
back-to-back terminal or a hub node.
The non added/dropped channels are 3R (retiming, reshaping, reamplifying) regenerated.
WARNING : The optical pass-through is not permitted for BMDX1000.

5 Existing infrastructure upgrade


5.1 1686 WM upgrade
5.1.1 1626 LM Transponders directly connected
1686 WM
Terminal
1686 WM - 10Gb/s
1
OMDX 16
16 ATT.1
1626 LM -TRBD
EXP
1626 LM - TRBD
1
ATT.2
OMDX 16
New NE
16
1626 LM - TRBD
: legacy 1686 WM boards

: new 1626 LM boards

The 1686 WM is based on two mux/demux stages:

the first one is made up of two OMDX boards, able to multiplex (or de–multiplex, because the
boards are bi-directional) up to 16 chs each (one in red band, the other one in blue band) on a
100GHz grid.
the second one interleaves the two resulting aggregate signals of 16 channels at 100GHz each to
have one DWDM signal of 32 channels at 100GHz in C band (by means of the expansion board).
For the receiver side, the diagram is similar with Demux and without attenuator (Att.1 and Att.2).
This configuration allows to multiplex/demultiplex up to 32 channels to/from the DWDM line.
This upgrade is always possible, whatever the actual number “N” of installed channels. The remaining
32–“N” channels can be filled with 1626 LM transponders directly connected to the OMDX16 boards
of the 1686 WM mux/demux scheme.
1626 LM transponders connected to the 1686 WM mux/demux and OADM’s for both upgrades and
greenfield (in this last case no 1686 WM transponders used).

5.1 1686 WM upgrade
5.1.1 1626 LM Transponders directly connected [cont.]
1st stage 1686 WM OFA 2nd stage
1686 WM OADM4/8
1686 WM
OADM
1626 LM - TRBD
1626 LM - TRBD
1686 WM - 10 Gb/s
1686 WM - 10 Gb/s
New NE : legacy 1686 WM boards


The OADM repeater is made up of:

line amplifiers, with the extraction/insertion of the OSC before/after the double–stage amplifier,
OADM board, able to add/drop up to 4/8 channels per direction (east/west) according to the board
type,
transponders.
In upgrade installation, 1626 LM transponders, directly connected to the 1686 WM boards, can be
added to the already installed 1686 WM OADM system.
In greenfield installation, the OADM structure is the same than the upgrade one but with only 1626 LM
transponders.

5.1 1686 WM upgrade
5.1.2 Upgrade up to 52 channels
Att.1: from 1686 WM installation

1686 WM -10 Gb/s 100 Ghz
Att.2: chosen to have the same
1 power/band at the EXP inputs
OMDX 16
16 ATT.1
1686 WM -10 Gb/s
EXP
1626 LM -TRBD
CMDX
1
ATT.2
8
1626 LM -TRBD
BMDX
50 Ghz
1626 LM -TRBD
1
CMDX
8
1626 LM -TRBD New NE

This configuration is possible when only one 1686 WM Mux/Demux is installed (up to 16 channels),
allowing the connection of the 1626 LM mux/demux to the unused port of the 1686 WM EXP board.
Hence it is possible to increase the channels number to more than 32, filling the available band with
50GHz spaced channels.
The free band (Blue or Red) is filled with 1626 LM transponders at 50 GHz .
Up to 36 (33) 1626 LM channels in the Red band for 52 (49) channels final system capacity with the
+20 dBm amplifier (+17/+14 dBm amplifier).
Up to 32 1626 LM channels in the Blue band for 48 channels final system capacity.
The total link capacity is decreased when there are add/drop channels in the band populated with
1626 LM transponders and mux/demux: the channels 50 GHz spaced from the add/drop channels
must be skipped for filtering issues (up to 8 channels skipped).
The advantage of this configuration is that one band is filled @ 50 GHz channel spacing and the total
capacity is up to 52 channels (when Red band is upgraded with the 1626 LM transponders).
For the receiver side, the diagram is similar without attenuator (Att.1 and Att.2).
It is applicable to both upgrades and greenfields (no 1686 WM transponders in this last case).

5.2 1640 WM upgrade
5.2.1 Upgrade based on 1640 WM TSC boards
Att.1: value to be chosen to

equalize the channel
1640 WM -10 Gb/s TCS401 powers
1
8:1
8
5:1
1640 WM -10 Gb/s
2:1
1626 LM -TRBD
1
CMDX
ATT.1
8
1626 LM -TRBD
BMDX
1626 LM -TRBD
1
CMDX
1626 LM -TRBD
8 : legacy 1640 WM boards
New NE

The TCS scheme is based on 3 mux/demux stages (only the B&W to WDM direction is described):
The first one is able to multiplex (or de–multiplex because the boards are bi–directional) up to 8
channels on a 200GHz grid (function supported by the TCS1xx, TCS302 and TCS401 boards).
The second one can mix up to 5 aggregate signals of 8 channels to reach 40 wavelengths on a
100GHz grid (supported by the TCS302, Off–grid channels, and TCS401, On grid channels);
The third one combines the two resulting aggregate signals of 40 channels at 100GHz to have one
DWDM signal of 80 channels at 50GHz in C band (function provided by the TCS401 board).
The upgrade is allowed only when up to 40 channels of the 1640 WM system are installed.
Whatever the current number “N” of installed channels (40), all the remaining 80–“N” channels can be
added with 1626 LM transponders + Mux/Demux (CMDX, BMDX).
The 1626 LM aggregate signal is connected to the unused input/output port of the 2:1 combiner/1:2
splitter of the TCS401 board.
The receiver side is similar without attenuator.
The upgrade configuration connecting directly the 1626 LM tributaries with the TCS boards is not
allowed.

5.2 1640 WM upgrade
5.2.2 Upgrade based on 1640 WM MDX boards
1640 WM - 10 Gb/s
1
MDX 342
100 Ghz
On Grid
40
1626 LM - TRBD
MDX 441
1626 LM- TRBD
1 50 Ghz
MDX 343
100 Ghz
New NE
Off Grid
40
1626 LM -TRBD


The MDX multiplexing architecture is based on two mux / demux stages:

The first one is able to multiplex (or de–multiplex because the boards are bi–directional) up to 40
channels on a 100GHz grid; this function is supported by the MDX342 (On grid channels).
The second one interleaves the two resulting aggregate signals of 40 channels at 100GHz to have
one DWDM signal of 80 channels at 50GHz in C band (by means of the MDX441 board).
Whatever the current number “N” of installed channels the remaining 80–“N” channels can be filled
with 1626 LM transponders directly connected to the MDX342 boards of the 1640 WM mux/demux
scheme.
It is not allowed to upgrade an already installed 1640 WM system (with MDX441 and MDX342
boards) with the 1626 LM mux/demux scheme (instead of MDX343) connected to the MDX441
board.

5.3 1696 MS addition
5.3 1626 LM Transponders directly connected
OMDX8100_M_S1
: legacy 1696 MS boards
8
MUX : new 1626 LM boards
1
8
DEMUX
1
OMDX8100_M_L2
8 MCC / OCC10 8
1626 LM- TRBD MUX MUX
1 1
New NE 8 8
DEMUX DEMUX OMDX8100_M_L1_XS
1 MCC / OCC10 1
SB WDM out
OMDX8100_M_S2
1626 LM -TRBD
8
LB
MCC / OCC10 MUX
1 λ SPV
8 LB WDM in
DEMUX
MCC / OCC10 1 SB
λ SPV


Notes Page


6 Ethernet applications


6.1 Traffic concentration and mapping
2xGBE_FC board ETHC1000 board
User side *
Front side User side *
#1 GE or FC #2 GE or FC #1 GE #12 GE
VLAN tagging
#1 GFP-T #2 #xx #yy
Mapping Ethernet layer 2

Switch & concentration
VC-4-6/7v VC-4-6/7v 10GE WAN 10GE WAN
Virtual Line P#13 Line P#14
Concatenation Matrix Back
plane
access
Concentration in STM 16 or OC 48 10GE WAN 10GE WAN
(Bridge & Switch) XFP P#13 XFP P#14
SFP SFP Line #1 Line #2
Line #1 Line #2
Front side Front side
Not used in
1626 LM R5.0A Front side
2xGBE_FC board
- From User side, the Generic Framing Procedure – Transparent mode is used first to transport the data
traffic (two Gigabit Ethernet or two Fibre Channel signals) into a SDH/SONET (STM-16/OC-48) frame.
Each resulting GFP-T frame is then encapsulated into a Virtual Container (VC-4-nv) via a Virtual
Concatenation according to the signal type (VC-4-6v for Fibre Channel, VC-4-7v for Gigabit Ethernet).
These VC-4-nv are then multiplexed into the final 2.5G SDH/SONET signal.
- * Warning: Four interfaces/ports are present on client side, but only two of them can be used (U1
and U2 on the front plate). Two interfaces/ports (and related bridge & switch) are present on
line/aggregate side, but only Line 2 can be used (W on the front plate).
ETHC1000 board
- From user side, each received GbE signal is first tagged with a VLAN ID and then is concentrated into
a 10GbE LAN frame. In order to be compatible with the STM-64 transponders of the 1626LM , this
latter frame is finally converted in 10GbE WAN PHY thanks to the WIS mapping.
- There are two 10GbE ports on the line side:
- Line 1 – P#13
- Line 2 – P#14

6.2 Boards interconnections: examples
STM-64
User#1
ETHC 10GbE WAN TRBD
λ1
1000 B&W
User#9
User#1 STM-16
2x λ2
User#2 GBE_FC B&W
TRBC
CMDX
BMDX
User#1 λ3
2x
User#2 GBE_FC WDM
1626LM R5.0A Master

shelf or Secondary shelf 1626LM R5.0A Master shelf

ETHC1000 : the optical client interface is a B&W SFP module. The optical line interface is B&W XFP
module and must be connected to a STM-64 (OC-192) TRBD.
2xGBE_FC : the optical client interface is a B&W SFP module. The optical line interface is either a
B&W SFP module to be connected to a TRBC (4 User inputs), or a WDM SFP module to be connected
directly to the relevant CMDX or OMDX.
.

6.3 GbE and FC transport in Point to Point service
WDM Terminal WDM Terminal

with several with several
GbE ports GbE ports
Dedicated wavelength
approach
2xGBE_FC ETHC1000
The main purpose of the Ethernet applications is to improve data traffic transport capabilities of the
1626 LM. Two boards (2xGE_FC and ETHC1000) are supported in order to perform the traffic
concentration and mapping.
System capacity
The Alcatel 1626 LM R 5.0A provides a modular transmission capacity by multiplexing, per each shelf :
up to 32 x GbE/FC streams on a 50GHz grid in the Extended C–band (1530nm–>1568.6nm), by
means of up to sixteen 2xGE_FC boards (managing up to 2 x 1GbE/1FC streams each).
up to 144 x GbE streams on a 50GHz grid in the Extended C–band (1530nm–>1568.6nm), by means
of up to twelve ETHC1000 boards (managing up to 12 x 1GbE streams each; up to twelve boards
can be plugged in current release).
mixed configurations are supported.
These data traffic boards are used in point to point applications (transparent LAN to LAN services).

7 1626 LM system layout


7.1 Optinex Rack layout
OPTINEX
> Up to 16x10Gb/s or 4x40Gb/s optical
channels in one single shelf
Top Rack Unit
Fiber storage
PP
PP
W
W
W
W RR
Up to 48x10Gb/s or 12x40Gb/s
RR
11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 10 11
10 11 12
12 13
13 14
14 15
15 16
16 17
17 18
18 19
19 20
20
>
optical channels in one single rack

FANS
Fan
Fan
Up to 3 shelves can be hosted in one

Air deflector
PP
W
W
RR
PP
W
W
RR >
11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 10 11
10 11 12
12 13
13 14
14 15
15 16
16 17
17 18
18 19
19 20
20
rack
FANS
Fan
Fan
Air deflector
> Up to 6 racks are managed
PP
PP
W
W
W
W RR
RR
11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 10 11
10 11 12
12 13
13 14
14 15
15 16
16 17
17 18
18 19
19 20
20
FANS
Fan
Fan

There is no requirement for access to the rear for maintenance, so racks can be installed back-to-
back. Each rack is equipped with a maximum of three sub-racks with a fan unit and an air filter
located at the bottom of each sub-rack. All subracks are identical, fitted with different units
depending on the subrack functionality. Power supply, fans, shelf controller and rack alarm interface
units must be fitted to all shelves.
For Optinex Rack with TRU, if DCU is needed, it must be placed in a DCU tray (3AN 44747 AA) located
at the bottom of the rack. Up to 5 trays can be installed, either DCU trays (3AN 44747 AA) or Optical
trays (3AL 94942 AA).
For Optinex Rack with MA NG-TRU, if DCU is needed, it must be placed in a DCU tray (3AN 44747 AA)
located at the bottom of the rack. Up to 3 trays can be installed, either DCU trays (3AN 44747 AA) or
Optical trays (3AL 94942 AA).
One shelf is declared as the “Master shelf” and the other shelves are declared as “secondary shelves”.

7.2 1626LM Central Office Shelf
11

The shelf is divided into 41 slots.
Six different mechanics are available for the 1626 LM boards:

20 mm width, small height; this mechanic fits into slots 21, 22, 39 and 40.
20 mm width, medium height; this mechanic fits into slots 1, 2, 19 and 20.
25 mm width, small height; this mechanic fits into slots 23 to 38
25 mm width, medium height; this mechanic fits into slots 3 to 18
25 mm width, tall height; this mechanic takes two slots: one 25mm wide, medium height slot plus
one 25mm wide, small height one which is under it. Thus, it fits in slots 3 plus 23, 4 plus 24 to 18
plus 38. The relevant units use the connector from the medium height slot to communicate with
the SC.
Double width, tall height (these boards are foreseen for future releases); this mechanic takes four
slots : two adjacent 25mm wide, medium height slots plus the two 25mm wide, small height ones
which are under them. I.e; it can fit in slots 5, 6, 25, 26. The units which have this mechanics use
the connector from the left medium height slot (slot 5 in the above example) to communicate with
the SC.

7.3 Line Terminal Master shelf – LH application - Example
21 22 3 4 55 66 77 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40
PSUP
PSUP
HSKU
RAIU
OSCU1010
LOFA11y0
LOFA11y0
ALCT1010
BMDX1000
CMDX1010
ESCT2000
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
USIB
1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20
41
FANS1000

CMDX 1
To/from
TRBD/TRBC
(up to 8)
LOFA11y0_Unidir
Booster
CMDX 2
To/from
TRBD/TRBC 1 VOA 2
BMDX1000
(up to 8)
OSC To/from
WDM
line
ALCT
2 VOA 1
OSC
LOFA11y0_Unidir
CMDX 12
TRBD/TRBC
(up to 8)

7.4 Line Terminal Secondary shelf – LH application - Example
21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
CMDX1010
CMDX1010
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
ESCT2000
TRBD11y1
1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20
41
FANS1000


7.5 Line Terminal Master shelf – Regional application - Example
21 22 3 4 55 6 77 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40
PSUP
PSUP
HSKU
RAIU
OSCU1010
LOFA11y1
LOFA11y1
OMDX8100_L1_X
ESCT2000
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
USIB
1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20
41
FANS1000

To/from
OMDX8100_S2 +
OMDX8100_S1
EXP Up to 16λ
To/from EXTRA IN/OUT
Up to 8λ
OMDX8100_L2 IN/OUT
LOFA11y1_Unidir
To/from λ1 Booster
TRBD/TRBC
OMDX8100_L1_X
To/from 1 VOA 2
λ2
TRBD/TRBC To/from
OSC
WDM
line
2 VOA 1
OSC
LOFA11y1_Unidir
λ8
TRBD/TRBC

7.6 Line Terminal Secondary shelf – Regional application - Example
21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
OMDX8100_S2
OMDX8100_L2
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
ESCT2000
TRBD11y1
1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20
41
FANS1000


7.7 Line Repeater Master shelf - Example
21 22 3 4 55 6 77 8 9 10
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
OSCU1010
LOFA11y0
LOFA11y0
ESCT2000
1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20
41
FANS1000

LOFA11y0_Unidir
1 VOA 2
To/from OSC OSC To/from

WDM WDM
line line
2 VOA 1
OSC OSC
LOFA11y0_Unidir

7.8 Line Repeater-PGE Master shelf - Example
21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
LOFA11y0 (pre-amp)
LOFA11y0 (pre-amp)
LOFA11y0 (booster)
LOFA11y0 (booster)
OSCU1010
ALCT1010
ALCT1010
WMAN1100
WMAN1100
ESCT2000
USIB
OADC
OADC
0104
0104
1 2 23 24 25
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20
41 Fan

PGE: Programmable Gain Equalizer
OADC0104
OSC OSC
ALCT
ALCT

OADC0104
OSC OSC

7.9 Line Repeater-AGE Master shelf - Example
21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
LOFA11y0 (pre-amp)
LOFA11y0 (pre-amp)
LOFA11y0 (booster)
LOFA11y0 (booster)
OSCU1010
ALCT1010
ALCT1010
WMAN3174
WMAN3174
ESCT2000
OADC
OADC
0104
0104
1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20
41 Fan

OADC0104
OSC OSC
ALCT
ALCT

OADC0104
OSC OSC

7.10 BOADM Master shelf - Example
21 22 3 44 55 66 7 8 99 10 11
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40
HSKU
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
OSCU1010
LOFA11y0
LOFA11y0
LOFA11y0
LOFA11y0
ALCT1010
ALCT1010
BMDX1100
BMDX1100
CMDX1010
ESCT2000
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20
41
FANS1000

To/from
TRBD/TRBC (up
to 7)
CMDX 1
CMDX 1
Band 1
1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2
BMDX1100
BMDX1100
OSC OSC
ALCT
ALCT
2 VOA 1 2 VOA 1
OSC Band 12 OSC


7.11 TRBD4312 Secondary shelf - Example
21 22 33 44 555 66 777 88 99 10
10 11
11 12
12 13
13 14
14 15
15 16
16 17
17 18
18 39 40
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
BOFA (optional)
BOFA (optional)
BOFA (optional)
BOFA (optional)
OSCU1010
LOFA11y0
LOFA11y0
TRBD4312
TRBD4312
TRBD4312
TRBD4312
CMDX1010
ESCT2000
1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 34 38 19 20
41
FANS1000

CMDX1010

7.12 TRBD4412 Secondary shelf - Example
21 22 33 44 555 66 777 88 99 10
10 11
11 12
12 13
13 14
14 15
15 16
16 17
17 18
18 39 40
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
BOFA (optional)
BOFA (optional)
BOFA (optional)
BOFA (optional)
OSCU1010
LOFA11y0
LOFA11y0
TRBD4412
TRBD4412
TRBD4412
TRBD4412
CMDX1052
ESCT2000
1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 34 38 19 20
41
FANS1000


7.13 Mixed 40Gb/s & 10 Gb/s Transponder Secondary shelf - Example
21 22 33 44 555 66 777 88 99 10
10 11
11 12
12 13
13 14
14 15
15 16
16 17
17 18
18 39 40
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
OSCU1010
LOFA11y0
LOFA11y0
TRBD4312
TRBD4312
TRBD4312
TRBD4312
CMDX1010
ESCT2000
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 34 38 19 20
41
FANS1000

The 1626 LM subracks and software give flexibility in the unit declaration.

7.14 Degree-3 TR-OADM Rack - Example
TRU TRU TRU TRU TRU TRU

N°2 N°2 N°2
Line Line Line 8 TRBD 8 TRBD 8 TRBD
& WMAN & WMAN & WMAN With TDMX With TDMX With TDMX
Shelf OTS 1 Shelf OTS 2 Shelf OTS 3 & OADC1750 & OADC1750 & OADC1750
& LOFA & LOFA & LOFA
Air deflector Air deflector Air deflector Air deflector Air deflector Air deflector
N°3 N°3 N°3
8 TRBD 8 TRBD 8 TRBD 8 TRBD 8 TRBD 8 TRBD
With TDMX With TDMX With TDMX With TDMX With TDMX With TDMX
& OADC1750 & OADC1750 & OADC1750 & OADC1750 & OADC1750 & OADC1750
& LOFA & LOFA & LOFA
Air deflector Air deflector Air deflector Air deflector Air deflector Air deflector
N°1 N°1 N°1 N°4 N°4 N°4
8 TRBD 8 TRBD 8 TRBD 8 TRBD 8 TRBD 8 TRBD
With TDMX With TDMX With TDMX With TDMX With TDMX With TDMX
& OADC1750 & OADC1750 & OADC1750 & OADC1750 & OADC1750 & OADC1750
& LOFA & LOFA & LOFA & LOFA & LOFA & LOFA
Air input Air input Air input Air input Air input Air input

The complete rack view example illustrates a Degree-3 TR-OADM (Y Node) configuration, 10Gb/s rate,
unprotected, which can support up to 72 added/dropped channels.
In the illustration, one color is used per OTS.
CAUTION : It is strongly recommended not to mix OTS in racks and subracks. This organization brings a
clear position of each function/direction and makes easier the implementation and the operation.
The following table summarizes the capacity of a Degree-3 TR-OADM (Y Node) configuration, 10Gb/s
rate, unprotected, in comparison with shelves/racks number.
- Warning: 1626 LM R 5.0A is able to manage 6 racks at the maximum

7.15 TR-OADM Line Shelf for OTS 1 - Example
21 22 33 4 55 6 77 8 99 10
10 11
11 12 13
13 1414 15 16 17 18 39 40
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
LOFA11y0 (Pre-amplifier)
LOFA11y0 (Booster)
WMAN3174 OTS 1
OADC1300
OSCU1010
OADC1300
OSCU1010
LOFA1110
LOFA1110
ALCT1010
ESCT2000
USIB
USIB
OCNC
OADC
OADC
1230
1100
0104
25 25 25 25
1 2 25
23
23 24
25
24 25
25
25
24 26 25
27
25
24 28 25
29
25
24 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20
41
FANS1000

LOFA11y0
OCNC1230
1 VOA 2
OSC
D
To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 72)
M
ALCT
2 VOA 1 WMAN3174
OADC0104
OSC
LOFA11y0

21 22 33 4 55 6 77 8 99 10
10 11
11 12 13
13 1414 15 16 17 18 39 40
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
LOFA11y0 (Booster)
WMAN3174 OTS 2
OADC1300
OADC1300
LOFA1110
LOFA1110
ALCT1010
ESCT2000
OCNC
OADC
OADC
1230
1100
0104
25 25 25 25
1 2 25
23
23 24
25
24 25
25
25
24 26 25
27
25
24 28 25
29
25
24 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20
41
FANS1000

OCNC1230
Up to 72λ
1:2 OADC1100
D
OADC1300
TDMX1180 1:8
To/from TRBD/TRBC
1
1
(up to 8)
LOFA1110
LOFA1110
VOA
VOA
x8
2
2
TDMX1180 TDMX1180

(up to 8) (up to 8)

21 22 33 4 55 6 77 8 99 10
10 11
11 12 13
13 1414 15 16 17 18 39 40
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
LOFA11y0 (Booster)
WMAN3174 OTS 3
OADC1300
OADC1300
LOFA1110
LOFA1110
ALCT1010
ESCT2000
OCNC
OADC
OADC
1230
1100
0104
25 25 25 25
1 2 25
23
23 24
25
24 25
25
25
24 26 25
27
25
24 28 25
29
25
24 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20
41
FANS1000

WMAN3174
OADC1750 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ Up to 32λ Up to 32λ

M
4:1 4:1
LOFA1110
LOFA1110
2
2 VOA
VOA
To/from TRBD/TRBC
(up to 8)
1
OADC1300 Up to 32λ Up to 32λ OADC1300

8:1 8:1
OADC1750 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ x8 OADC1750 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ x8
4:1 4:1 4:1 4:1

7.18 TR-OADM Transponder Shelf per OTS - Example (8 first channels)
21 22 333
25
23
23 424
24
254 55
25
25 66
26 777
25
27 88
28 99
25
29
25 10
10
30 11
11 12 13
13 1414 15 16 17 18 39 40
25
24 25
24 24
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
(Booster)
LOFA11y0
TDMX1180
ALCT1010
OADC1750
ESCT2000
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
OCNC
OADC
OADC
1230
1100
0104
25 25 25 25
1 22 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 19 20
41
FANS1000

WMAN3174
OADC1750 M
4:1 4:1
To/from TRBD/TRBC
(up to 8)
OCNC1230
Up to 72λ
1:2 OADC1100
D
TDMX1180
To/from TRBD/TRBC
(up to 8)

7.19 TR-OADM Transponder Shelf per OTS - Example (From 9th to 72nd channel)
21 22 333
25
23
23 424
24
254 55
25
25 66
26 777
25
27 88
28 99
25
29
25 10
10
30 11
11 12 13
13 1414 15 16 17 18 39 40
25
24 25
24 24
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
(Booster)
LOFA11y0
TDMX1180
ALCT1010
OADC1750
ESCT2000
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
LOFA1110
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
OCNC
OADC
OADC
1230
1100
0104
25 25 25 25
1 22 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 19 20
41
FANS1000

OADC1100 D WMAN3174
Up to 32λ
Up to 4λ M
OADC1300 Up to 4λ Up to 32λ
LOFA1110
2 VOA
1:8
1
1
LOFA1110
VOA
Up to 32λ OADC1300
x8
8:1
2
Up to 4λ Up to 4λ
x8
TDMX1180
4:1 4:1
OADC1750
To/from TRBD/TRBC To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8)
(up to 8)

7.20 Master shelf configuration for ROADM - Example
21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40
HSKU
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
LOFA11y0 (pre-amp)
LOFA11y0 (pre-amp)
LOFA11y0 (booster)
LOFA11y0 (booster)
OSCU1010
ALCT1010
ALCT1010
WMAN1100
WMAN1100
BMDX1000
BMDX1000
ESCT2000
OADC
USIB
OADC
1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20
41
Fan

In the above example, the WMAN1100 boards are located in the “Master shelf” and related
transponders are inserted in a “Secondary shelf”.
It is also possible to insert the WMAN1100 in a “Secondary shelf” with the related transponders to
reduce the inter-shelf cabling between. It that case, WMAN1100 boards can be inserted in:
[3,4 and 5] + [23,24 and 25]
[16,17 and 18] + [36,37 and 38]

7.21 Degree-2 ROADM MASTER Line Shelf for OTS 1 - Example
21 22 33 4 55 6 77 8 99 10
10 11
11 12 13
13 1414 15 16 17 18 39 40
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
LOFA11y0 (Booster)
WMAN3174 OTS 1
OSCU1010
LOFA1110
ALCT1010
BMDX1000
ESCT2000
OCNC
OADC
1230
0104
25 25 25 25
1 2 25
23
23 24
25
24 25
25
25
24 26 25
27
25
24 28 25
29
25
24 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20
41
FANS1000

LOFA11y0_Unidir
OCNC1230
1 VOA 2 Express
OSC
CMDX 1
To/from TRBD / TRBC

BMDX1000
(up to 8)
OTS 1
CMDX 12
LOFA1110
1 VOA 2
To/from TRBD / TRBC

(up to 8)
ALCT
ADD
2 VOA 1 WMAN3174
Express
OSC Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s
LOFA11y0_Unidir

7.22 Degree-2 ROADM SLAVE Line Shelf for OTS 2 - Example
21 22 33 4 55 6 77 8 99 10
10 11
11 12 13
13 1414 15 16 17 18 39 40
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
LOFA11y0 (Booster)
WMAN3174 OTS 2
LOFA1110
ALCT1010
BMDX1000
ESCT2000
OCNC
OADC
1230
0104
25 25 25 25
1 2 25
23
23 24
25
24 25
25
25
24 26 25
27
25
24 28 25
29
25
24 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20
41
FANS1000

Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s LOFA11y0_Unidir

OADC0104
Express
WMAN3174 1 VOA 2
ADD OSC
ALCT
LOFA1110
2 VOA 1
CMDX
To/from TRBD / TRBC

1
BMDX1000
(up to 8)
OTS 2
CMDX
12
To/from TRBD / TRBC

(up to 8)
2 VOA 1
Express
OCNC1230 OSC
LOFA11y0_Unidir

7.23 1626LM Compact Office Shelf
495 mm
73 mm
PSUP 12 OSCU1010 6
LOFA11YZ 5 HSKU1100 10
F
4 RAIU1100 9 A
200 mm
3 8 N
S
LOFA11YZ 2 7
PSUP 11 ESCT2000 1 13

In R 5.0A, the 1626LM compact shelf is only used for Line Repeater configuration. As a consequence, it
only supports the following boards :
ESCT2000 (slot 1)
LOFA11yz (from slot 2 to 5) – Slots 2 and 5 are recommended
OSCU (from slot 2 to 6)
EMPM1000 (slots 3 and 4)
FANS2000 (slot 13)
PUSP (slots 11 and 12)
RAIU1100 (from slot 7 to 10) – Slot 9 is recommended
HSKU1100 (from slot 7 to 10) – Slot 10 is recommended

7.24 Power Feeding sub-system
Subrack Sharing
Duplicated
Filtered diodes supply for
-48V A DC/
each card
-48V A Filter DC Main

boards
3V, 5V
DC/
DC 3.7V A
5.4V A
PSUP
Back Panel Power
Filtered supply distribution
-48V B
-48V B Filter Auxiliary
-40.5 to -57 V 3V, 5V boards

DC/
DC input DC 3.7V B
Supplied from 5.4V B
Top Rack Unit PSUP

The power supply for each subrack is provided from the top of the rack through the Top Rack Unit,
which can provide up to 3 kW at a nominal -48 V DC. The power supply is divided between two power
rails to increase reliability. An auxiliary supply (3.7V and 5.4V) is also provided to each board to
maintain alarm operation in the case of local DC/DC converter failure.
Each power distribution supply to a subrack is protected by an individual thermo-magnetic circuit
breaker.
Each subrack has two power supply units (PSUP) working from the –48v supply in a load-sharing
configuration for protection against failure of one unit. These have an acceptance range of –40.5 V
to –57.0 V and provide filtering and surge suppression. Lower voltages are also generated by DC-DC
converters and distributed through the backplane to functional units on the subrack. A return path
to each of the two -48V supplies (A & B) from the units to the power supplies is provided.

Answer the Questions
1 – What is the operating window of DWDM systems ?

2 – Which optical band is used by the 1626 LM ?
3 – What is the minimum spacing between 2 channels ?
4 – What is the function of the OSC ?
5 – How many CMDX units can be associated to one BMDX unit ?
6 – Which NE type configurations are available ?
7 – Which protections are available ?
8 – Which BMDX unit is needed for BOADM repeater configuration ?
Time allowed:
15 minutes
Your answers
1 – The : window is used for DWDM systems.
3rd optical
12 –– The extended C-Band is used by the 1626 LM R 5.0A, between 1530nm

and 1568,6nm.
2–
3 – The minimum spacing between 2 channels is 50GHz for 1626 LM R5.0A.
3–
4 – The OSC is mainly dedicated to the transport of a 2Mb/s supervision
frame and if needed an other 2Mb/s signal as user data channel.
4–
5 – Up to 12 CMDX units can be associated to one BMDX unit.

5–
6 – LT, LR, BOADM, Small OADM, ROADM, TR-OADM and back-to-back
6 –terminal configurations are available for 1626 LM R 5.0A.
77 –– O-SNCP and OMSP.
88 -– BMDX1100 unit is needed for B-OADM repeater configuration.

Notes Page


Module Summary
1626 LM R 5.0A is a very flexible solution

Terrestrial applications : Regional, LH, ULH
50GHz or 100GHz channel spacing
Linear, ring and meshed network topologies
Terminal, B-t-B, Repeater, B-OADM, Small OADM, ROADM and TR-OADM
configurations
G.709 10Gb/s and 40Gb/s Transponders
Ethernet aggregation and transport
J0 and OTUk traces management
Upgrade of existing infrastructures

1640 WM, 1686 WM
Highly integrated
Up to 48 transponders in one rack


Self-assessment on the Objectives
Please be reminded to fill in the form

Self-Assessment on the Objectives
for this module
The form can be found in the first part
of this course documentation


End of Module
System General Description


Section 1
Product Overview
Module 2
System Operation Overview


Blank Page

Product Overview System Operation Overview
Document History

Module Objectives
Describe the main management facilities of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R5.0A





Table of Contents
Page
1 Management tools 7
1.1 1626 LM management 8
1.2 Management internal architecture 9
1.3 1626 LM Equipment view 10
1.4 1626 LM Equipment view _ Compact shelf 11
1.5 Navigation diagram 12
2 Operation and maintenance facilities 13
2.1 Main operation facilities 14
2.2 Main maintenance facilities 15
3 G.709 standard in 1626 LM 17
3.1 OTN network layers 18
3.2 Optical Transport Network benefits 19
3.3 Optical Transport Hierarchy 20
3.4 G709 framing structure 21
3.5 UNI and NNI interfaces 22
3.6 How does TRBD11y1_UNI work? 23
3.7 How does TRBD11y1_NNI work? 24
3.8 How does TRBC1111_UNI work? 25
3.9 How does TRBD4x12_UNI work? 27
4 Optical 1+1 Protection 29
4.1 OSNCP Protection: Principle 30
4.2 OSNCP architecture 31
4.3 OMSP Protection: Principle 32
125
4.4 OMSP Protection: Physical implementation 33
4.5 System
OMSP Protection: Failure detection 34
Product Overview Operation Overview



1 Management tools


1 Management tools
1.1 1626 LM management
1350 OMS & SPLM

Three software applications
can be used to operate and
maintain the WDM network :
1320 CT
1350 OMS DCDC NN
SPLM Tool GNE Q3
DCC/OSC BtB DCC/OSC
BtB WDM
Metro ring network

F LR
SPLM BOADM
1320 CT DCC/OSC DCC/OSC
Each NE can be managed either locally through F interface with a 1320 Craft Terminal or remotely
through Q3 interface with an Operation System : 1350 OMS. In latter case, the directly connected NE
to OS (via a LAN or a DCN) is known as Gateway NE.
When connected to a NE via F or Q3 interface, it is possible to reach any other NE belonging to the
same optical sub-system via two “out-of-band” Data Communication Channels, carried by the OSC :
OMS-DCC terminated in terminals and OADM (3 bytes)
OTS- DCC terminated in all equipment (9 bytes)
In addition to DCC, the supervision frame carried by the OSC can also transport one EOW (voice
channel) and one 64kb/s auxiliary data channel.
A User Data Channel at 2Mbit/s (G.703) between each NE is available for any purpose, carried also by
the OSC.
SPLM tool description

optimization for a given photonic Subnetwork.
SPLM is integrated in the 1350 OMS from NR9.1 (1626LM R 5.0A), SPLM is also available as a side
application of the Craft-Terminal from 1626LM R 5.0

1 Management tools
1.2 Management internal architecture
MASTER SHELF SECONDARY SHELF

The controller sub–system is based on a two–level model:

Equipment Controller (EC)
Shelf Controller (SC).
There is one active Equipment Controller in each node (first level controller) and one active Shelf
Controller in each shelf (second level controller). The ESCT2000 (Equipment and Shelf Controller) is
the hardware platform designed to support the EC function and the SC function. When the board is
located in the master shelf, both functionalities are operational and active. When the board is
located in secondary shelves, only the SC functionality is provided. The IS-LINK realizes the
communication between the EC and all the SCs located in separated shelves. Communication
between the EC and the local SC is done through the ISSB (Intra Shelf Serial Bus).
Equipment Controller function

EC is in charge of equipment configuration, ASAP, Alarms correlations, history storage of 15 Minutes
and 24hour PM data, software version management, software activation, software download,
filtering, logging and forwarding of events and alarms received by SCs, OSI/IP routing capability
configuration, access control. The Database which contains the NE configuration is saved in the
pluggable Flash card.
Shelf Controller function
In a shelf, all the boards are connected to the SC via the SPI or ISPB (for PM collection on ETHC1000
board) bus allowing the SC processor to collect the control information of the boards (e.g.: alarms
collection, Performance data, Analogue Measurement, Card Detection, Firmware version, remote
inventory and data EEPROM reading).
Failure or removal of either type of management unit (EC/SC) will not directly affect traffic.
In case of complete power outage, removal of ESCT card in Master shelf when power comes back will
clear configuration registers of secondary cards (all units).
1 Management tools
1.3 1626 LM Equipment view
Subrack identification and

location in the equipment
Board alarm
synthesis
indicator
Empty
board
slot
“In service and locked”

administrative state indicator

From 1320 CT or from the OS (135O OMS), the “Equipment view” application (also called EML-USM)
displays in graphical mode the NE hardware configuration such as defined in NE software database
(Management Information Base): number of racks, number of shelves per rack, slot configuration,
board view, port view. Alarm and administrative status are provided through the different “view”
levels.
For instance, “Board alarm synthesis indicator” colour from Equipment view (as shown above) reflects
the highest current alarm severity, regarding the “Equipment domain” alarms only.
When a board is “in service and locked”, no modification is enabled regarding the corresponding slot
configuration. The board must be set “out of service” before any change (removal or modification of
slot configuration).
The above shelf belong to a 1626 LM R5.0A installed in Degree 3 TR-OADM application. This first shelf
includes among other boards, the following: 2 x PSUP1000, ESCT2000, OSCU1010, 2 x LOFA1110,
WMAN3, TMDX1180, ETHC1000, TRBD1191, OADC1750, ALCT1010 and FAN1000

1 Management tools
1.4 1626 LM Equipment view _ Compact shelf
Configuration corresponding
to a Line Repeater

The above Line Repeater includes the following boards:

- 2 x PSUP1000, ESCT2000, OSCU1010, 2 x LOFA1120 and FAN2000

1 Management tools
1.5 Navigation diagram


2 Operation and maintenance facilities


2.1 Main operation facilities
Equipment configuration
Subrack, boards and drawers declaration
Remote inventory
Optical cabling declaration
Optical channel management

ROADM and TR-OADM configuration
O-SNCP and OMPS: cross-connections display
TRBD1191 cross-connections management
Ethernet transport: cross-connections management
OTS, ODU, OTU and J0 traces management on OSCU, transponders and
Ethernet boards
Optical power management

Power tuning
Thresholds tuning

Optical channel management

- To facilitate the TR-OADM management, 1626 LM R5.0A provides the operate a way to force the “Line
state” (ON / OFF) for a given channel
- The TR-OADM configuration (Multi-degree application) includes 3 main steps
- WMAN board configuration
- TDMX1180 configuration
- Related cross-connections management

2.2 Main maintenance facilities
Performance Monitoring : activation and data collection OCPU 2104
Power level measurements
Spectrum acquisition
on WMAN accesses
M S
SPLM tool
Alarms handling
OSNCP and OMSP status management
Loopback management
Backup and restore
Remote inventory
Board replacement

Analog Performance Monitoring

The 1626LM provides the possibility, through 1350 OMS, of performing a regular and configurable
polling of the optical powers measured on each monitoring point of the equipment. The obtained
data can be stored for history tracking and dedicated threshold crossing alarms can be set

optimization for a given photonic Subnetwork. SPLM tool is co-hosted with 1320 CT on a PC or with
1350 OMS on a server.
In the current release the SPLM:
provides a network topology management function,
calculates and displays the available channel margin for each channel,
tunes the output power of WSS based boards for TR-OADM and ROADM (WSS based)
configurations.

Notes Page


3 G.709 standard in 1626 LM


3 G709 standard in 1626 LM
3.1 OTN network layers
Digital Signal Path
OCH Trail
OMS Trail OMS Trail

Ops Ops
OTS Phys. Conn. OTS Phys. Conn.
CLIENT CLIENT
TERMINAL TERMINAL
IN LINE IN LINE
REPEATER REPEATER
LINE BACK TO BACK LINE

TERMINAL TERMINAL TERMINAL

The 1626 LM implements the Optical Transport Network standard (specified in ITU-T G.709) to provide
Operations, Administration, Maintenance and Provisioning functionalities to this DWDM platform.
This recommendation – sometimes referred to as Digital Wrapper (DW) – takes single wavelength
SONET/SDH technology a step further enabling transparent, wavelength manageable multi-
wavelength networks.

3.2 Optical Transport Network benefits
The implementation of the OTN Architecture in the WDM Equipment

extends the transport control capabilities of the WDM optical channels.
OTN makes leverage on the transport layers defined in the OTH in order
to provide:
Mapping of a client signal of any rate (up to payload capacity) into containers
at pre-defined bit-rates. This allows:
To map a synchronous signal (SDH) into an asynchronous one (WDM)
Client-independent networking
Embedded associated overhead information for management and networking
purposes (monitoring, support for complex connectivity, protections, alarms,
etc.)
Capability to support hierarchical multiplexing and concatenation

OTN (Optical Transport Network) architecture is defined in the ITU-T G.872 Recommendation, while
the ITU-T G.709 Recommendation defines its interface in terms of Optical Transport Hierarchy
(OTH).
The principles of these Architectures are implemented in Alcatel-Lucent WDM Equipment starting from
1626 LM R 2.0.

3.3 Optical Transport Hierarchy
Optical (channel) Payload Unit

Optical (channel) Data Unit
Optical Transport (channel) Unit
Optical Channel
Optical Channel Carrier
Optical Multiplex Section
Optical Transmission section
OTM Overhead Signal
Optical Supervisory Channel
Optical Physical Section

In OTH the Optical Channel layer is further structured in layers:

OPUk: Optical (channel) Payload Unit
ODUk: Optical (channel) Data Unit
OTUk: Optical (channel) Transport Unit
The index k specifies the signal rate supported, according to the following convention:
K=1 represents an approximate rate of 2.5 Gbit/s
K=2 represents an approximate rate of 10 Gbit/s
K=3 represents an approximate rate of 40 Gbit/s
The OPUk, ODUk and OTUk layers are introduced in OTH in order to support the network management
and supervision functionality through the contents of the additional signal overhead (OH) of the
Units.
The Optical Channels, mapped to the OCC structure, are transported into an information structure
named Optical Transport Module (OTM-n).
The OTM-n with full functionalities transports an additional overhead: the OTM Overhead Signal (OOS),
containing overhead information related to the OCh, OMS and OTS sections.
The OSS information is mapped into a separate channel named Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC).
The index n in OTM-n specifies the number of OCC transported by the structure (not including the
OSC). OTM-n plays a role similar to STM-n in SDH architecture, the OCCs acting as tributary slots
within the OTM-n architecture.
3.4 G709 framing structure
G-709 framing performed by transponders provides Operation and

Maintenance tools for the WDM line management
GCC0, TTI OPU-2
OTU-2
FA OH F
OH O
OPU-2 E OPU-2 STM-64 STM-64
ODU-2 ODU-2 H
C
OH OH
OTU-2 ODU-2 10.3 Gb/s : 10GbEth LAN

9.957 Gb/s : Other
O
ODTUG-12
11.09 Gb/s : 10GbEth LAN
10.709 Gb/s : Other H
ODU-1
GCC1/GCC2, TTI, PM, APS, TCM x4

ODTUG-12 OPU-1
ODU-1
OH
O
STM-16 STM-16
H
OPU-1
The framing structure depicted above does not take into account the level 3 (k=3) corresponding to
40Gbit/s bit-rate.
First, client signal is mapped into an OPU-k by adding an Over Head. The OPU OH consists of the
Payload Structure Identifier (PSI) which includes the Payload Type (PT) and overhead bits associated
with the mapping of client signals into the payload, like for example, the justification bits required
for asynchronous mappings. The OPU OH is therefore terminated at the point where the OPU is
assembled and disassembled.
ODU-k is then obtained by adding another OH to the OPU-k. The ODU-k OH consists of portions
dedicated to the end-to-end ODU-k path and to six levels of tandem connection monitoring. The
ODU-k path OH is terminated where the ODU-k is assembled and disassembled. The Tandem
Connection OH is added and terminated at the source and sink of the corresponding tandem
connections, respectively. Additional bytes provides two General Communication Channels
(GCC1/GCC2) and Protection Communication Channels to manage Automatic Protection Switching at
different levels (ODU-k path, ODU-k TCM, OTU-k section).
The OTU-2 frame structure is based on the ODU-2 frame structure by adding an OH and a FEC code.
The overhead of OTU-2 is composed of a Frame Alignment Overhead (FA OH in the figure above) and
an OTU-2 OH to support operational functions for transport via one or several Optical Channel
Carriers (OCC). FA OH consists of a Frame Alignment Signal to detect the beginning of the OTU-2
signal and a Multi Frame Alignment Signal as OTU and ODU frames can span multiple OTU frames.
The OTU-2 OH provides bytes for the Section Monitoring (Trail Trace Identifier, BIP-8…) and a
General Communication Channel (GCC0).

3.5 UNI and NNI interfaces
Client
WDM
WDMNetwork
Network NE
Client
NE
UNI
UNI
NNI
UNI
Block Diagram for UNI: DS OPUk ODUk OTUk OCH
NNI
Block Diagram for NNI: OCH OTUk OTUk OCH
ODUk frame pass-through

User to Network Interface (UNI) defines the characteristics of an interface between the Data Signal (DS),
that is the client input signal (for example a STM-64 frame) and the Optical Payload Unit (OPUk). In the
UNI, the ODUk and the OPUk sections are terminated
The UNI is the typical interface between an external NE and a G.709 WDM NE.
Network to Network Interface (NNI) defines the characteristics of an interface between two Optical
Transport Unit (OTUk). In the UNI, only the OTUk section is terminated, while the ODUk and the OPUk
sections are not.
The NNI is normally used when two transponders are connected together inside a WDM node through
their B&W interface for regeneration of the client signal.
The NNI is supported over 10G TRBD only in R 5.0A.

3.6 How does TRBD11y1_UNI work?
Port #1 Port #101
O O O
O O O
G D G
Client P
C
U
T C
P Line
H U H
I 2 I
FA OH OTU-2 F
O OH
STM64 STM64 OPU-2 OPU-2 E
H ODU-2 OH ODU-2 OH C
OPU-2 ODU-2 G709 frame

: Alarm monitoring
- Port #1 is in charge of the BW signal on the user side in a bidirectional way. It manages also the
smallest G709 block of the board: OPU-2.
- Port #101 is in charge of the WDM signal on the WDM side in a bidirectional way. It performs also
upper G709 encapsulation management: ODU-2 and OUT-2.
- On both sides (Client and Line) the incoming and outgoing signals are managed by an OGPI interface.
- OGPI block is mandatory on client side as it is at the boundary of the WDM NE and connected to
the SDH NE.
- Alcatel-Lucent as decided to use an OGPI interface systematically on WDM side. It is also
mandatory when the transponder is installed in a distant shelf (remote shelf). To keep an
homogeneous view, it is kept even if the transponder is installed “locally” in the master shelf or in
any other one belonging to the NE. This OGPI block on WDM side is connected to a similar OGPI
block belonging to the next connected board (more details to be described case by case in this
course).

3.7 How does TRBD11y1_NNI work?
Port #1 Port #101
O O
O O O O
G G
Client P
C T T C
P Line
H U U H
I I
FA OH OTU-2 F OTU-2 FA OH OTU-2 F

OH OH OH
OPU-2 E OPU-2 OPU-2 E
ODU-2 OH C ODU-2 OH ODU-2 OH C
G709 frame OTU G709 frame

: Alarm monitoring
- Port #1 and Port #101 are in charge of the WDM signal on the User and WDM sides in a bidirectional
way. On both sides (Client and Line) the incoming and outgoing signals are managed by an OGPI
interface.

3.8 How does TRBC1111_UNI work?
Port #1 to 4 Port #101
O O
O O O
O D
D O O
G D G
Client P
C U
U
2 U
T C
P Line
H 1 odu U H
I 2 I
1
STM16
O
STM16 OPU-1 x4 ODTUG-12
H ODU-1 OH
OPU-1 ODU-1

: Alarm monitoring
- Port #1 to 4 are in charge of the BW signal on the user side in a bidirectional way. They manage also
the smallest G709 blocks of the board: OPU-1and ODU-1.
- Port #101 is in charge of the WDM signal on the WDM side in a bidirectional way. It performs also the
multiplexing and de-multiplexing (4 to 1 / 1 to 4) and the upper G709 encapsulation management:
OPU-2, ODU-2 and OUT-2.
the SDH NE.
course).

3.8 How does TRBC1111_UNI work? [cont.]
Port #1 to 4 Port #101
O O
O O O
O D
D O O
G D G
Client P
C U
U
2 U
T C
P Line
H 1 odu U H
I 2 I
1
FA OH OTU-2 F
O OH
ODTUG-12 OPU-2 OPU-2 E
OPU-2 ODU-2 OTU-2

: Alarm monitoring
- Port #1 to 4 are in charge of the BW signal on the user side in a bidirectional way. They manage also
the smallest G709 block of the board: OPU-1 and ODU-1.
- Port #101 is in charge of the WDM signal on the WDM side in a bidirectional way. It performs also the
multiplexing and de-multiplexing (4 to 1 / 1 to 4) and the upper G709 encapsulation management:
OPU-2, ODU-2 and OUT-2.
the SDH NE.
course).

3.9 How does TRBD4x12_UNI work?
Port #1 Port #101
O O O
O O O
G D G
Client P
C
U
T C
P Line
H U H
I 3 I
FA OH OTU-3 F
O OH
STM256 STM256 OPU-3 OPU-3 E
OPU-3 ODU-3 G709 frame

: Alarm monitoring
- Port #1 is in charge of the BW signal on the user side in a bidirectional way. It manages also the
smallest G709 block of the board: OPU-3.
- Port #101 is in charge of the WDM signal on the WDM side in a bidirectional way. It performs also
upper G709 encapsulation management: ODU-3 and OTU-3.
the SDH NE.
course).

Notes Page


4 Optical 1+1 Protection


4.1 OSNCP Protection: Principle
Optical Subnetwork Connection Protection (OSNCP) driven by

signal degrade
In R 5 the Signal Degradation (SD) switching criterion is added to the ones
supported since R 3.
The OSNCP switching based on SD relies on the count of the FEC
uncorrected blocks. The block size managed by the smeraldo ASIC (used in
all 10Gbs TRB of the 1626LM) is 1020 bits. During one second there are
10709225316/1020=10499450 blocks.
A specific new alarm (FUE=FEC uncorrected errors) is implemented in R 5;
this alarm is raised if the UE count overcomes a defined threshold in an
observation window of 1s.
The FUE default threshold value is 10499451, which corresponds to no
alarm in default state.
The OSNCP mechanism does not change in any other way compared to R.3
and R.4, the new switching criterion is simply added to all the others.
The switching is still based on the backplane communication between the
working and the protection transponder and takes place only if the
protection path is not alarmed.
Revertive OSNCP over TRBD 40G and TRBD1191
This feature is implemented through the introduction of configurable
parameters

4.2 OSNCP architecture
½ OCPU2104
B-t-B terminal
TRBD
Spare
Main
LR LR
Spare
Main
TRBD
B-OADM
½ OCPU2104

The Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM can support Optical SubNetwork Connection Protection.
This is realized activating the OSNCP functionality on two adjacent transponders (connected by
backplane links) and connecting the 2 B&W inputs to the outputs of an optical 50/50 splitter and the
2 B&W outputs to the inputs of an optical coupler supported by OCPU2104 boards.
The “switch position” is not realized by means of changing the position of an optical switch. In fact
both transponder B&W outputs are connected to a coupler, not a switch. Thus, in order to realize a
“switch”, the two transponders synchronize themselves such that 1 transponder shuts down the B&W
laser, and the other activates it; in this way at anytime only one B&W output is carrying power (and
signal), and the coupler always receives maximum one signal.
The maximum time allowed for the “switch” is 50 ms.
The “LSP” function is also responsible for deciding whether to shutdown a B&W laser or to let it active
and sending an AIS (ODU--AIS or Generic--AIS), depending on the alarms on the received signal. Thus
it is important to clarify the relations between these two functions, which both act on the B&W
laser. From the functional point of view, the LSP functions operates before the OSNCP function; the
signal received from WDM is first submitted to LSP function (that can decide to let it as it is, or
generate an AIS, or shutdown the laser), then to OSNCP function (that can decide to either force the
B&W laser shutdown, or let the signal coming from the LSP function as it is).
The protection switching is triggered by the following switching criteria : LOS, OUT-LOF, OTU-LOM,
OTU-TIM, ODU-AIS, Generic AIS and FEC uncorrected errors.
Switching type is “unilateral”, meaning that switching criteria is local only. Switch position is
independent from far end site switch position. External commands are available such as “Lockout”
or “Forced switch”.
4.3 OMSP Protection: Principle
Optical Multiplex Section Protection (OMSP) for LH and regional LT

and fixed add/drop (BOADM and Small OADM)
The OMSP is a protection architecture that duplicates the transmission
line with the exception of the transponders and the Mux/Demux. It is
therefore particularly suitable in case the main cause of transmission
down-time comes from transmission fiber cable damages.
The OMSP switching is performed on the aggregated signal before the line
amplification. The line (optical amplifiers, transmission fiber) is fully
protected.
The APSD procedure implemented on the 1626LM line is kept unchanged
and compliant to the G.664 recommendation.
The OMSP switching event is triggered by:
Transmission line failure communicated to the sites where the OMSP switching
takes place by means of OMS-FDI forwarding on the OSC if the failed span is far;
LOS detected on the site where the OMSP switching takes place in case the
affected span is adjacent to the node itself

OMSP consists in the following:

• On the transmitting side, an OCPU board acts as a splitter
• On the receiving side, OCPU board acts as a protection switch. The fact is that the ²Split² and the
²Switch² are both implemented on the same OCPU2100 board (it is actually a double split/switch,
identical to the OCPU2102 used in 1:N protection except for the split ratio, which is 70/30 in
OCPU2102, but 50/50 in OCPU2100).
• A PSCU board acts as a protection controller and manages the OCPU boards.
OMS_FDI (Forward Defect Indication) maintenance signal shall be sent/received by the NE to warn
other NEs about failures. The corresponding alarm shall be raised.
OM1 (K1) and OM2 (K2) bytes shall transport OMS-FDI signal.
OM1 (K1) and OM2 (K2) bytes shall transport OMS-FDI_p (_p for “payload”) after LOS detected by LOFA
board.
OM1 (K1) and OM2 (K2) bytes shall transport OMS-FDI_o (_o for “overhead”) after LOS detected by
Supervision board.

4.4 OMSP Protection: Physical implementation
LOFA11y0
TRBD1xyz
1:8
OCPU2100
OSC OTS Protection
Fail Switch
OSCU
1:12
Protection PSCU3000
Controller
Signal Fail 1 / 2 1626LM
« SGWP 1 /2 »
Protection Commands
Signal
Optical patch cord
Signal
Backplane electrical link

OMSP Implementation principle

On a signal failure, 2 electrical signals are sent by the OSCU to PSCU3 (SGWP1 and SGWP2). The PSCU3
board compare the actual position of OCPU2 switch and the receive signal. With these informations,
it controls the OCPU2 switch position.
The switching decision is managed by PSCU3000 from the links SGWP1/SGWP2 coming from OSCU
boards.
PSCU3000 does not support revertive switching (where the traffic is automatically switched back to the
protected channel after the protection switch condition is cleared). Only non-revertive switching is
supported.
PSCU3 can manage 2 switches located inside the same OCPU2100.

4.5 OMSP Protection: Failure detection
Failure 1 on adjacent span can be detected
directly by NE D and protection can be
activated by LOS detection
NE B NE C
NE A NE D
NE E
NE F
OMS
Failure 2 on non adjacent span is masked by amplification in NE F and E.

Can be detected by means of a remote defect indication ⇒ FDI (Forward Defect
Indication) is generated in OMS overhead and transmitted to the remote terminal
(F→A and ED)

Optical Multiplex Section Protection (OMSP) for LH and regional LT and fixed add/drop
The OMSP target switching time is < 50 ms.
The OMSP protection is physically implemented by means of three cards:
OCPU2100: integrates a 50/50 splitter in the transmit direction and an optical switch in the
receive direction,
PSCU3000: it is the protection controller and manages the OCPU2100 status on the basis of the
protection switching criteria detected in the node,
OSCU1010 for OMSP: it is the only OSCU board version that guarantee insuring the OMSP
protection switch activation (amplifiers ShutDown).
In an amplified configuration, in case of optical failure (failure 1 in the figure), the network element
can detect directly the Loss Of Signal (LOS). If the failure occurs on a non adjacent span (failure 2 in
the figure), the amplifier masks the failure for the network elements A and D. In this last case, the
network elements E and F generate a signal named FDI (Forward Defect Indicator) to the network
elements D and A. This signal is supported by the supervision frame in the K2 byte. NE A and D assert
an alarm FDI to the operator.
In normal operation, when protection is activated, both receiving laser amplifiers are working, but
only the Main amplifier is connected to the demultiplexer via the receiving OCPU switch.
The OMS-P switching event is triggered by:
• OMS-FDI forwarding on the OSC to signal a line failure on a remote span.
• LOS detected on the site where the OMSP switching takes place, if the affected span is adjacent to
the node itself.

Notes Page


True False
DCC channels for inter-NE communication are “in-band”
CT and OS may have full access to one NE in same time
EC is in charge of equipment configuration, ASAP, PM
Data History
Alarm synthesis indicator in “Equipment view” applies
to Equipment domain alarms only
Loopbacks are not supported
J0 trace is supported
Internal optical cabling is not managed by the software
G709 implementation extends the transmission control
capabilities
G709 is supported for STM16, STM64 and STM256 client
signals
Time allowed:
10 minutes
Notes :
True False
DCC channels for inter-NE communication are “in-band”

CT and OS may have full access to one NE in same time
EC is in charge of equipment configuration, ASAP and PM Data
History
Alarm synthesis indicator in “Equipment view” applies to Equipment
domain alarms only
Loopbacks are not supported
J0 trace is supported
Internal optical cabling is not managed by the software
G709 implementation extends the transmission control
capabilities
G709 is supported for STM16, STM64 and STM256 client signals

Notes Page


Module Summary
1626 LM R 5.0A management
Locally by 1320CT and SPLM tool through F interface
Remotely by 1350 OMS (OS) and SPLM tool through Q3 interface
Optical supervisory channel in the WDM link between two NEs
Management communication (LAPD), Voice channel (EOW) and UDC
Operation and maintenance facilities from equipment view
Operation
Equipment configuration : subrack, boards, drawers and optical cabling declaration
R-OADM and TR-ODAM configuration
OSNCP, OMSP, TRBD1191 and Ethernet cross-connections display and management
JO, ODUk and OTUk traces configuration
Optical power tuning
Maintenance
Performance Monitoring and power level measurements
Spectrum acquisition on WMAN accesses
Alarms handling
Protection status management
Loopback management
Backup and restore
Board replacement
SPLM tool co-hosted with 132O CT or 1350 OMS

1626 LM R 5.0A supports OTN framing (G.709)


for this module


End of Module
System Operation Overview


Section 1
Product Overview
Module 3
Boards Description


Blank Page

Product Overview Boards Description
Document History

Module Objectives
Describe the faceplate and the main features of the Alcatel-Lucent

1626 LM R 5.0A boards





Table of Contents
1 Boards overview 7
1.1 User access and related boards 8
1.2 R/TR-OADM and related boards 9
1.3 Line amplifier and related boards 10
1.4 NE management and related boards 11
2 User access and related boards description 13
2.1.1 TRBD11y1 faceplate 14
2.1.2 TRBD11y1 functional description 15
2.2.1 TRBD4xy2 faceplate 16
2.2.2 TRBD4312 functional description 17
2.2.3 TRBD4412 and TRBD4612 functional description 18
2.3.1 TRBC1111 faceplate 20
2.3.2 TRBC1111 functional description 21
2.4.1 TRBC4x12 faceplate 22
2.4.2 TRBC4x12 functional description 23
2.5.1 OCPU2104 faceplate 24
2.5.2 OCPU2104 functional description 25
2.6.1 OCPU2100 faceplate 26
2.6.2 OCPU2100 functional description 27
2.7.1 PSCU3000 faceplate 28
2.7.2 PSCU3000 functional description 29
2.8.1 2xGBE_FC faceplate 30
2.8.2 2xGBE_FC functional description 31
135
2.9.1 ETHC1000 faceplate All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 32
Product Overview2.9.2 ETHC1000
Boards Description functional description 33
2.10.1 CMDX1010 faceplate 34

2.10.4 CMDX10yz functional description 37
2.11.1 HOST1001 faceplate 38
2.11.2 HOST1001 functional description 39
2.12.1 BMDX1x00 faceplate 40
2.12.2 BMDX1y00 functional description 41
2.13.1 OMDX8100_x faceplate 42
2.13.2 OMDX8100_x functional description 43
2.14.1 OMDX4100_chx-chy faceplate 44
3 R/TR-OADM and related boards description 45
3.1.1 OADC1102 faceplate 46
3.1.2 OADC1102 functional description 47
3.2.1 WMAN1100 faceplate 48
3.2.2 WMAN1100 functional description 49
3.3.1 OCNC1220 faceplate 50
3.3.2 OCNC1220 functional description 51
3.9.1 TDMX1180 faceplate 62
3.9.2 TDMX1180 functional description 63

3.10.1 WMAN3174 faceplate 64

3.10.2 WMAN3174 functional description 65
4 Line amplifier and related boards description 71
4.1.1 ALCT1010 faceplate 72
4.1.2 ALCT1010 functional description 73
4.2.1 LOFA11y0 faceplate 74
4.2.2 LOFA11y0 functional description 75
4.2.3 LOFA11y1 functional description 76
4.3.1 BOFA1000 faceplate 78
4.3.2 BOFA1000 functional description 79
4.4.1 BOFA2000 faceplate 80
4.4.2 BOFA2000 functional description 81
4.5.1 EMPM1000 faceplate 82
4.5.2 EMPM1000 functional description 83
5 NE management and related boards description 85
5.1.1 ESCT2000 faceplate 86
5.1.2 ESCT2000 functional description 87
5.1.3 ESCT2000_SC faceplate 88
5.2.1 OSCU1010 faceplate 90
136
5.2.2 OSCU1010 functional description All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 91
Product Overview5.2.3 2Mb/s
Boards Description supervision frame structure 92
5.3.1 USIB1000 faceplate 94
5.3.2 USIB1000 functional description 95

5.4.1 HSKU1000 & HSKU1100 faceplates 96
5.4.2 HSKU1000 & HSKU1100 functional descriptions 97
5.5.1 RAIU1000 & RAIU1100 faceplates 98
5.5.2 RAIU1000 & RAIU1100 functional descriptions 99
5.6.1 PSUP1000 faceplate 100
5.6.2 PSUP1000 functional description 101
5.7.1 FANS1000 faceplate 102
5.7.2 FANS1000 functioning 103
5.8.1 FANS2000 faceplate 104
5.8.2 FANS2000 functioning 105

1 Boards overview


1 Boards overview
1.1 User access and related boards
Board Generic shelf

Board
Board Acronym width Maximum
height Slot #
(slot) quantity
TRBD11y1 Tall 1 16 3 to 18
TRBD4x12 Tall 3 4 3 to 18
TRBC1111 Tall 1 16 3 to 18
TRBC4x12 Tall 3 4 3 to 18
OCPU210z Medium 1 8 3 to 18
PSCU3000 Small 1 1 39
2xGBE_FC Medium 1 16 3 to 18
ETHC1000 Tall 1 12 3 to 18
CMDX10yz Medium 1 2 2 to 19
HOST1001 Medium 1 2 2 to 19
BMDX1x00 Tall 1 2 3 to 18
OMDX8100_x Medium 1 4 3 to 18
OMDX4100_chx-chy Medium 1 1 3 to 18

CMDX 1
To/from
LOFA11y0_Unidir
transponders
Booster
CMDX 2
1 VOA 2
With / without
BMDX1000
Eth. / FC OSC To/fro

boards m WDM
line
ALCT
With / without 2 VOA 1

O-SNCP
protection OSC
LOFA11y0_Unidir
CMDX 12
Preamplifier

1 Boards overview
1.2 R/TR-OADM and related boards
Board Generic shelf

Board Board
width Maximum
Acronym height Slot #
(slot) quantity
OADC1102 Small 1 (*) 23 to 38
WMAN1100 Tall 3 2 3 to 18
OCNC12y0 (**) Small 1 (*) 23 to 38
OCNC1280 Medium 1 (*) 2 to 19
OADC1300 Medium 1 (*) 3 to 18
TMDX1180 Tall 4 1 3 to 18
WMAN3174 Tall 4 1 3 to 18
OADC1750 Medium 1 1 2
OADC0104 Small 1 (*) 23 to 38
(*): Refer to the examples in “System general description/1626 LM system layout” part of this
documentation.
(**): OCNC12y0 refers to OCNC1220, OCNC1230 and OCNC1240.

LOFA11y0_Unidir Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s LOFA11y0_Unidir

OCNC1230 Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s OADC0104
WMAN
3174
1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2
OSC
D M
OSC
ALCT
To TRBD/TRBC (up to 72) From TRBD/TRBC (up to 72)

WMAN
3174
OADC1750
OCNC1230 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ Up to 32λ
4:1 4:1
2
LOFA
1110
½
VOA
1:
2 OADC1100 To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8)
1
OADC130 Up to 32λ
TDMX1180 ½ OADC1300 0 8:1
1:8 OADC1750
x8
Up to 4λ Up to 4λ
4:1 4:1
To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 8)
1 Boards overview
1.3 Line amplifier and related boards
Board Generic shelf Compact shelf

Board Board
width Maximum Maximum
Acronym height Slot # Slot #
(slot) quantity quantity
ALCT1010 Medium 1 2 3 to 18
LOFA11yz Medium 1 4 3 to 18 2 2 to 5
BOFA1000 Medium 1 (*) 2 to 20
BOFA2000 Medium 1 (*) 2 to 20
EMPM1000 Medium 1 4 3 to 18 2 2 to 5
(*) To be analyzed case by case according to the network planning design.

CMDX 1
LOFA11y0_Unidir
Booster
To/from
CMDX 2
transponders 1 VOA 2
BMDX1000
With / without OSC To/fro

Eth. / FC boards m WDM
line
ALCT
With / without
O-SNCP 2 VOA 1
protection
OSC
LOFA11y0_Unidir
CMDX 12
Preamplifier

1 Boards overview
1.4 NE management and related boards
Board Generic shelf Compact shelf

Board Board
width Maximum Maximum
Acronym height Slot # Slot #
(slot) quantity quantity
ESCT2000 Medium 1 1 1 1 1
ESCT2000_SC Medium 1 1 1
OSCU10yz Medium 1 2 3 to 18 1 2 to 6
USIB1000 Small 1 1 23 to 38 1 7 to 10
RAIU1000 Small 1 1 22, 39
RAIU1100 Small 1 1 23 to 38 1 7 to 10
HSKU1000 Small 1 1 22, 39
HSKU1100 Small 1 1 (*) 23 to 38 1 (*) 7 to 10
PSUP1000 Small 1 2 21, 40 2 11, 12
FANS1000 (**) (**) 1 41
FANS2000 (**) (**) 1 13
(*) More than one board can be inserted in the shelf. Refer to the dedicated board
description pages in this documentation part for more details.
(**) Dedicated slots. Refer, for more details, to: - the examples in “System general
description/1626 LM system layout” part of this documentation
TRU Top Rack Unit

PP
W
PP
WW
Fiber storage
W RR
RR
PP
PP
WW
WW RR
RR
11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 1100 1111 1122 1133 1144 1155 1166 1177 1188 1199 2200
11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 1100 1111 1122 1133 1144 1155 1 6 1177 1188 1199 2200
16
FANS
FFaann
Air deflector
FANSFFaann
PP
PP
Air deflector
WW
WW RR PP
RR PP
WW
WW RR
RR
11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 1100 1111 1122 1133 1144 1155 1166 1177 1188 1199 2200
11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 1100 1111 1122 1133 1144 1155 1 6 1177 1188 1199 2200
16
FANS
1320 CT
FANS
FFaann
FFaann
Air deflector Air deflector

PP
PP PP
W
W PP
W WW
W RR WW
RR RR
RR
11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 1100 1111 1122 1133 1144 1155 1166 1177 1188 1199 2200 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 1100 1111 1122 1133 1144 1155 1 6 1177 1188 1199 2200
16
FANS
FFaann FANSFFaann
Links between Links between

PSUP and TRU RAIU and TRU
Notes Page


2 User access and related boards description


2.1 TRBD11y1
2.1.1 TRBD11y1 faceplate
Generic shelf
Board SL Slots OTS
TRBD1111
TRBD1121 TRBD1121
3 to 18 TRBD1121
TRBD1131 TRBD1131
TRBD1191 *
TRBD1191
* Interconnecting ETHC1000
and TRBD1191 via the back
plane saves some cabling on the
boards front side.
To be able to do this, the
boards must be inserted in
a shelf according to a given
rule. Refer to the “Optical
channel configuration” for
more details.
LED LED Color Meaning

2.1 TRBD11y1
2.1.2 TRBD11y1 functional description
WDM optical
Clock
module
B&W optical module
4 4
O/E+ clock & data FEC E/O VOA
recovery
Performance
monitoring
4
4
E/O G709 framing O/E VOA
Colored Laser
with locker
Power supply
function Electrical Data
Local Management stream
& Alarms Optical Colored
signal
Management
Hardware Bus
board Power supply
information
Management board

TRBD11y1 (TRiButary Direct) can support 1+1 O-SNCP, loop-backs, OTU-2/ODU-2 Trail Trace Identifier, transport
of one User Data Channel at 2Mb/s (G.703) through WDM signal G.709 overhead (RJ45 connector).
TRBD1111 is a bidirectional 3R G709 transponder supporting a VSR (I-64.1) B&W optical interface and a
10.709Gbps colored WDM optical interface (NRZ), tunable according to the board type over 8 frequencies or
the full extended C-Band, with 50GHz spacing. It provides UNI at 9.9532Gbps and NNI with OTU2 10.709Gbps
B&W interface. The WDM emitter consists of a LiNbO3 Mach-Zenhder modulator and a laser.
TRBD1121 is the same as TRBD1111. The only difference is the B&W interface, it’s a S64.2b one.
TRBD1131 is the same as TRBD1111. The main difference is B&W interface is dedicated to 10GbEthernet LAN PHY,
with a 10GBASE-LR (10Km reach, 1310nm) B&W interface at 10.31Gbps (UNI only). Moreover WDM bit rate is
11.09Gbps.
TRBD1191 is a bidirectional G.709 transponder with high sensitivity receiver. LiNbO3 Mach-Zenhder colored
interface, NRZ modulation, Enhanced FEC. The BW client interface is provided by an XFP module. According to
XFP plugged, the client interface can be VSR, S-64.2b, L-64.2, 10G BASE-S, 10G BASE-L or 10G BASE-E. It is the
universal transponder, tunable over the whole extended C-band. It provides either User to Network Interface
or Network Node Interface.
The TRBD1191 MLSE is a new 10 Gb/s transponder introduced to minimize the regeneration points on WDM links
where the PMD introduced by the optical transmission fiber cable is high. In fact all other 10 Gb/s TRBD
versions of the 1626LM are able to tolerate up to 10 ps of PMD accumulated along the link, the TRBD1191 MLSE
can tolerate up to 24 ps of PMD thanks to electronic post-processing of the received signal based on Maximum
Likelihood Sequence Estimation (MLSE) technology.
The TRBDwxyz/TRBCwxyz naming rule is as follows :

w stands for bit rate : 1 (10Gb/s), 4 (40Gb/s)
x stands for signal type: 1 (NRZ), 2 (RZ), 3 (PSBT), 4 (NRZ-DPSK), 5 (RZ-DPSK),
6 (NRZ P-DPSK), 7 (CSRZ DPSK)
y stands for client interface type: 1 (intra-office (I64.1 or VSR-2000)), 2 (short haul (S64.2b)), 3( 10GBase-LR),
9 (pluggable user interface)
z stands for 1 (no VOA access), 2 (VOA access for dispersion pre-compensation), 3 (tunable filter), 4 (), 5
(MLSE for high PMD tolerance) All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009
2.2 TRBD4xy2
2.2.1 TRBD4xy2 faceplate
Generic shelf
Power
Board SL Slots OTS
TRBD4312 3, 7, 11 or 15
RXA
TXA
OOS
RJ45 -
BW G.703
TX RX
WDM RX Mon1
Unused
RX WDM
TX WDM
IN VOA
OUT VOA
Upper part
xy
The TRBD4xy2 board is 3 slots wide and tall height. It can be inserted on the following slots : [3,4, 5],
[7,8, 9], [11,12, 13], and [15,16, 17]. Slots 6, 10, 14 & 18 are reserved for optional BOFA when
required by configuration or for 10Gb/s transponders or PMDC upgrade .
2.2 TRBD4xy2
2.2.2 TRBD4312 functional description

The Tributary Transponder board (TRBD4xy2) is a bi-directional optical transport interface. The
architecture of the board makes it available for many different applications.
The first optical interface bi-directional is the Line interface. This interface is the connection to the
network, and is accomplished by a colored single wavelength on the WDM module. Each wavelength on
the Line interface is then multiplexed into a single fiber and sent to the network (Tunable on the band
C).
This network is a proprietary network based on the G.709 interface, refer to [x] ITU-T Recommendation
G.709. The rate is 43.018413 Gb/s with the standardized Reed Salomon RS(255,239) or proprietary Ultra
FEC.
The second optical interface bi-directional is the Client interface. This interface is the connection of a
single wavelength on the client network with the B&W module.
The Client line carries SDH/SONET standards at 39.81320 Gb/s, called STM-256/OC-768 and can support bit
rate 43.018413 Gb/s.
The G.709 FEC requirement is accomplished by a FUJITSU ASIC (UFEC40G).
The board TRBD can receive different daughter boards allowing to support different modulation format,
PSBT, DPSK, P-DPSK, …. They are pluggable.
For TRBC application, the B&W DB is replaced by a Concentrator card.
For the DPSK application, the WDM Daughter Board is replaced by an optical interface.
For TRBD4312, Daughter board MiniROFA is connected at the input pigtail of the PSBT module in order to
improve the sensitivity and to guarantee a constant optical power.

2.2 TRBD4xy2
2.2.3 TRBD4412 and TRBD4612 functional description

The Tributary Transponder board (TRBD4xy2) is a bi-directional optical transport interface. The
architecture of the board makes it available for many different applications. There is a VOA in external
access (input and output optical connector on front panel.
The UFEC40G is a multi-rate multiple forward error correction device supporting SONET/SDH, OTN and
Clear Channel applications.
Different optical units are implied : one bidirectional B&W interface, and one bidirectional WDM
interface into transponder TRBD with:
B&W side, the signal is compliant STM-256/OC-768 at 39.81320 Gb/s.
WDM side, the signal is OTU-3 at 43.018413 Gb/s.
TRBD4312 [C band – PSBT; Grid = 50GHz; Up to 80x40 Gb/s]

Client side : External client (OPNEXT)
Line side : PSBT / Mini ROFA Daughter Board
TRBD4412 [C band – DPSK; Grid = 100GHz; Up to 40x40 Gb/s]

Line side : DPSK Daughter Board odd channel (Ch Max=195900 - Ch Min=192100; Grid=200GHz) or even
channel (Ch Max=196000 - Ch Min = 192000; Grid=200GHz)
TRBD4612 [C band – P-DPSK; Grid = 50GHz; Up to 80x40 Gb/s]

Line side : P-DPSK Daughter Board (Ch Max=196000 - Ch Min=192000 or Ch Max=195850 - Ch Min=192050 or
Ch Max=195900 - Ch Min=192100 or Ch Max=195950 - Ch Min=191950; Grid=200GHz)

Notes Page


2.3 TRBC1111
2.3.1 TRBC1111 faceplate
Generic shelf
Board Slots
TRBC1111 3 to 18
Upper part
Lower part


2.3 TRBC1111
2.3.2 TRBC1111 functional description
WDM optical
Clock
module
1
FEC E/O VOA
6
Performance
Monitoring
1 G709
6 Framing WDM VOA
RX
ASIC
Colored Laser
with locker
Local Management
Electrical Data
& Alarms stream
Optical Colored
signal
Power supply
Management
function
Hardware
Bus
board Power supply
information
Management board
TRBC : TRiButary Concentrator.
TRBC1111 can support 1+1 O-SNCP, loop-backs, OTU-2/ODU-2 Trail Trace Identifier, RS-Trace Identifier
(J0), transport of one User Data Channel at 2Mb/s (G.703) through WDM signal G.709 overhead (RJ45
connector).
TRBC1111 is a bidirectional 3R G709 transponder concentrating 4 B&W STM16/OC48 optical signals

(TDM concentrator) in a 10.709Gbps coloured WDM optical interface (NRZ), tunable over the whole
extended C-Band. It provides UNI at 2.488Gbps or NNI with OTU1 2.666Gbps B&W interface. The
WDM emitter consists of a LiNbO3 Mach-Zenhder modulator and a laser.
The four incoming signals can be asynchronous.
TRBC111 can use SFP modules, type I-16.1, S-16.1, L-16.1 or L-16.2, for B&W interfaces (see Section 3 –
Appendix).

2.4 TRBC4x12
2.4.1 TRBC4x12 faceplate
Power
Generic shelf
RXA
TXA
OOS
Board Slots
RJ45 -
TRBC4x12 3 to 18 G.703
WDM RX Mon1
U1_Tx
Unused
U1_Rx
RX WDM
U2_Tx TX WDM
U2_Rx
IN VOA
OUT VOA
U3_Tx
U3_Rx
U4_Tx
U4_Rx


2.4 TRBC4x12
2.4.2 TRBC4x12 functional description

The TRBC4x12 is the concentrator version 4 x 10Gb/s board
This unit contains a FEC encoding and decoding operator standard RS(255,239) compliant with G.709
and
Ultra FEC proprietary from FUJITSU (only on line side). The G.709 frame Overhead Och are managed,
extracted and inserted by the FPGA of the board, called VIKINGS.
Different optical units are implied : four bidirectional B&W interfaces and one WDM interface into the
Concentrator TRBC:
1 to 4 B&W sides, the signal is compliant STM-64/OC-192, OTU2,10GELAN.
WDM side, the signal is OTU-3 at 43.018413 Gb/s.
TRBC4412 [C band – DPSK; Grid=100Grid; Up to 40x40 Gb/s]

Client side : Concentrator Daughter Board
Line side : DPSK Daughter Board odd channel (Ch Max=195900 - Ch Min=192100; Grid=200GHz) or even
channel (Ch Max=196000 - Ch Min=192000; Grid=200GHz)
TRBC4612 [C band – P-DPSK; Grid=50GHz; Up to 80x40 Gb/s]

Client side : Concentrator Daughter Board
Line side : P-DPSK Daughter Board (Ch Max=196000 - Ch Min=192000 or Ch Max=195850 - Ch Min=192050
or Ch Max=195900 - Ch Min=192100 or Ch Max=195950 - Ch Min=191950; Grid=200GHz)

2.5 OCPU2104
2.5.1 OCPU2104 faceplate
Generic shelf
Board Slots
Mid part
OCPU2104 3 to 18
Upper part

2.5 OCPU2104
2.5.2 OCPU2104 functional description
OCPU2104 Transponders
Splitter
Main
Sub-board 1
Coupler WDM
Sides
B&W Spare
user
sides
Sub-board 2

The OCPU2104 contains optical components for inclusion into two separate ’B/W’ Client input and
output paths, to and from 2 X two ’protected’ Transponders (called 1main, 1spare, 2main, 2spare).
The OCPU2104 houses a pair of optical splitters that fit into the two ’TX’ paths, and two optical
couplers that are fitted into two ’RX’ output paths from ’Protected’ Transponders.
Note : The above figure details only the sub-board 1 optical connections.
The 1x2 optical couplers/splitters fitted to the OCPU2104 have a nominal optical power splitting ratio
of 50/50%, (where in the case of the splitters 50% of the applied optical power is fed to the
’Protected’ Transponder main, and 50% is fed to the ’protected’ Transponder spare), for use in a
protection system with a 1+1 O-SNCP configuration.
In the “RX” direction, the OCPU2104 shall never receive both signals at the same time; the
transponders which are connected to it arbitrate among themselves in order to have one
transponder B&W output active, and the other one in shutdown; by this mechanism it is not
necessary to use a SWITCH on OCPU2104, but it is enough to use the coupler, always receiving at
most one active input.
The coupler/splitter devices used in this unit are specified to operate at both client wavebands
identified as1530-1565nm and 1290-1330nm. The 1x2optical coupler/splitters are specified to offer
the lowest maximum insertion loss (2.7 to 3.9dB). The same device is used for both the coupler and
splitter.
No alarm is raised by this module.

2.6 OCPU2100
2.6.1 OCPU2100 faceplate
Generic shelf
Board Slots
OCPU2100 3 to 18
MonP1 (P1 Tx W1)

Mon W1 (P1 Tx P1)
MonP2 (P2 Tx W2)
Mon W2 (P2 Tx P2)
Out Trib#1 (P1 Tx W1)
Out Prot#1 (P1 Tx P1)
Main In#1 (P1 Tx)
Main Out#1 (P1 Rx)
In Trib#1 (P1 Rx W1)
In Prot#1 (P1 Rx P1)
Out Trib#2 (P2 Tx W2)
Out Prot#2 (P2 Tx P2)
Main In#2 (P2 Tx)
Main Out#2 (P2 Rx)
In Trib#2 (P2 Rx W2)
In Prot#2 (P2 Rx P2)


2.6 OCPU2100
2.6.2 OCPU2100 functional description
Transponder #1
Transponder #2

The OCPU2100 is a bi-directional unit acting as a connection point for an Equipment Protection system.
In the OCPU2100, the unit contains two separate tap coupler/splitter devices to be inserted into
Client “Black & White” traffic feeds, allowing a portion of each incoming signal to be ‘tapped off’ for
passage to the Equipment Protection system.
Optical Switches select which of two inputs are fed back to the Client from the Equipment. One switch
input feeds in from the ‘normal’ path, this is referred to as ‘Path 1’. The other input feeds from the
“Protecting” path, this is referred to as ‘Path 2’.
The Unit is designed so the Optical switches are controlled by the Protection Switch Controller- via back-
plane connections.
All optical components used in the OCPU 210X are specified for ‘Dual-Band’ operation, offering
comparable performance in the 1290-1330 and 1530-1565nm bands. This allows the unit to operate
at:
1) VSR2000 2R1 (1290-1330nm) and,
2) S64.2b. (1530-1565nm)
3) If OCPU2100 Insertion loss performance wavelength ranges comply, other transmission formats may be
supported.
The OCPU2100 incorporates two optical switches, and two optical splitters with a coupling ratio of
50/50%. It also incorporates 4 optical ports for monitoring function.

2.7 PSCU3000
2.7.1 PSCU3000 faceplate
Generic shelf
Board Slot
PSCU3000 39
PSCU3000 can manage only

one OCPU2100 (2 switches)
and 2 OSCU (each switch can
be associated with 1 OSCU).
PSCU3000 is required for
OMSP Protection, in a shelf
containing LOFA, OSCU and
OCPU2 boards involved in
the protection scheme.


2.7 PSCU3000
2.7.2 PSCU3000 functional description
Control Logic
Remote
inventory LEDs
ECID
Combining
Combining SPIDER
diodes
diodes

The PSCU3000 currently works as a slave to the OSCU. It acts as an interface between the OSCU and
OCPU2100 within a shelf involved in protection.
It performs the following functions:

collects alarm information (signal fail) from the OSCU,
monitors the channel selectors (OCPU2100), the bridge switch
required position information of OCPU2100 and OSCU, and sends the necessary commands to the
switches (OCPU2100)

2.8 2xGBE_FC
2.8.1 2xGBE_FC faceplate
Generic shelf
Board Slots
2xGBE_FC 3 to 18
Upper part
Lower part

Name Meaning

2.8 2xGBE_FC
2.8.2 2xGBE_FC functional description
CDR
MUX/DEMUX

2xGBE_FC : concentrator which aggregates two Gigabit Ethernet client signals at 1.25Gb/s or two Fibre
Channel at 1.0625Gb/s into a STM–16/OC–48 frame, via GFP mapping and Virtual Concatenation. It is
optically connected, according to the provisioned interface, either to a TRBC or an MCC30 (if B&W
line interface) or a CMDX (if WDM line interface).
- Four interfaces/ports are present on client side, but only two can be used (U1 and U2 on the front
plate).
- Two interfaces/ports are present on line/aggregate, but only Line 2 can be used (W on the front
plate).
- All the interfaces/transceivers are external SFP pluggable modules so that they can be alternated
according to the different applications. Refer to the last Section of this training manual for SFPs list.
Clients mixing on the same board is not possible: only 2xGbE or 2xFC is possible in the same board.
The mapping of clients is Transparent GFP (GFP–T).
The Virtual Concatenation uses a fixed number of VC–4 :
VC–4–7v is used for Gigabit Ethernet
VC–4–6v is used for Fibre Channel.
The Line interface supports:

multi-rate DWDM pluggable modules (SFP), APD type.
B&W STM–16/OC–48 pluggable modules (SFP): I–16.1, S–16.1 and L–16.2. In this case the board
needs to be connected to a B&W port of a transponder (TRBC, MCC30) to obtain a WDM signal.
Each Client interface (U1 and U2 connectors on the front plate) provides the connection to the clients of
the network. GbE–SX, GbE–LX, FC–L B&W SFPs can be plugged on clients interfaces.

2.9 ETHC1000
2.9.1 ETHC1000 faceplate
Lower part
Generic shelf
Board Slots
ETHC1000 3 to 18 *
User10 Tx (out)**
User10 Rx (in)**
Upper part
User11 Tx (out)**
User11 Rx (in)**
* Interconnecting ETHC1000 User12 Tx (out)**

and TRBD1191 via the back User12 Rx (in)**
plane saves some cabling on the
boards front side.
To be able to do this, the
boards must be inserted in
a shelf according to a given
rule. Refer to the “Optical
channel configuration” for
more details.
Name Meaning

2.9 ETHC1000
2.9.2 ETHC1000 functional description

ETHC1000 : The ETHC1000 unit is an Ethernet concentrator which can aggregate up to nine Gigabit
Ethernet client signals at 1 .25Gbps into a 10 GbE WAN frame at 9.95 Gb/s, in point–to–point
applications, via Layer 2 switch. It can be optically connected to the client interface of a TRBD or
connected to the TRBD1191 through the equipment back plane.
Twelve interfaces/ports are present on client side.
Two interfaces/ports are present on line/aggregate side.
When all client ports are used, the related traffic must be spread over the two aggregate sides with
no more than 9 client signals per side.
Jumbo frames are supported on client side : up to 9600 bytes per frame.
All the client interfaces/transceivers are external SFP pluggable modules. The Line
interfaces/transceivers are external XFP pluggable modules.
The Line (L1 and L2 connectors on the front plate, Port #13 and Port#14 in CT view) ) bidirectional
optical interfaces host B&W optical modules, so they need to be linked to a B&W port of a transponder
(TRBD) to obtain a WDM signal to be multiplexed into a single fibre and sent to the network.
The following 10 GbE WAN B&W pluggable modules (XFP) are supported:
I–64.1/10GbE base L
S–64.2b/10GbE base E
Each Client interface (P1 to P12 on the front plate) provides the connection to the clients.
GbE–SX and GbE–LX B&W SFPs can be plugged on clients interfaces.
The Layer 2 switch tags the up to nine Ethernet streams with a VLAN ID, then aggregates the different
streams and send them, over a XGMII interface, to one (or both) 10 GbE transceiver. The 10 GbE
transceiver provides the entire IEEE 802.3ae, including PMD, PMA and PCS with 64B/65B encoding–
decoding. Its serial output is 10 GbEthernet WAN (9.953 Gb/s).

2.10 CMDX10yz
2.10.1 CMDX1010 faceplate
Generic shelf
Board Slots
CMDX1010 2 to 19
Upper part
Lower part

2.10 CMDX10yz
Generic shelf
Board Slots
CMDX1012 2 to 19 *
Mon_OUT
Mon_IN
1st CH_IN
1st CH_OUT
2nd CH_IN
2nd CH_OUT
3rd CH_IN 7th CH_IN
3rd CH_OUT
4th CH_IN
7th CH_OUT
8th CH_IN
4th CH_OUT
5th CH_IN
5th CH_OUT
6th CH_IN 8th CH_OUT
6th CH_OUT
MUX_OUT
DEMUX_IN
* CMDX1012 card provides
fixed Mux/Demux functionality
for TRBD4612 with 50GHz
channel spacing


2.10 CMDX10yz
Generic shelf
Board Slots
CMDX1052 2 to 19 *
Mon_OUT
Mon_IN
1st CH_IN
1st CH_OUT
2nd CH_IN
2nd CH_OUT
3rd CH_IN
3rd CH_OUT
4th CH_IN
* HOST1001 and CMDX4100 4th CH_OUT
are associated to get CMDX1052. MUX_OUT
DEMUX_IN
CMDX1052 card provides fixed
Mux/Demux functionality for
TRBD4412 with 100GHz channel
spacing

CMDX1052 LED
Name LED Color Managed by Meaning
MAB Yellow the Shelf Controller indicate abnormal conditions at one or more
multiplexer inputs
DAB Yellow the Shelf Controller indicate abnormal conditions at demultiplexer input.
INI Yellow the optical module Indicates CMX and/or CDX are in the Initialisation
state and are not yet at operating temperature.
Available only with AWG technology module

2.10 CMDX101yz
2.10.4 CMDX10yz functional description
Output monitor
Input 1
1λ C
M 8λ
X Combined
output
Photo
Input 8 detector
1λ
Photo Photo
detector 1 Detector 8
Output 1 Combined
1λ C input
8
D 8λ
X Photo
Output 8 APSD
detector
1λ signal
Management
Management
DC Power Supply

CMDX1010 is a 8 channel Mux/Demux @ 50GHz for Long Haul terrestrial and submarine links. It
multiplexes/demultiplexes 8 colored optical signals to/from a single port connected to the BMDX.
CMDX1012 (8 Channel Mux/Demux @ 50GHz whose Mux has same filter shape as its Demux (for P-DPSK)) is a
bidirectional unit used for multiplexing and demultiplexing in each of the 12 block paths. In the multiplexing
direction the unit multiplexes 8 (resp.12) optical channels from transmitters to one single optical output which
is routed to either a 12:1 band mux/demux unit. In the demultiplexing direction the unit receives a WDM signal
from BMDX before demultiplexing the signal into 8 (resp. 12) channel outputs and then routing the channels to
the relevant receiver.
On each of the input ports and the output port of the Multiplexer, there is a tap coupler and a photo detector and
there is also an optical monitor port at the output side. On the input port of the Demultiplexer, there is a tap
coupler and a photo detector. These photo detectors measure the respective optical power via the tap coupler
and feed the power level signals to the on board FPGA.x
The CMDX1012 component uses AWG (Arrayed Waveguide Grating) technology and is a dedicated card for
TRBD4612 and TRBC4612.
CMDX1052 is a 4 channel Mux/Demux @ 100GHz. It’s a dedicated card for TRBD4412 and TRBC4412.
Naming rules for CMDXwxyz :

w: big functional or structural differences
Today for all multiplexers/demultiplexers this is 1
x: today for all CMDX this is 0
y: grid
1: stands for 50GHz grid
z: minor modifications
0: AWG technology
1: long haul applications

2.11 HOST1001
2.11.1 HOST1001 faceplate
Extractor
Generic shelf Handle
Board Slots
HOST1001 2 to 19 *
* HOST1001 and CMDX4100 are

associated to get CMDX1052.
CMDX1052 card provides fixed
mux/demux functionality for
TRBD4412 with 100GHz channel
spacing
Extractor
Handle

HOST1001 LED Meaning

2.11 HOST1001
2.11.2 HOST1001 functional description
Remote
EEPROM Inventory
SPIDER:
EEPROM ECID SPI INTERFACE SPI Bus

Micro cut off detection Backplane
Temperature
sensor connector
+3.3V Internal
Power supplies +48V
Control board +5V
Card presence
Electrical
connector
Optical connectors on Front Panel Power supply
SPI Bus
Microcontroller
Power detection
Alarm interface
Module EEPROM
Pluggable module function

The above diagram shows the main function blocks of the board on which the optical module is
plugged and interfaced.
The HOST1001 is a mezzanine board designed for 1626 system Release 5.0a. It is a main board that
can manage one optical pluggable module as CMDX1012 module (4 channels Mux/Demux 100 GHz) for
example.
The pluggable optical modules that can be used with the HOST1001 are Mux/Demux modules.
This unit is equipped with SPIDER, ECID, Remote Inventory, Temperature Sensor, DC-DC converter,
Power Supply micro failure detection.
All the main signals from the modules (alarms, module presence) are interfaced and accessible from
HOST1001 through SPI link or registered into SPIDER.

2.12 BMDX1x00
2.12.1 BMDX1x00 faceplate
Generic shelf
Board Slots
BMDX1000
3 to 18 *
BMDX1100
Upper part
* The Automatic Laser

Control can be configured in
“Dynamic mode” to regulate the
output power of the BMDX
board. In such a case, the ALCT
and BMDX boards must be
inserted & declared according
to the table shown below. Refer
to ALCT1010 description for
more details.
Lower part
The « Dynamic mode » of the ALC can be used when the ALCT and BMDX boards are inserted and
declared according to the following table:
ALCT slot #
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
BMDX slot #
6 5 4 3 10 9 8 7 14 13 12 11 18 17 16 15

2.12 BMDX1y00
2.12.2 BMDX1y00 functional description
Input 1 Output monitor
B
M
X Photo Combined
output
Input 12
detector
Photo Photo
detector 1 detector
12
Output 1
B Combined
12 D
input
X Photo
Output 12 APSD
detector
signal
Management
DC Power Supply

BMDX1000 is a Band (12:1) Mux / (1:12) Demux used in Line Terminal, Back-to-Back terminal and R-
OADM configurations, supporting up to 8 wavelengths per Band. It multiplexes up to 12 Bands coming
from the CMDXs into the aggregate signal (up to 96 channels) to be sent to the WDM line and
demultiplexes the aggregate signal into 12 Bands forwarded to the CMDXs. In Back-to-Back
configuration, all the 12 Bands are managed.
BMDX1100 is a modified Band (12:1) Mux / (1:12) Demux for B-OADM application with up to 100%
add/drop capacity in full symmetric configuration. It supports up to 7 wavelengths per Band.
Naming rules for BMDXwxyz :

Today for all multiplexers/demultiplexers this is 1
x: application
0: stands for the Line Terminal, B-t-B and R-OADM application
1: stands for TPXC and Band-OADM functionality
y: today for all BMDX this is 0
z: today for all BMDX this is 0

2.13 OMDX8100_x
2.13.1 OMDX8100_x faceplate
Generic shelf
Board Slots
OMDX8100_L1_X
OMDX8100_L1
OMDX8100_L2 3 to 18
OMDX8100_S1
OMDX8100_S2
Upper part
The EXPANSION interface
(SB IN/OUT) is only present
on the OMDX8100_L1_X
faceplate.
Lower part
OMDX8100_x Front panel LED Meanings


2.13 OMDX8100_x
2.13.2 OMDX8100_x functional description
Exp
input
Extra
SB Output monitor
input
Input 1
O LB/
1λ
9:1 M
SB
Photo
(5:1) Combined
X
detector Photo
output
9(5) Photo
Input 8 (4)
detector 10
detector
1λ
Photo Photo
detector 1 Detector8(4)
Extra Input monitor

output SB
Output 1
1λ O LB/ Combined input
9:1 D
(5:1) SB
X Photo
Output 8 (4)
APSD
detector
1λ
signal
Management
Management DC Power Supply

OMDX8100_x is 100GHz grid channel multiplexer/demultiplexer for regional applications (Up to 32

channels). In the picture above, dashed lines correspond to components specific to OMDX8100_L1_X.
OMDX8100 (respectively OMDX4100) is composed of :

• a 100 GHz 9:1 ( 5:1) multiplexer/demultiplexer:
multiplexes/demultiplexes eight (four) optical channels + extra long or short band signal (extra
channels) into/from a combined output/input. This latter is either connected to Long Band/Short
Band multiplexer/demultiplexer or to an other OMDX extra input/output or to a LOFA input/output.
• a Long Band/Short Band multiplexer/demultiplexer (OMDX8100_L1_X only):
multiplexes/demultiplexes the aggregated Long band signal from/to OMX/ODX and the aggregated
Short band signal from/to Expansion input/output connected to a ODMX8100_S1 or S2 combined
output/input.
For OMDXw100_y_z naming, special rules must be considered :

w: Number of channels to be multiplexed / demultiplexed
x: Grid (in GHz)
_y: Band
L1: stands for channels 193.000 to 193.800 THz
L2: stands for channels 192.000 to 192.800 THz
S1: stands for channels 195.200 to 196.000 THz
S2: would stand for channels 194.200 to 195.000 THz
chx-chy: would stand for channels x to y THz
_z: Filtering process :

X: Expansion filtering
• The available “OMDX” boards are: OMDX8100_L1_X, OMDX8100_L1, OMDX8100_L2, OMDX8100_S1,

OMDX8100_S2, OMDX4100_Ch20-23, OMDX4100_Ch25-28, OMDX4100_Ch30-33, OMDX4100_Ch35-38,
OMDX4100_Ch42-45, OMDX4100_Ch47-50, OMDX4100_Ch52-55, OMDX4100_Ch57-60.
2.14 OMDX4100_chx-chy
2.14.1 OMDX4100_chx-chy faceplate
Generic shelf
Board Slots
OMDX4100_ch20-23 MUX OUT MON
DEMUX IN MON
OMDX4100_ch25-28 4th CH_IN
4th CH_OUT
3rd CH_IN
OMDX4100_ch30-33 3rd CH_OUT
2nd CH_IN
OMDX4100_ch35-38 2nd CH_OUT
3 to 18 1st CH_IN
OMDX4100_ch42-45 1st CH_OUT
EXTRA IN
OMDX4100_ch47-50 EXTRA OUT
MUX_OUT
OMDX4100_ch52-55 DEMUX_IN
OMDX4100_ch57-60

Access points description (from top to bottom)

Name Meaning

3 R/TR-OADM and related boards description


3.1 OADC1102
3.1.1 OADC1102 faceplate
Generic shelf
Board Slots
OADC1102 23 to 38
LED
TX INPUT : EXPRESS CHANNELS OADC

COUPLER INPUT (30%) FROM WMAN
TX INPUT : ADDED CHANNELS OADC COUPLER
INPUT (70%) FROM MUX
RX OUTPUT : EXPRESS CHANNELS OADC
SPLITTER OUTPUT (30%) TO WMAN
RX OUTPUT : DROPED CHANNELS OADC
SPLITTER OUTPUT (70%) TO DEMUX
TX OUTPUT : OADC COUPLER OUTPUT TO
BOOSTER
RX INPUT : OADC SPLITTER INPUT FROM
BOOSTER


3.1 OADC1102
3.1.2 OADC1102 functional description
Rx OUT
(WMAN IN)
Photo
30%
Express
detector
Rx IN
Rx OUT 70% (PreAmp)

(Demux) Splitter
Drop
Photo
detector
(WMAN Out) TX IN 30%

Express Tx OUT
70% (Booster)
TX IN
(Mux) Coupler
Photo
Add Photo
detector
detector
Feedback for
dynamic ALC
control DC
Management
Power Supply

The Optical Add & Drop Coupler OADC1102 board covers Long Haul R-OADM specific needs. The
OADC1102 may be used also for TR-OADM Multi degree 2 application but it is mainly dedicated to R-
OADM application.
This small height unit consists of one asymmetric coupler and one asymmetric splitter achieving passive
add&drop for opposite directions as illustrated above. The coupler/splitter is broadband (whole
extended C-band).
Regarding the signal coming from one pre-amplifier :

30% are sent to express path (input of Wavelength Manager)
70% are sent to drop path (input of first demultiplexing stage)
Regarding the signal outgoing to one booster :

30% come from express path (output of Wavelength Manager)
70% come from drop path (output of last multiplexing stage)
For Automatic Level Control purposes, on the add path the coupler shall achieve output power level
measurement (express path + add path) and provide electrical feedback for ALCT Laser board if this
one works in “dynamic” mode.

3.2 WMAN1100
3.2.1 WMAN1100 faceplate
Generic shelf Upper part
Board Slots
WMAN1100 3 to 18
(3 slots wide and tall height)

POWER ON LED
The WMAN1100 can be ABNORMAL INPUT LED
inserted in both «Master» ABNORMAL OPERATION LED
ABNORMAL MON LED
and «Secondary» shelves HW FAILURE LED
(preferred to reduce inter-
shelf cabling).
EXT IN 1
EXT IN 2
Example for «Master shelf»
[(12,13,14) + (32,33,34)] WDM IN MONITOR
[(16,17,18) + (36,37,38)]
Example for «Secondary
WDM OUT MONITOR

shelf»
[(3,4,5) + (23,24,25)] WDM INPUT
[(16,17,18) + (36,37,38)]
WDM OUTPUT

LED
Name LED
LEDColor
color Meaning
Meaning
PWR Green/Red Managed by HW.
GREEN when power supply operational
RED when the internal power supply is switched off (e.g. at unit start-up) or when
power supply fails
ABI Yellow Managed by the Shelf Controller
Abnormal signal input alarm
Signal level below the input signal LOS threshold or some wavelengths
abnormally absent from the input spectrum
ABB Yellow Managed by the Shelf Controller
Abnormal operation of the Wavelength Blocker (some wavelength improperly
configured blocked/pass-through or some attenuations not applied properly)
ABM Yellow Managed by the Shelf Controller
Abnormal monitoring of the Wavelength Blocker (abnormal operation of the
embedded OCM, communication failure with the OCM or monitoring switch failure)
∆ Green/Red Managed by the Shelf Controller
OFF when board is plugged but not declared
GREEN when board is plugged, configured and no failure
RED when hardware failure, power supply failure or communication (on the
board) failure
YELLOW (fake red+green) when a firmware download is proceeding, the board
shall not be unplugged.

3.2 WMAN1100
3.2.2 WMAN1100 functional description
Wavelength Blocker
Output
Dark Photo
From
D VOA detector monitor
M
OADC#1 e
VOA On/Off u
Switch To
m
x
Input u OADC#2
x
monitor Photo
Photo
detector
detector
EXT_IN1 EXT_IN2
Photo
detecto
r
Optical Channel DC Power Supply

Management Monitoring

The Wavelength Blocker can be considered as an array of optical gates (such as Variable Optical
Attenuators or Liquid Crystal shutters) and optical (on/off) switches placed between a Demultiplexer
and a Multiplexer as schematically presented in figure above. It is thus able to selectively attenuate
the single channels of an incoming multiplex and even completely switch off selected channels. Note
that device implementation of this optoelectronic function varies depending on providers.
The present release can manage 96 channels with 50GHz spacing in C+ band.
Each channel processed by the Wavelength Manager shall be in one of two possible states :
Express channels shall go through the Wavelength Blocker with a slight attenuation that shall be
individually (i.e. on a per channel basis) set up (in a certain range) either by an operator or an
algorithm/software process.
Blocked channels shall be blocked by the Wavelength Blocker i.e. completely switched off.
ALC frequencies shall be Blocked in the WMAN board(s).
Whenever channel states are modified, the Optical Channel Monitor shall scan the output and input
spectra in order to check that proper attenuations have been set up and proper wavelengths have been
blocked.
This verification shall also been carried out on a regular basis in order to keep up with any Wavelength
Blocker drift. The OCM can be also used to monitor signals from other boards through EXT_IN&1 and
EXT_IN2 ports (not available in current release).
The dark VOA has two purposes :

First it shall be used to insert an additional loss (offset) experienced by all channels in order to
decrease the WB attenuation range employed, thus reducing the PDL and ripple of the latter.
In addition, this normally turned off VOA shall shut down all traffic in case of a power failure (whereas
most WBs are normally turned on / transparent without power supply) or board unplugging.

3.3 OCNC1220
3.3.1 OCNC1220 faceplate
Generic shelf
Board Slots
OCNC1220 23 to 38
LED
Rx Output-70
Rx Output-30
Rx Input
Rx Mon.


3.3 OCNC1220
3.3.2 OCNC1220 functional description
1/99
RX-in 99%
1%
30% RX_OUT_30
70%
RX-Mon
RX_OUT_70
Optical INPUT ILOS RX
5/95 power detection
LOS Detection function
External +3.3V
Power
+5V
Supplies
Alarm Interface
Card presence
Remote
Inventory
EEPROM SPI Interface
SPI Bus
Control board EEPROM

ECID
Data

The Optical Connectivity Coupler OCNC1220 (1 Photodiode ; 1x 70/30 splitter in C+-band) unit includes
the following parts :
OADC control board
1 optical coupler with a tap ratio of 70/30
1 optical coupler with a tap ratio of 1/99
1 tap detector
MU adaptors for input/output optical ports.
Input LOS detection and power measurement circuits are realised with one Tap Detectors (5/95%). 5% of
the total optical power received is extracted via a 95/05 coupler. Optical power is sent towards a
photo-detector to perform LOS detection and measurement.
An optical signal coming from the transmission line is splitted in 2 parts for OCNC1220: the drop one and
the transmit one. The LOS detection is made only at the input of the board.
There is also an optical monitoring (on the front plate) on the input port.

3.4 OCNC1230
Generic shelf
Board Slots
OCNC1230 23 to 38
LED
Rx Output-70
Rx Output-15
Rx Output-15
Rx Input
Rx Mon.


3.4 OCNC1230
1/99
RX_OUT_15
RX-in 99%
1%
30% RX_OUT_15
50/50
RX-Mon 70%
RX_OUT_70
External +3.3V
Power
Supplies
+5V
Alarm
Interface
Card
presenc
e Remote
Inventory
SPI Bus
Control board EEPROM ECID

Data

The Optical Connectivity Coupler OCNC1230 (1 Photodiode ; 1x 70/30 splitter and 1x 50/50 splitter in
C+-band) is a unidirectional splitter Unit in C+-band with optical monitoring .
- It is used in case of Multi-Degree application to split the incoming signal (from a given line) towards the
demultiplexing branch (dropped channels) and also towards the WMAN boards of the lines (express
channels).
- 70% of the incoming power is dedicated to the dropped channels and 2 x 15% are dedicated to the
express channels (towards 2 WMAN boards belonging to a Multi-degree 3 application at the maximum).
- One photodiode is used to monitor the available power at the RX-in access. Relevant alarm can be
raised.
- There is also an optical monitoring (on the front plate) on the input port.
- OADC1102 may be used for TR-OADM Multi-degree 2 application but OCNC1230 is recommended for such
application. Being partially used at the installation phase, it gives the opportunity to upgrade in TR-
OADM Multi-degree 3 application in the future.
- The figure below describes the environment of the OCNC1230 board in a “Multi-degree 2” application
(extract):
WMAN
3174
1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2
OSC
D M
OSC
ALCT

3.5 OCNC1240
Generic shelf
Board Slots
OCNC1240 23 to 38
LED
Rx_Output-70
Rx_Output-10
Rx_Output-10
Rx_Output-10
Rx_Input
Rx_Mon.


3.5 OCNC1240
RX_OUT_10
1/99
RX_OUT_10
RX-in 99%
1%
70/30
30%
RX_OUT_10
1x3 splitter
RX-Mon
70%
RX_OUT_70
External +3.3V
Power
Supplies
+5V
Alarm
Interface
Card
presenc
e Remote
Inventory
SPI Bus
Control board EEPROM ECID

Data

The Optical Connectivity Coupler OCNC1240 (1 Photodiode, 1x 70/30 splitter and 1x3 splitter in C+-band)
is a unidirectional splitter Unit in C+-band with optical monitoring .
- It is used in case of Multi-Degree application to split the incoming signal (from a given line) towards the
demultiplexing branch (dropped channels) and also towards the WMAN boards of the lines (express
channels).
- 70% of the incoming power is dedicated to the dropped channels and 3 x 10% are dedicated to the express
channels (towards 3 WMAN boards belonging to a Multi-degree 4 application at the maximum).
- One photodiode is used to monitor the available power at the RX-in access. Relevant alarm can be raised.
- There is also an optical monitoring (on the front plate) on the input port.
OCNC1230 may be used for TR-OADM Multi-degree 3 application but OCNC1240 is recommended for such
application. Being partially used at the installation phase, it gives the opportunity to upgrade in TR-OADM
Multi-degree 4 application in the future.
The figure below describes the environment of the OCNC1240 board in a “Multi-degree 3” application
(extract):
WMAN
1 VOA 2 3174 1 VOA 2
Up to 96λ OSC
D M
OSC
ALCT
OCNC1240
WMAN
3174
OCNC1240
M D
WMAN
3174
D
Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s Up to 96λ

Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009
3.6 OCNC1280
Generic shelf
Board Slots
OCNC1280 2 to 19
Rx_Output1
Rx_Output2
Rx_Output3
Rx_Output4
Rx_Output5
Rx_Output6
Rx_Output7
Rx_Output8
Rx_Input
Rx_Mon.


3.6 OCNC1280
LOS on RX sent on BKP

Power Port 8
detection Port 7
1/99 Splitter Port 6
RX-in
Port 5
99% 05/95 1:8
1% Port 4
Port 3
Port 2
RX-Mon Port 1
External +3.3V
Power
Supplies +5V LOS from Power
detection Alarm
Interface
Card
presence Remote
Inventory
EEPROM SPI
Interface SPI Bus
Control board EEPROM

ECID
Data

The Optical Connectivity Coupler OCNC1280 is a board designed for 1626 LM. It is a connectivity unit used
for the TR-OADM function.
The OCNC1280 unit is placed before the WMAN3 board. It generated a Loss Of Signal (LOS) detection on low
optical powers on the input. An optical signal coming from the transmission line is splitted in 8 parts.
The LOS detection is made only at the input of the board.
Input LOS detection and power measurement circuits are realised with one Tap Detectors (5/95%).
5% of the total optical power received is extracted via a 95/05 coupler. Optical power is sent towards a
photo-detector to perform LOS detection and measurement.
There is also an optical monitoring (on the front plate) on the input port.

3.7 OADC1100
Generic shelf
Board Slots
OADC1100 23 to 38
LED


3.7 OADC1100

The Optical Add & Drop Coupler OADC1100 is a bidirectional coupler / splitter unit in C+-band with
optical monitoring .
- The coupler and the splitter are “50/50” type.
- Three photodiodes are used to monitor the available power at each incoming access. Relevant alarms
can be raised.
- The above figure shows the traffic part only.
The OADC1100 board can be partially used in a “demultiplexing branch” of a “TR-OADM multi-degree
application”.
- The figure below describes the environment of the board for a given “drop” direction:
OCNC1240
Up to 96λ
1:2 ½ OADC1100
½ OADC1300
TDMX1180 1:8

3.8 OADC1300
Generic shelf
Board Slots
OADC1300 3 to 18
TI1
TI2
TI3
TI4
TI5
TI6
TI7
TI8
RO1
RO2
RO3
RO4
RO5
RO6
RO7
RO8
Tx Output
Rx Input

Name Led color Meaning

MAB Yellow • Indicates one or more abnormal conditions at the coupler inputs
DAB Yellow • Indicates one abnormal condition at the splitter input
Green / Red • LED off: the board is plugged, but not configured.
• LED is green : the board is plugged, configured and without any failure.
• LED is red: HW failure, power supply failure or communication failure.
• LED is yellow: Firmware download on progress. Do not extract the board
during this period.
The optical interface is based on 5 (or 3) x 4-ways MU/MU adapters , located on the front panel:
[1] : TI1 (Tx Input 1) ; TI2 (Tx Input 2)

[4] : TI7(Tx Input 7) ; TI8 (Tx Input 8)
[5] : RO1 (Rx Output 1) ; RO2 (Rx Output 2)

[9] : TO (Tx Output ) ; RI (Rx Input)

3.8 OADC1300
8:1
1:8

The Optical Add & Drop Coupler OADC1300 is an Optical Add Drop Coupler. It is used for the TR-OADM
function.
- The OADC1300 is a master unit performing both the Coupling and Splitting of/in eight inputs/outputs
with wavelengths belonging to the C+-band. The LOS detection is made only at the input of the board.
The OADC1300 board can be used in a “demultiplexing and multiplexing branches” of a “TR-OADM multi-
degree application” when more than sixteen wavelengths are locally managed for a given branch.
- The figure below describes the environment of the board for a given “drop” direction:
OCNC1240
Up to 96λ
1:2 ½ OADC1100
TDMX1180 1:8 ½ OADC1300
To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) Up to 96λ

1 VOA 2
1 VOA 2
LOFA
LOFA
1110
1110
x8
TDMX1180 TDMX1180

3.9 TMDX1180
3.9.1 TDMX1180 faceplate
Generic shelf
Board Slots
TDMX1180 3 to 18
(4 slots wide)
It is recommended to insert Mon. In. - 1
TDMX1180 in a dedicated Input - 1

“Secondary shelf” for each
OTS line on a given “Multi
degree” application. This Output - 1
Output - 2
shelf will include the related Output - 3
Output - 4
transponders and OADC1750 Output - 5
boards Output - 6
Output - 7
Output - 8
Refer to the examples in
“System general
description/1626 LM system
layout” part of this
documentation.

LED
Name LED
LEDColor
color Meaning
Meaning
PWR Green/Red Managed by HW.
power supply fails
INI Yellow Managed by HW.
Indicates that the Wavelength Selective Switch is not ready for operation
during board start.
The LED shall flicker while the WSS is not ready for operation during board start.
∆ Green/Red Managed by the Shelf Controller

OFF when board is plugged but not declared
GREEN when board is plugged, configured and no failure
RED when hardware failure, power supply failure or communication (on the
board) failure
YELLOW (fake red+green) when a firmware download is proceeding, the board
shall not be unplugged.
The optical interface is based on 3 double MU/MU connectors and 3 quadruple MU/MU connectors,
located
on the front panel :
[1] : MON_IN (board input monitoring),
[2] : IN (board input),
[3] :
[4] : OUT1 / OUT2 / OUT3 / OUT4 (board outputs 1 to 4),
[5] : OUT5 / OUT6 / OUT7 /OUT8 (board outputs 5 to 8),
[6] : 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0
3.9 TDMX1180
3.9.2 TDMX1180 functional description

The Tunable Demultiplexer (TDMX) is a board able to separate an input optical multiplex into 8 different
channels. It can also attenuate the selected channels. The TDMX function is a part of both
Tunable/Reconfigurable Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer (T/ROADM) and Multi-degree nodes.
- The Tunable Demultiplexer board is based on only one major component : a Wavelength Selective
Switch.
Following pre-amplification, the input multiplexed channels are duplicated through a coupler. On the
drop path, a demultiplexing architecture (based on TDMX) separates them into single channels which are
then selectively connected to their respective Receiver. On the pass-through (or express) path, a
Wavelength Manager unit (featuring a Wavelength Selective Switch device) is employed to block (i.e.
completely attenuated/eliminated) the dropped channels (i.e. connected to receivers) in the previous
step, whereas the express channels experience minimum attenuation. The figure below describes the
environment of the board: Up to 96λ
1:2 ½ OADC1100
Up to 96λ
OCNC1240
Up to 96λ
TDMX1180 1:8 ½ OADC1300
To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8) Up to 96λ

1 VOA 2
1 VOA 2
LOFA
LOFA
1110
1110
x8
TDMX1180 TDMX1180

3.10 WMAN3174
3.10.1 WMAN3174 faceplate
Generic shelf
Board Slots
WMAN3174 3 to 18
(4 slots wide)
MON_IN1
It is recommended to insert MON_OUT
WMAN3174 in the “Master or IN1
OUT
Generic shelf” for each OTS MON_IN2
line on a given “Multi degree” MON_IN3
application. This shelf will

IN2
IN3
include the related OADC1300 ADD1

ADD2
and LOFA110 among other ADD3
boards
ADD4
Refer to the examples in EXT1

“System general EXT2
EXT3
description/1626 LM system EXT4
layout” part of this

documentation.
•The optical interface is based on 3
double MU/MU connectors and 3
quadruple MU/MU connectors.
LED
Name LED Color
Led color Meaning Meaning
• Managed by HW.
PWR Green/Red
power supply fails
ABI Yellow • Managed by the Shelf Controller (SC).

• ABnormal Input signal alarm.
• YELLOW when signal level is below the input signal LOS threshold, or when some
wavelengths are abnormally absent from the input Spectrum.
ABS/INI Yellow • Managed by the Shelf Controller (SC).

• YELLOW when ABnormal operation of the wavelength Switch (some wavelengths
improperly configured : blocked/pass-through or attenuations not applied properly).
• The LED ‘INI’ shall flicker while the WSS is not ready for operation during board
start.
ABM Yellow • Managed by the Shelf Controller (SC).

• YELLOW when ABnormal Monitoring of the Wavelength Blocker (abnormal operation
of the OCM [either embedded or not], communication failure with the OCM or
monitoring switch failure).
∆ Green / Red • LED off: the board is plugged, but not configured.
• LED is yellow: Firmware download on progress. Do not extract the board during
this period.
In case of WMAN3x74 units (3 express ports + 4 add ports) Add5 & Add6 inputs are NOT USED.
[1] : MON_IN1 / MON_OUT (WMAN3x74 input1 and output monitoring),
[2] : IN1 / OUT (WMAN3x74 input1 and output),
[3] : MON_IN2 / MON_IN3 (WMAN3x74 input2 and input3 monitoring),
[4] : IN2 / IN3 / ADD1 / ADD2 (WMAN3x74 input2 & input3, and Add1 & Add2 ports),
[5] : ADD3 / ADD4 / not used / not used (WMAN3x74 Add3 & Add4 ports),
[6] : EXT1_IN / EXT2_IN / EXT3_IN / EXT4_IN (monitoring inputs of External port 1 & External port 2 &
External port 3 & External port 4). All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009
3.10 WMAN3174
3.10.2 WMAN3174 functional description
3 « Express
6 «Add ports» ports» and
- Only 4 of them their
are used by monitoring
WMAN3174 accesses
4 external
WMAN output and monitoring
its monitoring inputs
access accesses
The Wavelength Manager 3 (WMAN3) is a board able to build an output optical multiplex by selectively
combining, attenuating or even blocking the single channels forming several input multiplexes. The
Wavelength Manager function is the core of both Tunable/Reconfigurable Optical Add & Drop
Multiplexer (T/R-OADM) and Multi-degree nodes.
- The Wavelength Manager board consists of three major components : one Wavelength Selective
Switch, one dark VOA (i.e. normally turned off) and one Optical Channel Monitor.
Following pre-amplification, the input multiplexed channels are duplicated through a coupler. On the
drop path, a demultiplexing architecture separates them into single channels which are then
selectively connected to their respective Receiver. On the pass-through (or express) path, a
Wavelength Manager unit (featuring a Wavelength Selective Switch device) is employed to block (i.e.
completely attenuated/eliminated) the dropped channels (i.e. connected to receivers) in the previous
step, whereas the express channels experience minimum attenuation. The figure below describes the
environment of the board in a “Multi-degree 3” application (extract):
LOFA11y0_Unidir
OCNC1240 Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s LOFA11y0_Unidir
OADC0104
WMAN
1 VOA 2 3174 1 VOA 2
D M
OSC OSC
ALCT
OCNC1240
WMAN
3174
OCNC1240
M D
WMA
3174
D
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s
3.11 OADC1750
Generic shelf
Board Slots
OADC1750 2
Tx_A1
Tx_A2
Tx_A3
Tx_A4
Tx_B1
Tx_B2
Tx_B3
Tx_B4
Tx OUTPUT A
Tx OUTPUT B

LED Led
Name LED color
Color Meaning Meaning
MAB Yellow • Indicates one or more abnormal conditions at the coupler inputs
during this period.
The optical interface is based on 5 (or 3) x 4-ways MU/MU adapters , located on the front panel:
[1] : TIA1 (Tx Input A1) ; TIA2 (Tx Input A2)

[2] : TIA3 (Tx Input A3) ; TIA4 (Tx Input A4)
[3] : TIB1 (Tx Input B1) ; TIB2 (Tx Input B2)
[4] : TIB3 (Tx Input B3) ; TIB4 (Tx Input B4)
[9] : TOA (Tx Output A) ; TOB (Tx Output B)

3.11 OADC1750
4:1
4:1

The Optical Add & Drop Coupler OADC1750 is a Coupler used in Optical Add Drop part for the TR-OADM
function.
- The OADC1750 is a master unit performing twice the Coupling of four inputs . The LOS detection is
made only at the input of the board.
One OADC1750 board is able to add eight local wavelengths in a given “multiplexing branch” of a “TR-
OADM multi-degree application”.
- The figure below describes the environment of the board for a given “add” direction:
WMAN
3174
OADC1750 4:1 4:1
2 VOA
2 VOA
LOFA
LOFA
1110
1110

1
OADC1300 8:1 8:1 OADC1300
x8 x8
OADC1750 4:1 4:1 4:1 4:1 OADC1750

3.12 OADC0104
Generic shelf
Board Slots
OADC0104 23 to 38 *
LED
Tx_10
Tx_90
* The Automatic Laser Control
can be configured in “Dynamic
mode” to regulate the output
power of the OADC0104 board
(i.e. the input power of the
Tx_OUT
related amplifier) . In such a
case, the ALCT and OADC0104 Unused
boards must be inserted &
declared according to the table
shown below.
Refer to the next page for

more details.

LED Led
Name LED color
Color Meaning Meaning
during this period.
The « Dynamic mode » of the ALC can be used when the ALCT and OADC0104 boards are inserted and
declared according to the following table:
ALCT slot #
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
OADC0104 slot # 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37

3.12 OADC0104
External
Power Supplies
Alarm Interface
EEPROM
SPI interface
EEPROM

The Optical Add & Drop Coupler OADC0104 is a unidirectional coupler Unit in C+-band with optical
monitoring .
- The output power (TX-out) includes 10 % of incoming TX-in Channel 1 and 90% of incoming TX-in Channel
2
- Three photodiodes are used to monitor the available power at each incoming / outgoing access.
Relevant alarms can be raised.
The OADC0104 board is used to insert the ALCT power in the outgoing spectrum sent to the LOFA11y0
board in case of “TR-OADM Degree 2, 3 and 4” applications.
- The figure below describes the environment of the board for a given outgoing direction:
LOFA11y0
OADC0104
WMAN3174 1 VOA 2
OSC
Local wavelengths
to be inserted in a ALCT
given Y line Outgoing spectrum
Incoming spectrums of a given Y line
of the other Y lines 3JK11706AAAAWBZZA1 Issue 1.0
Notes Page


4 Line amplifier and related boards description


4.1 ALCT1010
4.1.1 ALCT1010 faceplate
Generic shelf
Board Slots
ALCT1010 3 to 18 *
* The Automatic Laser Control can be configured in “Dynamic

mode” to regulate the output power of the BMDX board (i.e. the
input power of the related amplifier) . In such a case, the ALCT
and BMDX boards must be inserted & declared according to the
table shown below.
Upper part
* The Automatic Laser Control can be configured in “Dynamic
mode” to regulate the output power of the OADC0104 board
(i.e. the input power of the related amplifier) . In such a case,
the ALCT and OADC0104 boards must be inserted & declared
according to the table shown below.
Refer to the next page for more details.

The « Dynamic mode » of the ALC can be used when the [ALCT and BMDX] or [ALCT and OADC0104]
boards are inserted and declared according to the following table:
ALCT slot #
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
BMDX slot # 6 5 4 3 10 9 8 7 14 13 12 11 18 17 16 15
OADC0104 sl. #
23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37
4.1 ALCT1010
4.1.2 ALCT1010 functional description
ALC Loading
Mode
Photodiode
Colored Laser
VOA
VOA
Loop
control
Management Hardware
POWER information
Supply Switch for
ALC mode
Output power from BMDX or

+/- 48V OADC0104 for ALC dynamic mode
ALCT1010 (Automatic Laser ConTrol) is used to maintain a constant optical power over the whole
extended C-Band, to facilitate the loading of the system with a few number of modulated channels
or to compensate for the loss of some modulated channels. Typically one board per Line Terminal, 2
boards per OADM/Back-to-Back and one per OTS Line in Multi degree n, are used.
The ALCT1010 board & ALC can be used in 2 different configurations : Disable (manual) or Dynamic
mode.
In Disable (manual) mode, the ALCT output power is set manually by the operator at the
commissioning phase.
In Dynamic mode, with BMDX board, the ALCT output power is controlled with a hardware loop from
the BMDX output. In that case, the tuning is done with OP_WDM_D that is the BMDX output (i.e.
amplifier input) power target and that does not correspond to the ALCT output power. This loop
control uses backplane links. Therefore in such a case, the ALCT and BMDX boards must be inserted
and declared according to the table shown on the previous page.
In Dynamic mode, with OADC0104 board, the ALCT output power is controlled in order to regulate the
OADC0104 output (i.e. amplifier input) power target.
1626 LM loading plan in Long Haul application

ALCT1010 unit must be in band 5 and removed from the 88th channel,
Channel loading order: 7, 8, 6,4, 9, 3, 2, 10, 1, 11, 12, 5.
There are 11 versions of the ALCT1010 unit available for each of the bands 2 to 12.

4.2 LOFA11yz
4.2.1 LOFA11y0 faceplate
Generic shelf
Board Slots
LOFA1110
LOFA1111
3 to 18
LOFA1120
LOFA1121
Compact shelf
Board Slots
LOFA1110
LOFA1111 2 to 5 Upper part
(2 and 5 are
LOFA1120 recommended)
LOFA1121
Lower part

4.2 LOFA11yz
4.2.2 LOFA11y0 functional description
1510nm
1510nm
Demux 1 2 Demux

LOFA11y0 is an extend C-Band, dual stage, erbium doped fibre amplifier, used for Long Haul
terrestrial and submarine applications. It provides up to +20dBm output power without External Multi-
Pump Module (up to +23dBm in C-band with EMPM in further release).
LOFA11y0 contains an internal tunable attenuator (VOA) in order to optimize the gain flatness during
the life of the system and to avoid non linear effects in DCF that can fill the interstage.
LOFA11y0 unit is able to tune automatically its VOA and its 1st stage output power.
LOFA11y0 supports 2 functional variants :
LOFA1110 is a 22/9 amplifier. This means that when the interstage is filled with 9dB insertion
losses, the nominal gain of this EDFA unit is 22dB.
losses, the nominal gain of this EDFA unit is 28dB
Naming rules for LOFAwxyz :
1: corresponds to a unit that houses both the gain block and the pumps
2: corresponds to a highly reliable amplifier, which only includes a gain block but no pumps
x: amplification band
1: corresponds to extended C-Band
2: corresponds to L-Band
y: gain of the amplifier
0: corresponds to a nominal gain of 11dB on the LOFA2
1: corresponds to 22/9 in the case of LOFA1 and to 14dB gain on the LOFA2
2: corresponds to 28/9 in the case of LOFA2 and to 18dB gain on the LOFA2
z: minor modifications
0: tunable output power
1: tunable output power with metro Gain block and floating VOA
2: fixed output power

4.2 LOFA11yz
4.2.3 LOFA11y1 functional description
VOA 1st stage

Connection output monitor
1st stage 2nd stage
OSC out input monitor 1st stage 2nd stage 2nd stage output monitor OSC in
output input Input monitor
Photo.
Photo. VOA
Photo. Photo.
Photo. Photo.
1510nm
Demux 1 2 1510nm
Demux
Optical Optical
input output

LOFA11y1 is a C-Band, dual stage, erbium doped fibre amplifier. It provides up to +17dBm output
power and is used for regional application (32 channels max).
LOFA11y1 contains an internal tunable attenuator (VOA) in order to optimize the gain flatness during
the life of the system and to avoid non linear effects in DCF. This VOA is floating meaning that it can
be used or not via a front panel access, depending on the system configuration.
LOFA11y1 unit is capable to tune automatically its 1st stage and 2nd stage output powers by keeping
the gain of each stage constant; this tuning mode is supported when the amplifier operates in
unidirectional configuration as well as in Bidirectional configuration. The floating VOA is tuned by
SW, not by the unit itself.
LOFA11y1 supports 2 functional variants :


Notes Page


4.3 BOFA1000
4.3.1 BOFA1000 faceplate
Generic shelf
Board Slots
BOFA1000 2 to 20
BOFA1000
Lower part
Upper part

LED LED
Name Led Color
color Meaning Meaning
PWR Green / Red This LED is GREEN when the board is power supplied.
This led is RED when one of the internal 48V power supplies is failed or switched–off
(e.g. at unit start–up, unit not configured)
AB1 Yellow When switched ON it means abnormal input signal alarm on gain block 1. The signal
level is below the input signal LOS threshold
SD Yellow ON means that one or both the gain blocks are shut down*
Green / Red Led managed by Shelf Controller. It is:

– OFF when the board is plugged but not declared
– GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and without
failure
– RED when is detected a failure due to hardware failure, power
supply failure or failure in communication on the board
– YELLOW (red+green ON at the same time) when a firmware
download is being performed; the board must not be extracted**
* The LED concerning at least one of the two directions are lighted if required by at least one direction
(logical OR). The user has to question the manager to know which direction has switched ON the LED.
** When a board is on firmware download state, the hardware failure led on the front board lights on yellow
color. Never unplug a board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the board will not restart
and may have to be returned for factory repair.

4.3 BOFA1000
4.3.2 BOFA1000 functional description
Input & Output

Monitoring Points
Photo Photo
Detector Detector
BOFA1 input
BOFA BOFA1 Output
Pump Laser Control
1st amplification stage Management

BOFA1000 is a board containing 1 band amplifier that can be used in each of the 12 sub-bands of the
extended C-band. The gain block is a single-stage erbium doped fibre amplifier, it provides up to
+15dBm output power in a sub-band.
BOFA1000 output power can be tuned in order to optimise per-channel power.
Characteristics :
minimum output power +6dBm
Tuning Step 0.5dB
Maximum EOL output power +15 dBm
Wavelength range 1530.33 to 1568.57nm
Nota : A BOFA gain block operates in only one sub_band at the same time.

4.4 BOFA2000
4.4.1 BOFA2000 faceplate
Generic shelf
Board Slots
BOFA2000 2 to 20
Lower part
Upper part

LED LED
Name Led Color
color Meaning Meaning
PWR Green / Red This LED is GREEN when the board is power supplied.
This led is RED when one of the internal 48V power supplies is failed or switched–off
(e.g. at unit start–up, unit not configured)
SD Yellow ON means that one or both the gain blocks are shut down*
Green / Red Led managed by Shelf Controller. It is:

– OFF when the board is plugged but not declared
– GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and without
failure
– RED when is detected a failure due to hardware failure, power
supply failure or failure in communication on the board
– YELLOW (red+green ON at the same time) when a firmware
download is being performed; the board must not be extracted**
* The LED concerning at least one of the two directions are lighted if required by at least one direction
(logical OR). The user has to question the manager to know which direction has switched ON the LED.
** When a board is on firmware download state, the hardware failure led on the front board lights on yellow
color. Never unplug a board while this LED is yellow. Should this occur, the board will not restart
and may have to be returned for factory repair.

4.4 BOFA2000
4.4.2 BOFA2000 functional description
Input & output
Monitoring
Photo Photo Points
Detector Detector
BOFA2 input BOFA BOFA2 output
Pump Laser Control

Input/output
2nd amplification stage Measurements
Input & Output

Monitoring
Photo Photo Points
Detector Detector
BOFA1 input BOFA BOFA1 Output
Pump Laser Control
1st amplification stage Management

BOFA2000 is a board containing 2 band amplifiers that can be used in each of the 12 sub-bands of the
extended C-band. The 2 gain blocks are single-stage erbium doped fibre amplifiers, they provide up to
+15dBm output power in a sub-band and can be used to amplify optical signal transmitted indifferently
in the same direction or the two opposite directions (one direction per BOFA gain block).
BOFA2000 output power can be tuned in order to optimise per-channel power.
Characteristics :
minimum output power +6dBm
Tuning Step 0.5dB
Maximum EOL output power +15 dBm
Wavelength range 1530.33 to 1568.57nm
Nota : A BOFA gain block operates in only one sub_band at the same time

4.5 EMPM1000
4.5.1 EMPM1000 faceplate
Extractor
Handle
Generic shelf
Board Slots
EMPM1000 3 to 18
Compact shelf
Board Slots Monitor OUT
2 to 5 Monitor IN
EMPM1000 (3 and 4 are
Cover
recommended)
OUT
Extractor
Handle

EMPM1000 LED

4.5 EMPM1000
4.5.2 EMPM1000 functional description
Pump Laser Module
ECID
Shutdown
Restart
LEDs Logic
SPIDER
DC/DC
converter

EMPM1000 is an external pump module providing additional power at a wavelength of approximately

1480nm to the LOFA11y0 in order that it can increase its output power up to +23dBm. This board has
the same size of the LOFA and has an optical input and an optical output.
The EMPM1000 shall house the pump laser and its associated temperature control circuitry. The pump
output power is managed by the LOFA11y0 board via backplane links.
The EMPM1000 unit includes one pump laser plugged via a small daughter boards to the control board and
includes a photodiode monitoring.
The control board includes logical control of laser shutdown command. It polls the signal on backplane
(GEN_APSD, LOS_2MBPS, BOFA/LOFA_SD) and the SPIDER according to loaded configuration (enabling
signals) generates the shutdown commands. A Software shutdown command is also available.
The optical input detects the presence of an optical signal coming from defined optical ports within the
1626LM equipment (see installation handbook for the detailed connection descriptions), the APSD
functionality is triggered when no optical signal is detected.
The optical output provides the additional pump power to the LOFA through an optical connection
requiring a specific jumper with angled connector on EMPM1000 side (see installation handbook for
details).
The EMPM1000 can be installed in 1626LM NE already in service without affecting the traffic through a
temporary inhibition of the LOFA shutdown that is triggered by the removal of the LOFA cover. This
temporary inhibition can be performed through the SW (CT) and lasts a few minutes in order to allow
the removal of the cover from the LOFA, the connection of the EMPM1000 to the LOFA and the
installation of the LOFA cover back in place without having the shut-down of the amplifier.

Notes Page


5 NE management and related boards description


5.1 ESCT2000
5.1.1 ESCT2000 faceplate
Generic and compact shelves

Board Slot
ESCT2000 1
Upper part Lower part

Name
Name Meaning
Meaning
URG It is ON if an Urgent Alarm is raised (major or critical)
Red led
NUR It is ON if a Not Urgent Alarm is raised (minor)
Red led
Attended Alarm indication. It is
ATD - ON when the operator has acknowledged then alarms by pushing the ACO button
Yellow led (URG/NUR leds are lit OFF)
- OFF when the corresponding URG/NUR alarm disappear
Indicates the state of the EC processor. Led states:
- green led: board present, active, configured and no failure
EC - red led: failure on the board (HWF for instance)
Green / - orange led: EC ion stand-by mode (used in case of ESCT redundancy) or starting or
Red / the board is present but not SW configured.
Orange led N.B. Even if ESCT supports SC functionality, EC led is green except if this ESCT which
is in a slave shelf has not been connected yet to the master shelf (SW has not been
downloaded), EC LED is yellow
Indicates the state of the SC processor. Led states:
SC
Green /
- red led: failure on the board (HWF for instance)
Red /
- orange led: EC ion stand-by mode (used in case of ESCT redundancy) or (re)starting or
Orange led
the board is present but not SW configured.

5.1 ESCT2000
5.1.2 ESCT2000 functional description
Mass
Memory CT
EC NMS
IS-Link-EC
IS_Link LED's
Remote
ISSB
Inventory
IS-Link-SC
SPI_A
SC
Card
Presence
Power
Supply

ESCT2000 (Equipment and Shelf Controller) is the hardware platform designed to support the Equipment
Controller (EC) function and the Shelf Controller (SC) function.
The EC supports the Q3/TL1 Network Management agent and the VHM (Virtual Hardware Machine). It
provides the HW resources (physical interfaces) and the SW functionalities (protocol stack) required
for the communication between NE and Management system (OS, Craft Terminal, …).
The SC provides the resources to support the SW functions related to the physical machine control and
management and configuration provisioning. In a shelf all the boards are connected to the SC via the
SPI bus allowing the SC processor to collect the control information of the boards (e.g : alarms
collection, remote inventory and data EEPROM reading).
When the board is located in the Master shelf, both functionalities are active. When the board is located
in Slave shelves, only the SC functionality is provided.
In master shelf, the front panel IS–LINK port is connected to EC processor (EC to local SC are carried over
ISSB bus). In each slave shelf, the front panel IS–LINK port is connected to SC processor.
ESCT2000 located in the master shelf supports a Flash memory (8GB) containing Software applications and
NE data base. The Flash memory can be extracted from ESCT in order to plug it in another unit and to
provide the new unit with the data base. As a consequence, only one ESCT2000 in the NE supports a
mass Memory. URG/NURG/ATTD LEDs are active on the master ESCT2000 only (managed by the EC).

5.1 ESCT2000
5.1.3 ESCT2000_SC faceplate
Generic secondary shelf

Board Slot
ESCT2000_SC 1
Upper part Lower part

Name
Name Meaning
Meaning
Indicates the state of the SC processor. Led states:
SC
Green /
- red led: failure on the board (HWF for instance)
Red /
- orange led: EC ion stand-by mode (used in case of ESCT redundancy) or (re)starting or
Orange led
the board is present but not SW configured.
ESCT2000_SC (ESCT2000 light version with only SC Controller) is supported only in secondary shelves.

Notes Page


5.2 OSCU10yz
5.2.1 OSCU1010 faceplate
Generic shelf
Board Slots
OSCU1010
3 to 18
OSCU1011
Upper part
Compact shelf
Board Slots
OSCU1010
2 to 6
OSCU1011
Lower part
LED
Name Meaning
Meaning
PWR This led is GREEN when the board is power supplied.
Green/Red led This led is RED when one of the internal +/- 48V power supplies is failed or switched-
off (e.g. at unit start-up, unit not configured)
LB Line Busy led: it is ON when the phone line (speech channel) is busy
Yellow led
CC Conference Call led: it is ON when a conference call is occurring.
Yellow led This LED is blinking when the phone is ringing
VL Vacant Line led: it is ON when the line is vacant

Green led
∆ The led is:
Green / Yellow / - OFF when the board is plugged but not configured
Red led - GREEN when the board is plugged, configured and without failure
- RED to indicate failure due to hardware failure, power supply failure or failure in
communication on the board
- YELLOW when a firmware download is performed. The board must not be extracted
*
1 Optical Supervisory Channel 1 RX input signal from LOFA or BMDX
1 Optical Supervisory Channel 1 TX output signal to LOFA or BMDX
2 Optical Supervisory Channel 2 RX input signal from LOFA or BMDX
2 Optical Supervisory Channel 2 TX output signal to LOFA or BMDX
J1 Speech channel handset connector
RST Board reset push button
J Line pick up push button: push the button to get the line
CODING WHEELS Speech channel number coding wheels to set the NE phone number
5.2 OSCU10yz
5.2.2 OSCU1010 functional description
S_Nossa
METRO
2048 kb/s AUXA1 2048 kb/s
4864 kb/s 4864 kb/s
I/E AUXB1 AUXA2 AUXB2 I/E RX2
RXD1 RXD2
X
TXD1 TXD2 TX2
E/I MRX2
E/I
MRX1
RXA1 RXA2
BE RXB1 RXB2 BE Wavelengths
Board alarms
stabilization
METRO1 METRO2
Spider
TXA1 TXA2
B1 RXB2 B1
TXB1
EEPROM RI
MTX1 MTX2
RXA RXB
EEPROM DATA
SPI interface
RXA RXB
64 kb/s
Supervision frames and
service channels
management
64 kb/s O_NOSSA_2
2048 kb/s
DC/DC converter

The Optical Supervisory Channel Unit carries supervision information from/to NEs by means of an
additional 1510nm (OSCU101z) wavelength.
The OSCU board is used for the management of the supervisory channel composed of :
a 2Mbit/s SuperVision Frame (SPV)
a 2Mb/s User Data Channel (UDC)
The SPV is similar to the SDH section overhead (FAW, B1, E1, E2, F1, NU, D-bytes). It contains the LAPD
communication protocol with the ESCT in the 12 Data Communication Channel bytes (D1-D3 for OTS /
D4-D12 for OMS); furthermore the E2 byte carries a 64kbps voice channel dropped in a telephone
handset through a jack connector (front panel) where as E1 byte carries a 64kbit/s auxiliary channel
(coming from USIB1000 board).
OSCU must be used in conjunction with USIB1000 to provide external access of UDC.
OSCU10y0 provides 2 optical transmitters and 2 optical receivers enabling to supervise 2 directions
(suitable to Line Repeater, OADM, B-t-B Terminal).
- In case of Mullti Degree 3 or 4 applications, 2 OSCU10y0 boards are required
OSCU10y1 provides 1 optical transmitter and 1 optical receiver enabling to supervise 1 direction
(suitable to Line Terminal).
OSCU is able to manage a Shutdown bus (SD bus) to communicate with the Amplifier boards
(LOFA/BOFA). This function is used to remote the Shutdown of the Amplifiers.

5.2 OSCU10yz
5.2.3 2Mb/s supervision frame structure

Optical Supervision Channel (OSC) frame is made of 32 bytes. The 2MB/s supervision frame is divided in
32 slots, numbered from 0 to 31; in the first part of the frame (slots 0 to 15) are inserted the service
channels related to the optical transport section, while in the second part of the frame are inserted
the service channels related to the optical multiplex section. Slot 0 is used for frame alignment
word; the first bit of slot 1 is used as parity bit for the whole frame, while the first bit of slot 17 is
used as parity bit for the multiplexing section subframe. All unused bits are set to “1” value.
K1/K2 bytes are used for alarm detection such as LOSC, LOSCF alarms or OMS_FDI, OMS_BDI alarms (to
manage OMSP protection).
An 64 kb/s User Data Channel (UDC) shall be possibly dropped or passed-through. Default state is
“add/drop”. Cross-connection for E1 is automatically set in “Add/drop” if CLOCK is configured in
“LOCAL” or “Pass-trough” if CLOCK is configured in “REMOTE”.
A voice channel shall be transported by E2 byte of the supervision frame so that an operator located in
front of an NE could call another operator situated in front of any other NE on the same network
(specific call or conference call). E2 byte of the OSC frame shall be put in "pass-through" between
both ports on the board if clock is set to "REMOTE". If clock is set to "LOCAL", E2 byte of the OSC
frame from port SPV1 shall be dropped in front panel phone jack.
OMS_FDI (Forward Defect Indication) and OMS_BDI (Background Defect Indication) maintenance signals
shall be sent/received by the NE to warn other NEs about failures. The corresponding alarm shall be
raised. OM1 (K1) and OM2 (K2) bytes shall transport OMS-FDI or OMS-BDI signals.
OM1 (K1) and OM2 (K2) bytes shall transport OMS-FDI_p (_p for “payload”) after LOS detected by LOFA
board. OM1 (K1) and OM2 (K2) bytes shall transport OMS-FDI_o (_o for “overhead”) after LOS
detected by OSCU board.
OTS-TTI signals shall be sent/received by the NE to warn other NEs about channel mismatches.
OT1 byte shall transport OTS-TTI signal.
Notes Page


5.3 USIB1000
5.3.1 USIB1000 faceplate
Generic shelf
Board Slots
USIB1000 23 to 38
4-pin RJ11 (audio interface for connecting

an external telephone desk set or for
phone extension towards other equipment)
8-pin RJ45 (2x64kbps codirectional

channels G703 compliant)
8-pin RJ45 (2x2048 or 1544 kbps channels

G703 compliant)


5.3 USIB1000
5.3.2 USIB1000 functional description
User 1
2Mbit/s / 1.5Mbit/s
or 2 x 1.5Mbit/s
4
2 x 2Mbit/s
Adaptation
RJ45
interface
2Mbit/s
access 4 8 pins
User 2
LED
4
64kbit/s interface
RJ45
4 8 pins
64kbit/s interface
3 4
Audio in
3 Audio interface RJ11
Audio out 4 pins
Back Power Front

panel Supply Management
panel

USIB1000 provides external access to :

Two 2Mbit/s (E1) or 1.5Mbit/s (T1) User Data Channels (RJ45 connector)
Two 64kbit/s auxiliary channels (RJ45 connector)
An analogue audio interface (RJ11) to connect an external telephone desk set or phone extension
towards other equipment.
These signals are adapted through embedded interfaces between OSCU board and external access.
T1 signals can be accepted on front panel but require in that case to be adapted in USIB in order to
provide 2Mbit/s signals on the back panel, OSCU being only able to manage 2Mbit/s bit-rate for the
UDC. The bit-rate selection is configured via a switch on USIB board (to position before installing the
board).
An UDC pass-through in one NE must be done via external loop on USIB1000.
USIB is installed just under the OSCU board.
On back panel “dashed arrows” correspond to spare OSCU connections (not available in this release).
There are three 3 Audio in and out lines on back panel :

First one for the main OSCU
Second one for the spare OSCU (not available in this release)
Third one for potential second USIB (not available in this release)

5.4 HSKU1000 & HSKU1100
5.4.1 HSKU1000 & HSKU1100 faceplates
Generic shelf
Board Slots
22 or 39
HSKU1000
(22 recommended)
HSKU1100 23 to 38
25 pins SUB-D female connector for

housekeeping alarms (8 functional inputs + 8
functional outputs plus additional signals for
reference voltages
Compact shelf
Board Slots
7 to 10
HSKU1100
(10 recommended)

HSKU1100 is mainly dedicated to the “Compact shelf”. Nevertheless, it can be used also in the
“Generic shelf” . This latter case could be useful in case of board replacement (having no RAIU1000
spare) or in order to have: homogeneous boards in both shelves and / or homogeneous spare set.
For both shelves (“Generic” and “Compact”) more than one HSKU board can be used if the capacity
of one board is not large enough.

5.4 HSKU1000 & HSKU1100
5.4.2 HSKU1000 & HSKU1100 functional descriptions
Back Panel connectors Front panel connector DB25
Output 8 OUT Relays

block
SPIDER
Input 8 IN
block Opto_couplers
Example : OUT relays state in function of the SW command
Open relay x
Relay x
OUT x State : Low
Close relay y Relay y
OUT y state : High

Common out

HSKU1000 & HSKU11OO provide 8 input accesses and 8 output accesses. One HSKU1000 / HSKU1100
can be installed in Master shelf. One HSKU1000 / HSKU1100 unit per NE can be provided.
The user is informed about the current status of the opto-couplers inputs. Moreover the user can
remotely change the state of the output relays.

5.5 RAIU1000 & RAIU1100
5.5.1 RAIU1000 & RAIU1100 faceplates
Generic shelf
Board Slots
22 to 39
RAIU1000
(39 recommended)
RAIU1100 23 to 38
9 pins SUB-D female and RJ11 connectors

to be used for rack alarms management
Compact shelf
Board Slots
7 to 10
RAIU1100
(9 recommended)

RAIU1100 is mainly dedicated to the “Compact shelf”. Nevertheless, it can be used also in the
“Generic shelf” . This latter case could be useful in case of board replacement (having no RAIU1000
spare) or in order to have: homogeneous boards in both shelves and / or homogeneous spare set.

5.5 RAIU1000 & RAIU1100
5.5.2 RAIU1000 & RAIU1100 functional descriptions
URG
NURG
ATTD
DB9
Or
Relays
Management
Management Logic
To the TRU or
to the above
shelf RAIU
board
Logic Functions
URG/NURG/FAN/PSUP... RJ11
4
From the
below shelf
RAIU board
Front Panel

RAIU1000 and RAIU1100 monitor the rack alarms to light ON or OFF the lamps of the TRU
(URG/NURG/ATTD). It is equipped in each shelf to collect information on the alarms raised in the
same shelf.
The slave shelf RAIU only takes into account :

the alarms raised by the fan modules or by the power supply units of the shelf via the bus ALARM,
the information sent by the RAIU board of the below shelf when present.
The master shelf RAIU board collects signals :

from the ESCT via the SPI bus,
from the EC via the URG, NURG and UP signals,
directly from the fan modules and from the power supply units of the shelf via the bus ALARM,
from the RAIU board of the below shelf.
2 front panel connectors are available on the RAIU1000 and RAIU1100 boards. These 2 interfaces are :
A 9 pins SUB-D female connector.
In Master shelf it provides the interface with the TRU.
In Slave shelf it can be connected either with the TRU or with the RJ11 connector of another
RAIU1000 board, located in the above shelf.
A RJ11 connector which allows intra-shelf connection. It has to be connected with the 9-pin SUB-D
connector of the RAIU1000 / RAIU1100 located in the shelf below.

5.6 PSUP1000
5.6.1 PSUP1000 faceplate
Generic shelf
Board Slots
PSUP1000 21 and 40
Compact shelf
Board Slots
PSUP1000 11 and 12


5.6 PSUP1000
5.6.2 PSUP1000 functional description
SPIder
3.7V input
OR
3.7 Output
48/60V to
5.4v output
3.7V & 5.5V
DC/DC
48/60V
battery
input 48/60 V Filter OR 48/60V input
& surge filtered
suppression 48/60V output
filtered

PSUP1000 boards work in 1+1 protection and they are both active at the same time, supplying the
units in the subrack with nominal 48V or 60V, 3V and 5V.
Each card is able to provide from the main powering, by means an internal DC/DC converter, the
required power supply.
The main purposes of PSUP1000 are :

Supply and distribute –48V/-60V filtered and protected voltage to all the boards housed in each
shelf.
Supply and distribute +3.7V and 5.4V protected voltages to SPIDER circuitry in all the boards.
Give alarms on fault battery and voltages loss.

5.7 FANS1000
5.7.1 FANS1000 faceplate
Generic shelf
Board Slot
FANS1000 41


5.7 FANS1000
5.7.2 FANS1000 functioning
HSKU
RAIU
Back panel wires

Back panel wires
FANS alarms
FANS alarms

FANS1000 is equipped with 3 fans, the unit is located at the bottom of each 1626 LM shelf, allowing to
dissipate the heat and to regulate the board temperature. A Fan Unit Protection (anti-dust filter) has
to be put just below the fans.
The FANS are monitored via the SPI bus and some direct wires are sent to the HSKU and the RAIU
boards to monitor a possible failure of the cooling system.
The maximum power consumption of the FAN 1000 block is 55 watts when all the three FAN modules
are at high rotation speed.
The maximum power dissipation per shelf is 640W.

5.8 FANS2000
5.8.1 FANS2000 faceplate
Compact shelf
Board Slot Front view
FANS2000 13 LED
Anti-dust filter
Backplane
connectors Top view

Name LED Color Manage by Meaning
∆ Green / Red The Shelf Controller OFF when board is plugged but not declared
GREEN when board is plugged and no failure
RED : when board indicates failure due to
hardware failure, power supply failure or failure
in communication on the board
M7 connector is used for:

- Power supply interface
- Card presence interface

- SPI bus
- Backplane Alarm signal which is sent to the RAIU board

5.8 FANS2000
5.8.2 FANS2000 functioning
Slot ID

This FANS2000 unit used in the system 162xLM compact shelf is equipped with 6 fans.

1) Power supply interface
- Power supplies available on the board are +13.2V and +3V3. Two +13.2V power supplies are
generated by DC/DC converters from 2 external batteries (+36V to 72V).
2) Card presence interface

1) SPI bus
2) Backplane Alarm signal which is sent to the RAIU board
DAC (Digital to Analog Converter) is used for:

1) to adjust the right speed of 6 Fans
2) detect alarm signal to put all fans to the maximum speed (100%)
FAN Specifications :
- Dimension : 40x40x28 mm
- Rated Voltage : 12 VDC
- Rated Current : 0,8 A
- Voltage Control Speed : 0V --> 16000 (RPM), 1,65 --> 8100 and 3,3V --> 0
- Speed max : 16 000 RPM
- The maximum power consumption of the FAN 2000 block is 24 watts.
True False
TRBD1111 is a 3R G.709 transponder supporting as B&W
interface the VSR (I-64.1) UNI or the OTU-2 NNI.
CMDX1012 is a dedicated card for TRBD4412 and TRBC4412
Line access (network side) of 2xGE_FC board is always B&W

The ETHC1000 can aggregate up to ten Gigabit
Ethernet client signals into a 10 GbE WAN frame
OCPU2100 is dedicated to OSNCP and is completely passive.
OMDX is a 100GHz grid Mux/Demux for regional terrestrial

applications
BMDX1000 can be used for B-OADM
ALCT output power tuning in dynamic mode is automatic
and based on a BMDX output power target.
LOFA11y0 is dedicated to regional terrestrial applications
Time allowed:
10 minutes
Notes : True False
TRBD1111 is a 3R G.709 transponder supporting as B&W

interface the VSR (I-64.1) UNI or the OTU-2 NNI.
CMDX1012 is a dedicated card for TRBD4412 and TRBC4412
Line access (network side) of 2xGBE_FC board is always B&W

The ETHC1000 can aggregate up to ten Gigabit

Ethernet client signals into a 10 GbE WAN frame
OCPU2100 is dedicated to O-SNCP and is completely passive.

OMDX is a 100GHz grid Mux/Demux for regional terrestrial
applications

BMDX1000 can be used for B-OADM

ALCT output power tuning in dynamic mode is automatic and
based on a BMDX output power target.

LOFA11y0 is dedicated to regional terrestrial applications

Answer the Questions [cont.]
True False
LOFA11y1 has a floating VOA and works in constant gain
URG / NURG / ATTD indicators on ESCT board are active in
Master shelf only
Equipment Controller is always located on Master shelf ESCT
OSCU1010 has two SPV ports and works with 1565nm
supervisory channel
Supervisory channel bit-rate is 2Mbit/s
UDC external access is located on OSCU
USIB1000 provides access for two 64kbit/s auxiliary channels

RAIU1000 in secondary shelf receives alarms directly from
PSUP and FANS
PSUP1000 provides low voltages (ex : 3.7V) to all boards of
the shelf
Time allowed:
10 minutes
Notes : True False
LOFA11y1 has a floating VOA and works in constant gain
URG / NURG / ATTD indicators on ESCT board are active in

Master shelf only
Equipment Controller is always located on Master shelf ESCT
OSCU1010 has two SPV ports and works with 1565nm

supervisory channel
Supervisory channel bit-rate is 2Mbit/s
UDC external access is located on OSCU
USIB1000 provides access for two 64kbit/s auxiliary channels

RAIU1000 in secondary shelf receives alarms directly from
PSUP and FANS
PSUP1000 provides low voltages (ex : 3.7V) to all boards of the

shelf

Discover
According to trainer instructions, discover the boards in one or more

shelves belonging to the training model:
____ minutes
NE: R. # Sr. #
21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40
1 2 19 20
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
41
NE: R. # Sr. #
21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40
1 2 19 20
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
41
Discover [cont.]
NE: R. # Sr. #
21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40
1 2 19 20
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
41
NE: R. # Sr. #
21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40
1 2 19 20
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38
41
Module Summary
The available boards for the 1626 LM R 5.0A are
Transponders : TRBD11y1, TRBD4x12, TRBC1111 and TRBC4x12

Protection : OCPU2104, OCPU2100 and PSCU3000
Ethernet tributaries : 2xGBE_FC and ETHC1000
Multiplexers/Demultiplexers
: CMDX10yz, OMDX8100_x,
OMDX4100_chx-chy and BMDX1x00
R/TR-OADM and related : OADC1102, WMAN1100, OCNC12y0, OADC1100,
OADC1300, TMDX1180, WMAN3174, OADC1750, OADC0104
Amplifiers and related : LOFA11yz, BOFAw000, EMPM1000 and ALCT1010
Management and Alarms : ESCT2000, RAIU1000, RAIU1100, OSCU10yz,
HSKU1000 and HSKU11001100
Environment and User services : PSUP1000, FANS1000, FANS2000 and
USIB1000


for this module


End of Module
Boards Description


Section 1
Product Overview
Module 4
Cabling Description


Blank Page

Product Overview Cabling Description
Document History

Module Objectives
Perform optical and electrical cabling related to Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM

R 5.0A boards





Table of Contents
1 Optical cabling description 7

1.1 Unit optical connections 8
1.2 MU-type optical connector 9
1.3 LC-type optical connector 10
1.4 Line Terminal Master shelf – LH application - Example 11
1.5 Line Terminal Secondary shelf – LH application - Example 12
1.6 Secondary shelf with protection – Example 13
1.7 40Gb/s Transponder Secondary shelf - Example 14
1.8 Mixed 40Gb/s & 10Gb/s Transponder Secondary shelf - Example 15
1.9 Line Repeater-PGE Master shelf - Example 16
1.10 Line Repeater-AGE Master shelf - Example 17
1.11 TR-OADM Line Shelf for OTS 1 Example 18
1.14 TR-OADM Transponder Shelf per OTS Example (8 first ch.) 21
1.15 TR-OADM Transponder Shelf per OTS Example (From 9th to 72nd ch.) 22
1.16 Master shelf configuration for ROADM - Example 23
1.17 Degree-2 ROADM MASTER Line Shelf for OTS 1 - Example 24
1.18 Degree-2 ROADM SLAVE Line Shelf for OTS 2 - Example 25
1.19 Degree-2 TR-OADM + 2 Multidir. Add/Drop shelf config. - Example 26
1.20 2xGBE_FC optical connections 27
1.21 ETHC1000 optical connections 28
1.22 Optical cabling configurations for 2xGBE_FC and ETHC1000 29
145
2 Electrical cabling description All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 31
2.1
Product Overview TRU
Cabling layout
Description 32
2.2 Links between PSUP and TRU 33
2.3 Links between RAIU and TRU 34

2.4 Inter shelf links with RJ45 connectors 35



1 Optical cabling description


1.1 Unit optical connections
Not used
Not used Mux
Mux output
output monitoring
Band #1
monitoring Ch
Band #2
#1
Ch Band #3
#2 Band #4
WDM Rx Ch
monitoring #3 Band #5
Ch Band #6
B&W Rx #4
B&W Tx Ch Band #7
WDM Rx #5 Band #8
WDM Tx Ch
#6 Band #9
Ch Band #10
#7
Ch Band #11
TRBD unit
#8
Mux OUT
Band #12
Output
Demux IN Input
CMDX unit BMDX unit WDM


1.2 MU-type optical connector

The optical connections are made with double MU/SPC connectors :

• TRBD1111, TRBD1121, TRBD1131 either on Client or WDM interface, TRBD1191 on WDM interface,
• TRBC boards, on WDM interface,
• CMDX boards, Warning: MU Short Boot is mandatory for CMDX1052,
• ALCT boards,
• OMDX boards,
• LOFA boards.
The optical connections are made with simple MU/SPC connectors on:
• OSCU boards,
• OCPU boards.

1.3 LC-type optical connector

The optical connections are made with LC/PC connectors on:

All the SFP modules plugged on :
TBRC1111 on client side,
2xGBE_FC both on client and WDM sides,
ETHC1000 on client side,
All the XFP modules plugged on :
ETHC1000 on WDM side,
TRBD1191 on client side.

1.4 Line Terminal Master shelf – LH application - Example
21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40
HSKU
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
LINE
OSCU1010
LOFA11y0
LOFA11y0
ALCT1010
To
CMDX
To
CMDX
BMDX1000
ESCT2000
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
CMDX1010
1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20
41
Fan

All connectors used for optical cabling are MU.

1.5 Line Terminal Secondary shelf – LH application - Example
21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
To To
BMDX BMDX
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
CMDX1010
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
ESCT2000
TRBD11y1
CMDX1010
1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20
41
Fan

Transponder Associated CMDX
TRBD4312 CMDX1010 or CMDX1012 8ch – 50GHz

TRBD4412, TRBC4412 CMDX1052* 4ch – 100GHz
TRBD4612, TRBC4612 CMDX1012 8ch – 50GHz
TRBD1191 & 1191 MLSE CMDX1010 or CMDX1012 8ch – 50GHz

1.6 Secondary shelf with protection – Example
21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40
PSUP
RAIU
PSUP
User
side
User
side
BMDX
BMDX
side
side
OCPU2104
OCPU2104
OCPU2104
OCPU2104
OCPU2104
TRBD1110
TRBD1110
TRBD1110
CMDX1010
TRBD1110
TRBC1111
TRBC1111
TRBC1111
ESCT2000
TRBC1111
CMDX1010
1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20
41
Fan


Protected and Protecting transponders must be located in adjacent slots.


1.7 40Gb/s Transponder Secondary shelf - Example
21 22 33 44 555 66 777 88 99 10
10 11
11 12
12 13
13 14
14 15
15 16
16 17
17 18
18 39 40
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
OSCU1010
LOFA11y0
LOFA11y0
TRBD4312
TRBD4312
TRBD4312
TRBD4312
BOFA
BOFA
BOFA
BOFA
CMDX1010
ESCT2000
1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 34 38 19 20
41
FANS1000



1.8 Mixed 40Gb/s & 10Gb/s Transponder Secondary shelf - Example
21 22 33 44 555 66 777 88 99 10
10 11
11 12
12 13
13 14
14 15
15 16
16 17
17 18
18 39 40
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
OSCU1010
LOFA11y0
LOFA11y0
TRBD4312
TRBD4312
TRBD4312
TRBD4312
CMDX1010
ESCT2000
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 34 38 19 20
41
FANS1000


1.9 Line Repeater-PGE Master shelf - Example
21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
LINE 2
LINE 1
LOFA11y0 (pre-amp)
LOFA11y0 (pre-amp)
LOFA11y0 (booster)
LOFA11y0 (booster)
OSCU1010
ALCT1010
ALCT1010
WMAN1100
WMAN1100
ESCT2000
USIB
OADC
OADC
0104
0104
1 2 23 24 25
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20
41 Fan

PGE: Programmable Gain Equalizer
OADC0104
OSC OSC
ALCT
ALCT

OADC0104
OSC OSC

1.10 Line Repeater-AGE Master shelf - Example
21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
LINE 2
LINE 1
LOFA11y0 (pre-amp)
LOFA11y0 (pre-amp)
LOFA11y0 (booster)
LOFA11y0 (booster)
OSCU1010
WMAN3174
ALCT1010
WMAN3174
ALCT1010
ESCT2000
OADC
OADC
0104
0104
1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20
41 Fan

OADC0104
OSC OSC
ALCT
ALCT

OADC0104
OSC OSC

1.11 TR-OADM Line Shelf for OTS 1 Example
21 22 33 4 55 6 77 8 99 10
10 11
11 12 13
13 1414 15 16 17 18 39 40
LINE
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
LOFA11y0 (Pre-ampli.)
LOFA11y0 (Booster)
WMAN3174 OTS 1
OADC1300
OSCU1010
OADC1300
OSCU1010
LOFA1110
LOFA1110
ALCT1010
ESCT2000
WMAN OTS 2
WMAN OTS 3
USIB
USIB
OCNC
OADC
OADC
1230
1100
0104
25 25 25 25
1 2 25
23
23 24
25
24 25
25
25
24 26 25
27
25
24 28 25
29
25
24 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20
41
FANS1000

LOFA11y0
OCNC1230
1 VOA 2
OSC
D
M
ALCT
2 VOA 1 WMAN3174
OADC0104
OSC
LOFA11y0

21 22 33 4 55 6 77 8 99 10
10 11
11 12 13
13 1414 15 16 17 18 39 40
LINE
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
LOFA11y0 (Pre-ampli.)
LOFA11y0 (Booster)
WMAN3174 OTS 2
OADC1300
OADC1300
LOFA1110
LOFA1110
ALCT1010
ESCT2000
WMAN OTS 1
WMAN OTS 3
OCNC
OADC
OADC
1230
1100
0104
25 25 25 25
1 2 25
23
23 24
25
24 25
25
25
24 26 25
27
25
24 28 25
29
25
24 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20
41
FANS1000

OCNC1230
1:2 OADC1100
D
OADC1300
TDMX1180 1:8
To/from TRBD/TRBC
1
1
(up to 8)
LOFA1110
LOFA1110
VOA
VOA
x8
2
2
TDMX1180 TDMX1180

(up to 8) (up to 8)

21 22 33 4 55 6 77 8 99 10
10 11
11 12 13
13 1414 15 16 17 18 39 40
LINE
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
LOFA11y0 (Pre-ampli.
LOFA11y0 (Booster)
WMAN3174 OTS 3
OADC1300
OADC1300
LOFA1110
LOFA1110
ALCT1010
ESCT2000
WMAN OTS 1
WMAN OTS 2
OCNC
OADC
OADC
1230
1100
0104
25 25 25 25
1 2 25
23
23 24
25
24 25
25
25
24 26 25
27
25
24 28 25
29
25
24 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20
41
FANS1000

WMAN3174
OADC1750 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ Up to 32λ Up to 32λ

M
4:1 4:1
LOFA1110
LOFA1110
2
2 VOA
VOA
To/from TRBD/TRBC
(up to 8)
1

8:1 8:1
OADC1750 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ x8 OADC1750 Up to 4λ Up to 4λ x8
4:1 4:1 4:1 4:1

1.14 TR-OADM Transponder Shelf per OTS Example (8 first ch.)
21 22 333
25
23
23 424
24
254 55
25
25 66
26 777
25
27 88
28 99
25
29
25 10
10
30 11
11 12 13
13 1414 15 16 17 18 39 40
25
24 25
24 24
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
(Booster)
OADC1100
LOFA11y0
TDMX1180
ALCT1010
OADC1750
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
ESCT2000
OCNC
OADC
OADC
1230
1100
0104
25 25 25 25 WMAN OTS 1
1 22 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 19 20
41
FANS1000

WMAN3174
OADC1750
M
4:1 4:1
To/from TRBD/TRBC
(up to 8)
OCNC1230
1:2 OADC1100
D
TDMX1180
To/from TRBD/TRBC
(up to 8)

1.15 TR-OADM Transponder Shelf per OTS Example (From 9th to 72nd ch.)
21 22 33 4 55 66 77 88 9 10
10 11
11 12 13
13 1414 15 16 17 18 39 40
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
(Booster)
LOFA11y0
TDMX1180
ALCT1010
LOFA1110
OADC1750
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
TRBD11y1
ESCT2000
OCNC
OADC
OADC
1230
1100
0104
25 25 25 25 OADC1300
1 22 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 19 20
41
FANS1000

OADC1100 D WMAN3174
Up to 32λ
Up to 4λ M
OADC1300 Up to 4λ Up to 32λ
LOFA1110
2 VOA
1:8
1
1
LOFA1110
VOA
Up to 32λ OADC1300
x8
8:1
2
Up to 4λ Up to 4λ
x8
TDMX1180
4:1 4:1
OADC1750
To/from TRBD/TRBC To/from TRBD/TRBC (up to 8)
(up to 8)

1.16 Master shelf configuration for ROADM - Example
21 22 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 39 40
HSKU
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
LOFA11y0 (pre-amp)
LOFA11y0 (pre-amp)
LOFA11y0 (booster)
LOFA11y0 (booster)
OSCU1010
ALCT1010
ALCT1010
BMDX1000
BMDX1000
ESCT1000
WMAN
WMAN
OADC
USIB
OADC
1 2 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20
41 LINE LINE Fan

West side East side


1.17 Degree-2 ROADM MASTER Line Shelf for OTS 1 - Example
21 22 33 4 55 6 77 8 99 10
10 11
11 12 13
13 1414 15 16 17 18 39 40
LINE 1
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
LOFA11y0 (Booster)
WMAN3174 OTS 1
OSCU1010
LOFA1110
ALCT1010
BMDX1000
ESCT2000
WMAN OTS 2
OCNC
OADC
1230
0104
25 25 25 25
1 2 25
23
23 24
25
24 25
25
25
24 26 25
27
25
24 28 25
29
25
24 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20
41
FANS1000

LOFA11y0_Unidir
OCNC1230
Express
1 VOA 2
OSC
CMDX 1
To/from TRBD /
BMDX1000
TRBC (up to 8)
OTS 1
CMDX 12
LOFA1110
1 VOA 2
To/from TRBD /
TRBC (up to 8)
ALCT
ADD
2 VOA 1 WMAN3174
Express
LOFA11y0_Unidir
1.18 Degree-2 ROADM SLAVE Line Shelf for OTS 2 - Example
21 22 33 4 55 6 77 8 99 10
10 11
11 12 13
13 1414 15 16 17 18 39 40
LINE 2
PSUP
PSUP
RAIU
LOFA11y0 (Booster)
WMAN3174 OTS 2
LOFA1110
ALCT1010
BMDX1000
ESCT2000
WMAN OTS 1
OCNC
OADC
1230
0104
25 25 25 25
1 2 25
23
23 24
25
24 25
25
25
24 26 25
27
25
24 28 25
29
25
24 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 19 20
41
FANS1000

LOFA11y0_Unidir
OADC0104
Express
WMAN3174 1 VOA 2
ADD OSC
ALCT
LOFA1110
2 VOA 1
CMDX 1
To/from TRBD /
BMDX1000
TRBC (up to 8)
OTS 2
CMDX 12
To/from TRBD /
TRBC (up to 8)
2 VOA 1
Express
OCNC1230 OSC
LOFA11y0_Unidir
1.19 Degree-2 TR-OADM + 2 Multidir. Add/Drop shelf config. - Example

CAUTION: LOFA slot 15 and OADC1300 slot 16 are needed only for channels 33 to 64.

1.20 2xGBE_FC optical connections
W-P
Not used
MU connectors
W Ch
#1
Ch
Not used
#2
Ch
#3
Ch
U1 #4
Ch
LC connectors
#5
Ch
Client #6
U2
Ch
#7
Ch
#8
Mux OUT
U1 Demux IN
CMDX unit
TRBC unit

1.21 ETHC1000 optical connections
U6
U7 Ch
U8
#1
Client Ch
U9
#2
Ch
MU connectors #3
Ch
U #4
Not used
Ch
W
#5
Ch
#6
LC connectors Ch
L1 TRBD unit #7
Ch
#8
Mux OUT
Not used
Demux IN
CMDX unit


1.22 Optical cabling configurations for 2xGBE_FC and ETHC1000
4 x ETHC1000 + six 2xGBE_FC
Additional cable duct required (on the top)

and change of subrack cover
No need of additional cable duct

and to change subrack cover
Maximum allowed: 64 fibers 10 x ETHC1000 + six 2xGBE_FC

Depending on the number and the type of traffic boards, an additional optical cable duct on the top of
the shelf may be necessary to route all the fibers. In that case, the subrack cover must be changed.
The table below gives some shelf configurations and the relevant restrictions.
For each ETHC unit :

user ports P1 to P6 should be routed towards Top optical duct (12 fibers)
user ports P7 to P9 should be routed towards Bottom optical duct (6 fibers)
concentrated bit rate fibers on L1 port should be routed towards Bottom optical duct (2 fibers)
For 2xGBE_FC unit:
user ports U1 and U2 should be routed towards Bottom optical duct (4 fibers)
colored signal fibers on W port should be routed towards Bottom optical duct (2 fibers)

Discover
Looking at the training equipment, identify the optical cabling between

one transponder and the line (both directions).
Each group of trainees will make a clear graphical schema to illustrate

the optical cabling he discovered.
This schema must contain :
• The boards acronyms involved in the optical path and

• their hardware position (Rack / Subrack / Slot /Sub-board / Connector)
• The direction of each fibre.
Time allowed : _ _minutes


2 Electrical cabling description


2.1 TRU layout
Rack Alarms Indicators

- Urgent Alarm (red)
TRU fuse breakers
- Non Urgent Alarm (yellow)
- Attended Alarm (red) Shelf 1 fuse breaker Shelf 1 fuse breaker
Side A Side B
= =
II II II
= =
Rack power feed
presence indicator

TRU : Top Rack Unit.
CAUTION: Racks with MA-NGTRU are recommended since R5.0A for all new installations. They are
mandatory to host transponders shelves with 16 TRBD1191 (R5.0 restriction released). Racks TRU
installed in previous release are still compatible with R5.0A.

2.2 Links between PSUP and TRU
TRU
PP
PP
WW
W
W RR
RR
11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 10 11
10 11 12
12 13
13 14
14 15
15 16
16 17
17 18
18 19
19 20
20
FANS
Fan
Fan
Air deflector
PP
PP
WW
W
W RR
RR
11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 10 11
10 11 12
12 13
13 14
14 15
15 16
16 17
17 18
18 19
19 20
20
FANS
Fan
Fan
Air deflector
PP
PP
WW
W
W RR
RR
11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 10 11
10 11 12
12 13
13 14
14 15
15 16
16 17
17 18
18 19
19 20
20
FANS
Fan
Fan

TRU (Top Rack Unit) provides power feed voltage to shelves.
Power distribution is secured by circuit breakers, also used to power up or down shelves.
TRU provides Alarm and status indications on its front panel.

2.3 Links between RAIU and TRU
Top Rack Unit

Fiber storage
PP
PP
WW
WW RR
RR
11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 10 11
10 11 12 13
12 13 14
14 15
15 16
16 17
17 18
18 19
19 20
20
9 pins SUB-D
FANS Fan
Fan
female
Air deflector connector
PP
PP
WW
WW RR
RR
11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 10 11
10 11 12 13
12 13 14
14 15
15 16
16 17
17 18
18 19
19 20
20
FANS Fan
Fan
Air deflector
PP
WW
PP
WW
RR
RJ11
RR
connector
11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 10 11
10 11 12 13
12 13 14
14 15
15 16
16 17
17 18
18 19
19 20
20
FANS Fan
Fan

The RAIU boards can be chained as previously described, or can be directly connected to the TRU (Top
Rack Unit) which has four DB25 connectors.
To interconnect with a TRU, use the cable 8 (P/N. 3AL 94742 AA).

2.4 Inter shelf links with RJ45 connectors
RJ 45 connector for
inter shelf links
Twisted pair
RJ 45 connector for
1353NM
ESCT2000
Lower part

Inter-shelf link (IS-LINK) allows the communication between the EC and all the SCs of the NE. It’s a
10Mbps Ethernet bus.
The connections are performed by means of RJ45 connectors, located on the ESCT2000 front panel.
T o e x te rn a l
LAN
P1
MASTER
P2 SH ELF
P3
P4
In te rn a l
LAN
P1
SLAVE 1
P2 SH ELF
P3
P4
In te rn a l
LAN
P1
SLAVE 2
P2 SH ELF
P3
P4

Discover
Identify the type of electrical cabling corresponding to network

element(s) used for the training
Time allowed : 5 minutes


Module Summary
Connectors used in 1626 LM R 5.0A for intra or inter shelves

Cabling is :
Optical
MU/SPC (most used)
LC/SPC (SFP units)
Electrical
RJ45
BNC
DB9
RJ11
Cabling of RAIU and ESCT can be a :

“Bus” configuration
“Star” configuration (point to multipoint)


Notes Page



for this module


End of Module
Cabling Description


Section 2
NE Operation
Module 1
Subrack and Board Declaration


Blank Page

NE Operation Subrack and Board Declaration
Document History

Module Objectives
Declare and remove in the MIB a channel respecting the appropriate

sequence and the software associations





Table of Contents
Page
1 Applications and procedure overview 7
1.1 Example #1: “Long haul terrestrial terminal” 8
1.2 Example #2: “Regional terminal” 9
1.3 Steps overview 10
2 Boards and drawers declaration 11
2.1 Manual declaration for boards 12
2.2 Transponder boards declaration 13
2.3 Manual declaration for drawers 15
2.4 Automatic declaration for traffic boards and drawers 16
3 Connectors and cabling configuration 17
3.1 Connectors state management 18
3.2 Optical cabling declaration 19
3.3 Update management 21
4 Specific configuration 23
4.1 Modifying the LOFA board configuration 24
4.2 Modifying the transponder board configuration 25
4.3 Modifying the 2xGBE_FC board configuration 27
4.4 Modifying the OSCU board configuration 28
4.5 Modifying the WMAN1100 Provisioning Parameters 29
4.6 Modifying the WMAN3x74 board configuration 31
4.7 Modifying the TDMX1180 Port Profile 33
5 Protection provisioning 35
5.1 OSNCP Protection management process 36
215
5.2 OSNCP Protection provisioningAllrules 37
5.3 OSNCP Protection provisioning examples 38
Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009
5.4 OMSP Protection management process 41

5.5 OMSP Protection provisioning example 42



1 Applications and procedure overview


1.1 Example #1: “Long haul terrestrial terminal”
Dedicated boards and related cabling Common boards

OSCU1010 ESCT2000
RAIU1000
LOFA11yz_R LOFA11yz_T
Contradirectional with PSUP1000
LOFA11yz_R
BMDX1x00
HSKU1000
ALCT1010 CMDX1010 USIB1000

(X boards) (X boards)
<channel #> <Band #>
TRBD11y1, TRBD4xy2 or TRBC1111

(X boards) <channel #>
2xGBE_FC ETHC1000 OCPU210x PSCU3000

(CMDX or TRBC) (TRBD) (optional) (optional)

LOFA11yz_R : LOFA configured as Pre-Amplifier or Receive Amplifier (signal received from WDM line)
LOFA11yz_T : LOFA configured as Booster or Transmit Amplifier (signal received from BMDX or OMDX)

1.2 Example #2: “Regional terminal”
Dedicated boards and related cabling Common boards

OSCU1010 ESCT2000
RAIU1000
LOFA11yz_R LOFA11yz_T
Contradirectional with PSUP1000
LOFA11yz_R
OMDXw100_y_z
HSKU1000
OMDXw100_y_z USIB1000
(X optional boards)
<Band #>
TRBD11y1, TRBD4xy2 or TRBC1111

(X boards) <channel #>
2xGBE_FC ETHC1000 OCPU210x PSCU3000

(CMDX or TRBC) (TRBD) (optional) (optional)

LOFA11yz_R : LOFA configured as Pre-Amplifier or Receive Amplifier (signal received from WDM line)
LOFA11yz_T : LOFA configured as Booster or Transmit Amplifier (signal received from BMDX or OMDX)

1.3 Steps overview
1) Boards and drawers declaration

Automatic declaration
Manual declaration
2) Connectors and cabling configuration

Connectors state management
Optical cabling declaration
Transmission update
3) Specific configuration

When a board or a drawer is plugged in the equipment, the relevant slot configuration can be done
automatically.

2 Boards and drawers declaration


2.1 Manual declaration for boards
To declare a board :
1. Display the subrack view, where you want to set the board
2. Select the empty slot
3. Choose Equipment Set menu option. The Set Equipment dialog box
is displayed
4. Untick Actual equipment only in the case of pre provisioning
5. In the Allowed Equipment Types area, select the type of the board.
Define the parameters if required. Click OK
6. In the confirmation dialog box click OK : the board representation
appears on the shelf view. A padlock symbol appears over the board
Reminder : “To remove a board….”

1. Make sure first that there is no related loopback, cross-connection, declared
drawer and / or cabling
2. Select the board and the following menu options:
Equipment Set out of Service and then Equipment Remove
Example:

2.2 Transponder boards declaration
Declaring a transponder board, the operator is able to set the « Line

State » parameter at : « ON » or « OFF »
This parameter is mainly related to the WDM (line) laser of the board
Transmission view of a given transponder board (Line side / port 101 only):

Here after the internal structure of a given TRBD board:
Port #1 Port #101
O O O
O O O
G D G
Client C T C Line
P U P
H U H
I 2 I

2.2 Transponder boards declaration [cont.]
“Line State” facility has been introduced to facilitate the management

of the TR-OADM configuration (see the note below).
The way to switch “Line State” configuration and TR-OADM configuration are
described step by step in the “Optical channel management” module of this
documentation
As an overview, the two states can be described as follow:
When “Line State” = ON, the channel is “in service”:

Line laser (WDM side) is ON.
User laser is ON as long as « Consequent Actions » or O-SNCP protection do not
require a shutdown
« Force_LOSS » parameter is forced at « Un-activated »
When “Line State” = OFF, the channel is “out of service”:

Line laser (WDM side) is OFF
User laser is ON or OFF depending on « Consequent Actions » & O-SNCP
configuration and states
« Force_LOSS » parameter is forced at « Activated »
It is suggested to set « Line State » parameter at « ON » when TR-

OADM is not used. Operating this way, the channel will be directly
operational (« in service ») after the transponder declarations on the NEs.
It is suggested to set « Line State » parameter at « OFF » when TR-

OADM is used. Operating this way, the transponder line will be activated
or deactivated at the right moment according to the TR-OADM
configuration type and step.

2 Board and drawer configuration
2.3 Manual declaration for drawers
To declare a drawer :
1. Display the view of the board in which you want to set the drawer
2. Select the empty slot, where you want to set it
3. Choose Equipment Set menu option. The Set Equipment dialog
box is displayed
4. Untick Actual equipment only in the case of pre provisioning
5. In the Allowed Equipment Types area select the type of the
drawer
6. Click OK
7. In the confirmation dialog box click OK


2.4 Automatic declaration for traffic boards and drawers
New shelf or existing shelf New board(s) to no

with available slots be declared ?
yes
no yes
New board(s) inserted ?
Slot(s) pre-configuration Slot(s) automatic configuration
no
Drawer(s) pre-configuration New drawer(s) inserted ?
yes
Connectors configuration Slot(s) automatic configuration
New board(s) and/or

Update transmission
drawer(s) correctly declared

When one of the following boards is inserted in the equipment, the relevant slot configuration is done
automatically:
- ESCT2000
- LOFA11yz
- BMDX1x00
- ALCT1010

3 Connectors and cabling configuration


3 Connectors cabling configuration
3.1 Connectors state management
To set “in service” or “out of service”

a connector :
1. Choose Configuration
Connectors/Cabling… menu option
2. Select the connectors related to the
board and/or drawer in the dialog
box
3. Click Set In Service or Set Out Of
service. The padlock symbol appears
or disappears in a specific column
A given port is able to raise an alarm only if its connector is set

« in service »
The connectors are the physical ports on every traffic board.
It is possible to set in service or out of service all the connectors by a multiple selection.

3.2 Optical cabling declaration
1. To display the current declaration state : choose the Configuration

Connectors/Cabling… menu option

The above example shows the cabling declaration between a LOFA1120 in slot #6 and a BMDX1100 in slot
#3.

3.2 Optical cabling declaration [cont.]
To delete a cable declaration between connectors, operate as follow:
Select one
“cable”
cell in the
table
Click on
Delete Cable
After clicking on button “Delete Cable”, the arrows disappear in the "cable“ cells of the connectors
which were connected.

3.3 Update management
As soon as a declaration or a deletion is made, the TM icon (at the

bottom right of the equipment view) becomes blue.
-> Latest modifications are not yet taken into account:
To take into account any declaration modification, operate as follow:

choose Configuration Transmission Update menu option
or
from Connectors Configuration window, select Trans Update
-> Latest modifications are taken into account

when TM icon is green:

This operation must be performed at the end of declaration of all boards and drawers, and at the end of
all cross-connection operations.

Notes Page


4 Specific configuration


4 Specific configurations
4.1 Modifying the LOFA board configuration
As an example, for LOFA1120_T :

1. Display the board view
2. Choose Board Modify equipment configuration ... menu option.
3. Enter the location of the LOFA1120_R
4. Click OK
5. Launch Configuration Transmission Update menu option

to take into account this modification

By default, the LOFA board is declared as a bidirectional amplifier :

• Stage 1 input and stage 2 output act as a bidirectional OTS port
• Stage 2 input and stage 1 output act as a bidirectional OTS port
An unidirectional amplifier is a LOFA for which the first stage output has been cabled with the second
stage input.
To use 2 LOFA boards as a bidirectional amplifier device, the contradirectionality between the 2 boards
must be set. Contradirectionality is a specific Alcatel-Lucent concept. This concept designates a link
between 2 unidirectional ampifiers to build a bidirectional set.
CAUTION : Before configuring bidirectionality from 2 unidirectional LOFA, the connectors have been set
in service and the cabling has been activated.
For the LOFA 11yz_T, the contradirectional board is the LOFA11yz_R.

4.2 Modifying the transponder board configuration
As an example, for TRBD1191 :

2. Choose Board Modify specific equipment configuration...
menu option.
3. Select the required values and then click OK

TRBDx specific configuration parameters
Parameters Description Possible values
UDC_CONFIG - Configuration of User Data Channel. Not used

- A 2.048 kbit/s link may be plugged into - The configuration plans that no link is
the User data Channel faceplate plugged into the UDC faceplate connection
connection. Add/drop to front panel
- The configuration plans that a link is plugged
into the UDC faceplate connection
RPO_MODE Receiver Parameter Optimization Mode Automatic
- It enables to clearly determines if the - The optimization is based on the FEC
optical signal corresponds to digital value 0
Factory
or 1.
- The optimization is based on a manufacturer
mechanism
SBS_SUPPR Suppression of Stimulated Brillouin Enabled
Scattering.
- A mechanism to compensate for vibrations Disabled
inside the fiber.
Force_LOSS -A mechanism to force a TRBC/TRBD to send Activated
a LOSS indication to the remote Network
Element.
Un-activated
-When Force_LOSS is Activated, the receiver
interface is disabled

4.2 Modifying the transponder board configuration [cont.]

menu option.


Element. Un-activated
TDCM_mode Tunable Dispersion Compensator Module Automatic
Mode - Chromatic dispersion tuning is performed
automatically
Manual
- Chromatic dispersion tuning must be done
manually via Board -> Optical Power level
Configuration menu

4.3 Modifying the 2xGBE_FC board configuration
For a 2xGBE_FC board :

menu option.
Select the type of client (1GBE LAN or FIBRE CHANNEL)
3. Click OK


4.4 Modifying the OSCU board configuration
For an OSCU board :

menu option.
3. Select the required value and then click OK

OSCU Channel Supervision Synchronization Parameter
Parameter Description Possible values
OSC Clock OSCU board supports channel supervision. • Local Clock

Synchroniza When several nodes have OSCU boards, you This value defines the reference OSCU board
tion need to decide which OSCU board will be for synchronization.
the reference and which OSCU board will • Receive Signal Clock
have to synchronize with the reference This value defines the OSCU board which
one. synchronizes with the reference board.
Clock_Synchro shall be automatically set in LOCAL as a default configuration if LINE_TYPE=OTHERS.

Clock_Synchro parameter of a supervision board shall be automatically set in RECIEVE if LINE_TYPE is
REPEATER.
If Line_type is REPEATER, clock_synchro is forced in "receive", D4-D12 and K2 bytes received on one port
are forwarded to the other;
If Line_type is OTHERS, and clock_synchro is set to "local", no byte received on one port can be
forwarded to the other port;
If Line_type is OTHERS, and clock_synchro is set to "receive", if D4-D12 are not dropped to ESCT, these
bytes received on one port are forwarded to the other, but K2 is not forwarded.
In a supervision board holding two ports, LINE_TYPE parameter shall be automatically set to "REPEATER"
when the board is installed in a REPEATER, by operator at board provisioning. Else it is set to "OTHERS".
LINE_TYPE parameter is set to "OTHERS" in a supervision board with only one port.

4.5 Modifying the WMAN1100 Provisioning Parameters
For a WMAN1100 board :

2. Choose Board Modify specific equipment configuration... menu
option.
3. Select the required values for all the parameters displayed in the list
4. Click OK.

WMAN1100 Provisioning Parameters

Background Control Background control process of the output power. When • Enabled
Process enabled, it is one of the parameters which determines • Disabled
if the output power is kept.
Correction Process Attenuation correction process. When enabled, adjusts • Enabled
the attenuation when discrepancies exist between • Disabled
requested and measured attenuation values.
Board Output According to the selected value, determines if the • No optical output
board provides optical output or not • Optical output
WDM Line Stability Determines the acceptable power variations of the +0.1 to +1 dB, 0.1 dB step
optical line Default : 0.5 dB
Control Period Periodicity of background control process execution +30 to +600 sec., 10 sec.
Step, Default : 60 sec.
Input Channel The minimum power value to consider that there is a -26 to 0 dBm, 1 dB step
Threshold channel at the input port Default : -22 dBm
Blocking Threshold The value which determines when a channel is blocked +30 to +40 dBm, 1 dB step
Default : +40 dBm

4.5 Modifying the WMAN1100 Provisioning Parameters [cont.]
WMAN1100 boards in a given shelf are configured in “Contradir” mode :
0 0 0 0
N 1 1 3 1 1 6
A # 0 A N # 1
W Mo ard W Mo ard
b b


4.6 Modifying the WMAN3x74 board configuration
For a WMAN3x74 board :

menu option.
3. Select the required values for all the parameters displayed in the
list
4. Click OK.


4.6 Modifying the WMAN3x74 board configuration [cont.]

WMAN3x74 Provisioning Parameters

Background Control Background control process of the output power. When • Enabled
Process enabled, it is one of the parameters which determines • Disabled
if the output power is kept.
Correction Process Attenuation correction process. When enabled, adjusts • Enabled
the attenuation when discrepancies exist between • Disabled
requested and measured attenuation values.
Board Output According to the selected value, determines if the No optical output
board provides optical output or not
WDM Line Stability Determines the acceptable power variations of the +0.1 to +1 dB, 0.1 dB step
optical line Default : 0.5 dB
Control Period Periodicity of background control process execution +30 to +600 sec., 10 sec.
Step, Default : 60 sec.
Input Channel The minimum power value to consider that there is a -22 to 0 dBm, 1 dB step
Threshold channel at the input port Default : -22 dBm
Blocking Level The maximum power value which determines a -30 to –50 dBm, 1 dB step
channel blocking Default : -30 dBm
Control / Correction The flag which determines : • Power
Type • if the channel power is kept at the output of the • Attenuation
Wavelength Selective Switch Default : Attenuation
• if the channel attenuation is kept in the WSS
Power Maintain Define the maximum channel output power variation +1 to +10 dB, 1 dB step
Threshold to be compensated by the background control process Default : +3 dB

4.7 Modifying the TDMX1180 Port Profile
For a TDMX1180 board :

menu option.
3. For WDM line stability and Blocking level parameters, select the
relevant value
4. Click OK.

TDMX1180 Port Profile Parameters
WDM Line Determines the acceptable power variations 0.1 to 1 dB

Stability of the optical line.
Blocking The maximum power value which -50 to -30 dBm

Level determines a channel blocking

Notes Page


5 Protection provisioning


5.1 OSNCP Protection management process
To activate the protection, operate as follow :

1. Install transponders and OCPU board according to the recommended
locations
2. Declare the OCPU2104 and TRBx boards
3. Perform the physical cabling between the OCPU and the main & spare
transponders
4. Set in service the connectors
5. Declare the cabling configuration
6. Update the Transmission view

- The related protected cross-connection is automatically created at the end of this procedure.
- More details are provided in « Optical channel management » module of this training
documentation.

5.2 OSNCP Protection provisioning rules
Main and Spare 10G transponders must be inserted in adjacent slots
Main in odd slot, Spare in even slot
See following slides for examples
In a shelf, three possible configurations allowed :

6 1+1 protection schemes for TRBD using 3 OCPU2104
4 1+1 protection schemes for TRBC using 8 OCPU2104
2 1+1 protection for TRBC and TRBD using 5 OCPU2104 (mixing)
Main and Spare 40G transponders must be inserted in fixed slots

Max 2 protected 40G TRBD or TRBC per shelf.
See following slides for example


5.3 OSNCP Protection provisioning examples
Single transponder type in Single transponder type in

the master shelf a secondary shelf
2 1+1 protection schemes 4 1+1 protection schemes
for 10G TRBD for 10G TRBD

For OSNCP configuration, the relative positions of TRBD/TRBC and OCPU2104 are fixed:

5.3 OSNCP Protection provisioning examples [cont.]
Single transponder type in Mixed transponder type in a

the secondary shelf secondary shelf
4 1+1 protection schemes 2 1+1 protection schemes for
for 10G TRBC 10G TRBD & TRBC


5.3 OSNCP Protection provisioning examples [cont.]
Single transponder type in

the secondary shelf
4 1+1 protection schemes
for 40G TRBD/TRBC


5.4 OMSP Protection management process
To activate the protection, operate as follow :

1. Install LOFA11yz and OCPU2100 boards anywhere (from slot 3 to 18) in
the shelf where the OSCU1010 board is present. PSCU3000 board must
be placed in slot 39.
2. Declare the OCPU2100 boards
3. Perform the physical cabling between the OCPU and the main & spare
amplifiers
4. Set in service the connectors
5. Declare the cabling configuration
6. Update the Transmission view

- The related protected cross-connection is automatically created at the end of this procedure.
- More details are provided in « Optical channel management » module of this training
documentation.

5.5 OMSP Protection provisioning example
21 22 39 40
Long Haul Line Terminal

MASTER shelf

OMSP Protection for LH Line Terminal (functional architecture):

Exercise
1 – Make a backup of your NE database

2 – Clear the ESCT2000 database
3 – Align the MIB according to the hardware configuration
4 – Set in service the connectors
5 – Declare the internal optical cabling
6 – Update the Transmission view
7 – Configure the specific board parameters
8 – Restore and activate your backup
Time allowed : _____ minutes


Notes Page



for this module


End of Module
Subrack and Board Declaration


Section 2
NE Operation
Module 2
Optical Channel Configuration


Blank Page

NE Operation Optical Channel Configuration
Document History

Module Objectives
Configure optical channels to complete the NE configuration or for

maintenance reasons





Table of Contents
1 OSNCP protection management 7

1.1 Displaying the protected channels 8
1.2 Modifying the protected channels 9
1.3 Sending a protection command 10
2 OMSP protection management 13
2.1 Displaying the protected multiplex sections 14
2.2 Sending a protection command 15
3 TRBD1191 cross-connections management 17
3.1 Add Drop cross-connection_UNI interface 18
3.2 Add Drop cross-connection_NNI interface 19
3.3 Pass-through cross-connection_UNI interface 20
3.4 Pass-through cross-connection_NNI interface 21
4 ETHC1000 cross-connections management 23
4.1 ETHC1000 board structure_Concentrator Auto_Reminder 24
4.2 ETHC1000 board structure_AddDrop Manual_ Reminder 25
4.3 ETHC1000 board: configuration mode 26
4.4 Displaying ETHC1000 L2 cross-connection (Concentrator_Auto mode) 27
4.5 Displaying ETHC1000 L2 cross-connection (AddDrop_Manual mode) 29
4.6 Creating ETHC1000 L2 cross-connection (AddDrop_Manual mode) 30
4.7 Creating ETHC1000 L1 cross-connection 31
4.8 Deleting ETHC1000 L1 or L2 cross-connection 32
5 ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 cross-connection management 35
5.1 Introduction 36
225
5.2 ETHC1000 & TRBD1191 _ L1 cross-connection creation
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 37
6 Line
NE Operation OpticalState management
Channel Configuration 39
6.1 Line State overview_ Reminder 40
6.2 Line State Graphical User Interface 42

6.3 Line State management diagram 44
7 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration overview 47
7.1 Introduction 48
7.2 Degree-1 TR-OADM architecture _ Reminder 49
7.3 Degree-2 TR-OADM architecture _ Reminder 51
7.4 Degree-3 TR-OADM (Y Node) architecture _ Reminder 54
7.5 Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based) architecture _ Reminder 55
8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description 57
8.1 Introduction 58
8.2 “Cross Connection Management” _ Reminder 59
8.3 Getting started on WMAN 3X74 configuration 60
8.4 Getting started on TDMX 1180 configuration 62
8.5 APSD management on transponder – WDM line side 63
8.6 Modifying the transponder board configuration _ Reminder 64
8.7 Getting started on “Current Instantaneous Measurements” 65
8.8 Output power level management on transponder 66
8.9 Getting started on “Spectrum Acquisition” 67
9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management 69
9.1 Manual elementary channel state transitions overview 70
9.2 Transition #1: from “Blocked” to “AddDrop” channel 71
9.3 Transition #2: from “Blocked” to “Express” channel 74
9.4 Transition #3: from “AddDrop” to “Blocked” channel 75
9.5 Transition #4: from “AddDrop” to “Express” channel 76
9.6 Transition #5: from “Express” to “Blocked” channel 77
9.7 Transition #6: from “Express” to “AddDrop” channel 78
10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management 83
10.1 ROADM (WB based) _ Reminder 84
10.2 ROADM (WB based) _ Operation overview 85

10.3 Graphical User Interface description 86

10.4 Single channel configuration 90
10.5 Selected settings management 91
10.6 Global settings management 93
10.7 Case study 94
11 Trail Trace Identifier management 97
11.1 OTS TTI trace management concept 98
11.2 OTS TTI trace configuration 99
11.3 ODU and OTU TTI trace management concept 100
11.4 ODU TTI trace configuration 101
11.5 OTU TTI trace configuration 102
11.6 RS TTI management concept 103
11.7 J0 trace configuration on 2xGBE_FC 104
11.8 J0 trace monitoring on TRBD/TRBC 107
12 OCH configuration 109
12.1 FEC and BER threshold configuration 110
13 Loopbacks management 113
13.1 Local loopback on TRBC and TRBD 114
13.2 Remote loopback on TRBC and TRBD 115
13.3 Loopback on 2xGBE_FC and ETHC1000 boards 116
13.4 Creating a local loopback 117
13.5 Creating a remote loopback 118
13.6 Displaying the existing loopbacks 119
226
13.7 Deleting a loopback All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 120

1 OSNCP protection management


1.1 Displaying the protected channels
1. Choose the Configuration Cross Connection Management menu

option Click on Search Existing protected channels
appear

OSNCP: Optical SubNetwork Connection Protection
The meaning of each column is:

Prot. State column gives the protection state. The possible values are:
Normal I: Main path active, no alarm,
Normal P: Protecting path active, no alarm,
Auto I : Main path active, alarm on Protecting path,
Auto P: Protecting path active, alarm on Main path that caused the switch,
Lockout I: the traffic is locked on the Main path, the protection is disabled,
Forced P: the traffic is forced on the Protecting path, no alarm,
State column gives the cross connection state:

A: activated,
empty: not activated.
Dir. column gives the Direction-related connection type:

uni: unidirectional,
bi: bidirectional
Input column gives the signal source (Main Transponder).

Protecting Input column gives the protecting source (Spare Transponder).
Output column gives the port destination (OCPU2104).

1.2 Modifying the protected channels
1. Choose the Configuration

Cross Connection
Management menu
2. Select a protected cross-
connection
3. Click on Modify
Tick or untick before “Revertive” to

get a revetive or non revertve
protection

Protection characteristic:
A revertive protection refers to a mechanism where the transport and selection of the normal
traffic signal (service) always returns to (or remains on) the working transport entity if the switch
requests are terminated; i.e., when the working transport entity has recovered from the defect or
the external request is cleared.
A non revertive protection refers to a mechanism, where the transport and selection of the
normal traffic signal does not return to the working transport entity if the switch requests are
terminated.
Wait to Restore Time (WTR, 0 to 60000s): A period of time that must elapse before a transport entity
that has recovered from a Signal Fail (SF) or Signal Degrade (SD) condition can be used again to
transport the normal traffic signal and/or to select the normal traffic signal from.
Hold Off Time (HOT, 0 to 10000ms): A delay that prevents an autonomous switch of a protected
channel to the protecting path for the configured time following identification that an autonomous
protection switch is required.

1.3 Sending a protection command

option
2. Select the connection to send the command to and click on Protect...
Choose a Protection
command by clicking on
the appropriate toggle
button
Remark: toggle button greyed
when command impossible
Click OK to send
command to NE

The following commands are available:

Force Switch
Release Force Switch
Lock Out
Release Lock Out
When one of two transponder boards (TRBD or TRBC) in protection configuration is in "Lock-out I"
state: the automatic switching mechanism is inhibited.
When two transponder boards (TRBD or TRBC) are declared in "protection configuration", if pluggable
module of working transponder is withdrawn, protection works but the protection status indicated is
Normal P instead of Auto P.
Before sending another command on a given channel, the current command must be “released”.
Check the protect path alarms before doing a “Force switch” command.

Exercise
Create an OSNCP configuration

Search for the related cross-connection
Observe the current status with and without OTS line failure
Set a revertive protection (WTR=60s)
Observe again the current status with and without OTS line failure
Practice the “Protection Actions”
Time allowed:
_____ minutes


Notes Page


2 OMSP protection management


2.1 Displaying the protected multiplex sections
1. Choose the Configuration Cross Connection Management…
menu option Click on Search Existing protected multiplex
sections appear

OMSP: Optical Multiplex Section Protection
The meaning of each column is:

Prot. State column gives the protection state. The possible values are:
Normal I: Main path active, no alarm,
Normal P: Protecting path active, no alarm,
Auto I : Main path active, alarm on Protecting path,
Auto P: Protecting path active, alarm on Main path that caused the switch,
Lockout I: the traffic is locked on the Main path, the protection is disabled,
Forced P: the traffic is forced on the Protecting path, no alarm,
State column gives the cross connection state:

A: activated,
empty: not activated.
Dir. column gives the Direction-related connection type:

uni: unidirectional,
bi: bidirectional
Input column gives the signal source (Main LOFA11yz_R).

Protecting Input column gives the protecting source (Spare LOFA11yz_R).
Output column gives the port destination (BMDX1x00).

2.2 Sending a protection command
1. Choose the Configuration Cross Connection Management… menu

option
2. Select the connection to send the command and click on Protect...
Choose a Protection
command by clicking on
the appropriate toggle
button
Remark: toggle button greyed
when command impossible
Click OK to send
command to NE

The following commands are available:

Force Switch
Release Force Switch
Lock Out
Release Lock Out
When one of two LOFA11yz boards in protection configuration is in "Lock-out I" state: the automatic
switching mechanism is inhibited.
Before sending another command on a given multiplex section, the current command must be
“released”.
Check the protecting multiplex section alarms before doing a “Force switch” command.
OMSP protection is non revertive in current release.

Exercise
Create an OMSP configuration

Search for the related cross-connection
Observe the current status with and without OTS line failure
Practice the “Protection Actions”
Time allowed:
_____ minutes


3 TRBD1191 cross-connections management


3.1 Add Drop cross-connection_UNI interface
TRBD1191
In case of “front side user access”: Internal structure
User side Line side
To create the cross-connection select
Configuration Cross Connection
Management… XFP Line module
(Cross Connection Management window appears)
Click Create Back
plane
Choose as: access
Input: relevant port#1-#1-OCHgdc
and as
Output: relevant port#101#1-ODU2gdc
Confirm with OK
The cross-connection will be
shown in the list and in the related
transmission view
To delete the cross-connection:
Select it in the list
Click Delete
Confirm with OK
After the creation step, the cross-connection is shown in the “Cross Connection Management” window:

3.2 Add Drop cross-connection_NNI interface
TRBD1191
In case of “front side user access”: Internal structure
User side Line side
Management… XFP Line module
Click Create Back
plane
Choose as: access
Input: relevant port#1-OTUodu2
and as
Output: relevant port#101-OTUodu2
Confirm with OK
transmission view
To delete the cross-connection:
Select it in the list
Click Delete
Confirm with OK
NNI interface : Network to Network Interface

3.3 Pass-through cross-connection_UNI interface
TRBD1191
In case of “back plane access”: Internal structure
User side Line side
Management… Line module
Click Create Back
plane
Choose as: access
Input: relevant port#101#1-ODU2gdc Back
and as plane
access
Output: relevant port#101#1-ODU2gdc
Confirm with OK
Line module
transmission view
To delete the cross-connection: No XFP module
Select it in the list 2 adjacent TRBD1191
Click Delete [3;4], [5;6], [7;8], …, [17;18]
Confirm with OK
UNI interface : User to Network Interface

3.4 Pass-through cross-connection_NNI interface
TRBD1191
In case of “back plane access”: Internal structure
User side Line side
Management… Line module
Click Create Back
plane
Choose as: access
Input: relevant port#101-OTUodu2 Back
and as plane
access
Output: relevant port#101-OTUodu2
Confirm with OK
Line module
transmission view
To delete the cross-connection: No XFP module
Select it in the list 2 adjacent TRBD1191
Click Delete [3;4], [5;6], [7;8], …, [17;18]
Confirm with OK
After the creation step, the cross-connection is shown in the “Cross Connection Management” window:

Exercise
Create a cross-connection for a given TRBD1191 in order to make

available the “front side user access”.
Create a cross-connection for 2 adjacent TRBD1191 in order to make
signal regeneration
Time allowed:
_____ minutes


4 ETHC1000 cross-connections management


4.1 ETHC1000 board structure_Concentrator Auto_Reminder
ETHC1000 board
The board includes two matrix
areas:
User side *
L2 matrix #1 GE #9 GE
When the board is configured in
Concentrator_Auto mode, the VLAN tagging
related cross-connections are #51 #59
automatically created
Ethernet layer 2
L1 matrix
The operator can configure the 10GE WAN 10GE WAN
Line P#13 Line P#14
“L1 matrix” in order to: Matrix Back
plane
- use the Front side access with access
optical cabling related to a 10GE WAN 10GE WAN
relevant transponder. XFP P#13 XFP P#14
- use the “Back plane” access to Line #1 Line #2
connect ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 Front side Front side
without related optical cabling.
CAUTION : Only the 10GbE Line port#13 is available in Concentrator_Auto mode.

CAUTION : VLAN_ID=51 to 59 are used in Concentrator_Auto mode.
CAUTION : Up to 9xGbE ports can be used in Concentrator_Auto mode.

4.2 ETHC1000 board structure_AddDrop Manual_ Reminder
ETHC1000 board
The board includes two matrix
areas:
User side *
L2 matrix #1 GE #12 GE
When the board is configured in
AddDrop_Manual mode, the VLAN tagging
related cross-connections are #xx #yy
manually created
Ethernet layer 2
L1 matrix
The operator can configure the 10GE WAN 10GE WAN
Line P#13 Line P#14
“L1 matrix” in order to: Matrix Back
plane
- use the Front side access with access
optical cabling related to a 10GE WAN 10GE WAN
relevant transponder. XFP P#13 XFP P#14
- use the “Back plane” access to Line #1 Line #2
connect ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 Front side Front side
without related optical cabling.
CAUTION : Both 10GbE Line port#13 and port#14 are available in AddDrop_Manual mode.
CAUTION : VLAN_ID=100 to 999 can be used in AddDrop_Manual mode.
CAUTION : Up to 12xGbE ports can be used in AddDrop_Manual mode.

4.3 ETHC1000 board: configuration mode
To display or modify the current configuration mode:

2. Choose Board Modify specific equipment configuration... menu
option.
3. Modify the Value of CONF_MODE if needed and click OK
Two modes are available (Concentrator_Auto and AddDrop_Manual)

Concentrator_auto : in this mode the related L2 cross-connections are automatically created (up to nine
user ports maximum) when the GbE modules are set in service.
AddDrop_Manual : in this mode the related L2 cross-connections are manually created (up to twelve user
ports maximum) when the GbE modules are set in service.

4.4 Displaying ETHC1000 L2 cross-connection (Concentrator_Auto mode)
To display the existing

cross-connections related to
a given ETHC1000 board in
Concentrator_Auto mode,
operate as follow:
1. Open the board view

2. Choose Board Manage
ETHC Cross Connections
menu option
The cross-connections are
only created for the
declared XFP modules on
the user side
A Refresh button is
available at the bottom of
the window


4.4 Displaying ETHC1000 L2 cross-connection (Concentrator_Auto mode) [cont.]
The ETHC1000 L2 drop/insert cross-connections are shown as follow in the

Transmission view:

The ETHC1000 L2 drop/insert cross-connection is shown as follow in the “Cross Connection Management”
window:
In Concentrator_Auto mode, only L2 drop/insert cross connections (between User & L13) are available.

4.5 Displaying ETHC1000 L2 cross-connection (AddDrop_Manual mode)
To display the existing

cross-connections related
to a given ETHC1000 board
in AddDrop_Manual mode,
operate as follow:
1) Open the board view

2) Choose Board
Manage ETHC Cross
Connections menu option
A Refresh button is
available at the bottom
of the window


4.6 Creating ETHC1000 L2 cross-connection (AddDrop_Manual mode)
From the VLAN Cross

Connections Management
window of a given ETHC1000
board in AddDrop_Manual
mode, operate as follow:
1) Set the same VLAN_ID

for 2 ports (either User &
L13 or User & L14 or L13
& L14)
2) Draw a line between
both ports
3) Confirm the cross
connection creation by
clicking OK
VLAN_ID=100 to 999 in
AddDrop manual mode
In AddDrop_Manual mode, L2 drop/insert cross connections (between User & L13 or User & L14 Ports)
and L2 pass-through cross connections (between L13 & L14 Ports) are available.
The ETHC1000 L2 pass-through cross-connection is shown as follow in the “Cross Connection

Management” window:

4.7 Creating ETHC1000 L1 cross-connection

In case of “front side line access”:
To create the L1 cross-connection

choose Configuration Cross
Connection Management menu
option, then click Create button
1. Choose as:
Input: relevant port#x-RsTTP
(x=13 or 14)
and as
Output: relevant port#x-OCHrs
(x=13 or 14)
2. Confirm with OK
The cross-connection will be shown
in the list and in the related port
view
Only port#13-RsTTP and port#13-OCHrs

are available in Concentrator_Auto mode

It is also possible to start the creation as follow:
1. From the ETHC1000 board view, open the Mother board port
2. Select the port#13-RsTTP block
3. Choose Port (Transmission) -> Cross Connection -> Create Cross Connection menu option or click
right and choose Cross Connection -> create Cross Connection menu:
The Main Cross Connection dialog box appears. The Input field is already filled with the name of the
port#13-RsTTP selected at the previous step (e.g. r01sr1sl03/port#13-RsTTP)
4. Continue as described above
The ETHC1000 L1 cross-connection is shown as follow in the Transmission view:

4.8 Deleting ETHC1000 L1 or L2 cross-connection

option either in the port view or in the transmission view:
The Cross Connection Management dialog box appears
2. Click Search
The existing cross connections appear in the list
3. Select in the list the cross connections to remove. You can select one
or more cross connections
4. Click Delete
5. In the confirmation dialog box click OK
6. Back to the Cross Connection Management dialog box, click Close to
terminate


Exercise
Observe the relation between the existing modules and the related
Layer 2 cross-connections for a given ETHC 1000 board.
Even if there is no board in the shelf, the declarations can be done.
Create the Layer 1 cross-connection for a given ETHC 1000 board in

order to make the “front side line access” available.
Time allowed:
_____ minutes


Notes Page


5 ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 cross-connection
management


5 ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 cross-connection management
5.1 Introduction
ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 can be interconnected via the back plane
ETHC1000 board
User side *
•The boards must be inserted in
#1 GE #9 GE the shelf according to the rule
described below
VLAN tagging
#51 #59
Ethernet layer 2
Switch & concentration TRBD1191
Internal structure
10GE WAN 10GE WAN
Line P#13 Line P#14 User side Line side
Matrix Back
plane
access XFP Line module
10GE WAN 10GE WAN
XFP P#13 XFP P#14
Line #1 Line #2 Back
plane
Front side Front side access

Interconnecting ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 via the back plane saves some cabling on the boards front
side.
- To be able to do this, the boards must be inserted in a shelf according to the following rule:
> The 16 available slots for both boards are divided in 4 groups
> Interconnected ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 boards must be adjacent
> In this case, both cards can be inserted in one of the 8 following possibilities:
Group # #1 #2 #3 #4
Slot # 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
ETHC1000 X X X X X X X X
TRBD1191 X X X X X X X X

5 ETHC1000 and TRBD1191 cross-connection management
5.2 ETHC1000 & TRBD1191 _ L1 cross-connection creation

In case of “interconnection via the back plane”:
To create the L1 cross-connection

choose Configuration Cross
Connection Management menu
option, then click Create button
1. Choose as:
Input: ETHC1000 port#x-RsTTP
(x=13 or 14)
and as
Output: TRBD1191 port#101-#1-
ODU2gdc
2. Confirm with OK
The cross-connection will be shown
in the list and in the related
transmission view
Only ETHC1000 port#13-RsTTP is

available in Concentrator_Auto mode

Cross-connection:

Exercise
Create the Layer 1 cross-connection for given ETHC 1000 and TRBD1191
boards in order to make the “interconnection via the back plane”.
Time allowed:
____ minutes


6 Line State management

At the transponder declaration:

6.1 Line State overview_ Reminder
“Line State” facility has been introduced to facilitate the management

of the TR-OADM configuration (see the note below).
The way to switch “Line State” configuration and TR-OADM configuration are
described in the next part of this module.
As an overview, the “Line State” can be described as follow:
When “Line State” = ON, the channel is “in service”:

Line laser (WDM side) is ON
User laser is ON as long as « Consequent Actions » or O-SNCP protection do not
require a shutdown
« Force_LOSS » parameter is forced at « Un-activated »
When “Line State” = OFF, the channel is “out of service”:

Line laser (WDM side) is OFF
User laser is ON or OFF depending on « Consequent Actions » & O-SNCP
configuration and states
« Force_LOSS » parameter is forced at « Activated »

At the transponder declaration:
It is suggested to set « Line State » parameter at « ON » when TR-

OADM is not used. Operating this way, the channel will be directly
operational (« in service ») after the transponder declarations on the NEs.
It is suggested to set « Line State » parameter at « OFF » when TR-

OADM is used. Operating this way, the transponder line will be activated
or deactivated at the right moment according to the TR-OADM
configuration type and step.

6.1 Line State overview _ Reminder [cont.]
Declaring a transponder board, the operator is able to set the « Line

State » parameter at : « ON » or « OFF »
This parameter is mainly related to the WDM (line) laser of the board
Transmission view of a given transponder board (Line side / port 101 only):

Here after the internal structure of a given TRBD board:
Port #1 Port #101
O O O
O O O
G D G
Client C T C Line
P U P
H U H
I 2 I

6.2 Line State Graphical User Interface
Force_LOSS parameter management:

menu option
3. Set Force_LOSS parameter to the required value: Activated or
Un-activated
4. Click OK to confirm


Factory
or 1.
mechanism
SBS_SUPPR - Suppression of Stimulated Brillouin Enabled
Scattering.
inside the fiber.
Element.
Un-activated

6.2 Line State Graphical User Interface [cont.]
To manage the “APSD Configuration” for a given board on WDM side :

1. Open the Transmission view of the TRBx board
2. Select the OGPI block on WDM line side
3. Select Transmission APSD configuration…
4. Set the APSD control parameter at the required value: Disable or
Laser Forced Off
5. Click OK to confirm

The APSD state below, is obtained when the Transponder has been declared with Line State = OFF:

6.3 Line State management diagram
Line State: APSD Disabled APSD to «Laser Laser forced
ON Laser is On Forced Off»
Off
TX TX
«in service» A B
User side
User side
Line side
Line side
APSD to
RX «Disable» RX
Force LOSS Force LOSS
un-activated un-activated
Force_LOSS to Force_LOSS to
e te o
ot v a S t
«Activated» Force_LOSS to «Activated»
2 ) d »
Force_LOSS to «Un-activated»
( N a c ti OS
«Un-activated»
L
(Note 3)
n- e_
« U or c
APSD Disabled Laser current
Laser is On F state = Off
TX TX
D C
User side
User side
Line side
Line side
(Note 1)
APSD to «Laser
Forced Off» Line State:
RX RX Off
Force LOSS Force LOSS
activated activated «out of service»
The above OGPI #101 block is the extremity of a given transponder on WDM side (refer to the previous
page to see its environment).
Note 1: when the transponder has been declared with “Line State = OFF”, the APSD configuration is :
“ APSD control = Disable” and “LASER current state = Laser Off”
- After modifications, the following state is equivalent: “ APSD control = Laser Forced Off” and “LASER
current state = Laser Off”
Note 2: the transition from C (Off) to A (On) can be directly made only in one of the following cases:
-> the transponder has been previously declared with “Line State = Off”. In such a case C state is “ APSD
control = Disable” and “LASER current state = Laser Off” (as described above in note 1)
OR
-> the last transition from A (On) to C (Off) has been made through B or D in both cases C state is got with
“ APSD control = Laser Forced Off”. In such a case, the operator must set first “ APSD control =
Disable”. Then the direct transition from C (Off) to A (On) becomes possible.
Note 3: the transition from C (Off) to A (On) can be made through B only in one of the following cases:
-> the transponder has been previously declared with “Line State = Off”. In such a case C state is “ APSD
control = Disable” and “LASER current state = Laser Off” (as described above in note 1). In such a
case, the operator must set first “ APSD control = Laser Forced Off”. Then the transition from C (Off)
to A (On) through B becomes possible.
OR
-> the last transition from A (On) to C (Off) has been made through B or D in both cases C state is got with
“ APSD control = Laser Forced Off”. In such a case the transition from C (Off) to A (On) through B is
possible.
6.3 Line State management diagram [cont.]
Permanent states description:

Line States A (ON) and C (Off) can be required for a given TR-OADM
configuration:
Line State = ON is used when the Transponder is used for « AddDrop »
Line State = Off is used when the transponder is not used for « AddDrop ». In
this case the transponder does not generate any power toward WMAN board
to avoid any disturbance of an “Express” configuration
Temporary states description:

Line States B and D are temporary states which are used during
transitions from A (ON) to C (Off) or from C (Off) to A (ON)
Direct transition from A (ON) to C (Off) is not possible
Transition from C (Off) to A (ON) can be directly made, or made through B,
depending on the way the TX laser has been set to “Off” on C state (see
previous page through B)


Exercise
According to the trainer instructions, explore the ways to make the

transitions from A (ON) to C (Off) and from C (Off) to A (ON).
Time allowed:
_____ minutes


7 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration overview


7.1 Introduction
The TR-OADM is a fully flexible and reconfigurable OADM node based on
Wavelength Selective Switch (WSS) optical devices:
full tunable transponders and filters (colorless ports)
capability to reconfigure both the pass-through traffic and the
added/dropped traffic without on-site intervention
the first building block of new optical networks supporting Optical
Restoration capability
WSS managing the traffic to be passed through or added to the node
Fixed Mux/Demux for the drop and add parts to reduce the cost of the
overall solution.
This architecture provides part of the functionalities of the T&R-OADM, such
as the use of WSS cards and multi-degree management, but does not provide
full flexibility in terms of remote configuration of the node.
Each channel may be in any of the following states for the TR-OADM
Node :
AddDrop
Express
Blocked

7.2 Degree-1 TR-OADM architecture _ Reminder
OCNC1220 LOFA11y0_Unidir
TR-OADM 2 VOA 1
Rx side OSC

1:2 1:8
1
LOFA1110
LOFA1110
VOA
VOA
TDMX1180
x8
2
(up to 8) (up to 8)
TDMX1180 TDMX1180

(up to 8) (up to 8)
TR-OADM: Degree-1 to Degree-4 with directional add/drop

The TR-OADM is a fully flexible and reconfigurable OADM node based on Wavelength Selective Switch
(WSS) optical devices. The TR-OADM node provides the capability to reconfigure both the pass-
through traffic and the added/dropped traffic without on-site intervention and it is the first building
block of new optical networks supporting Optical Restoration capability
The WSS, the main building block of the TR-OADM nodes, is an N port device with the following
functionalities:
WDM channels Multiplexing and De-multiplexing
The architecture of the Degree-1 TR-OADM is easily derived from that of higher degree nodes and is
reported in the following slide:
On the receive side the aggregate signal is first amplified by the pre-amplifier, then several drop
paths are created through the use of a cascade of splitter cards (OADC1102, OADC1100 and
OADC1300). The demultiplexing at channel level is performed by the tuneable demultiplexers
(TDMX cards) by groups of 8 channels.
Up to 16 channels can be demultiplexed without adding any additional optical amplifier.
On the transmit side the channels are multiplexed by means of a cascade of couplers (OADC1750
and OADC1300) and then connected to the WMAN3, which implements the power equalization.
The saturation channel is added to the aggregate signal by means of a dedicated coupler
(OADC0104).
Up to 16 channels can be multiplexed without adding any additional optical amplifier.

7.2 Degree-1 TR-OADM architecture _ Reminder [cont.]
LOFA11y0_Unidir
ALCT
Express
TR-OADM
2 VOA 1 WMAN3174
Up to 32λ Tx side
ADD
OADC0104 Up to 32λ
OSC
2
LOFA1110
LOFA1110
OADC1750
4:1 4:1 4:1 4:1
VOA
VOA
1
1
(up to 8) (up to 8)
OADC1300 OADC1300
8:1 8:1
OADC1750 OADC1750
4:1 4:1 4:1 4:1


7 R/TR-OADM (WSS) configuration overview
7.3 Degree-2 TR-OADM architecture _ Reminder
OADC0104
OSC OSC
ALCT
D M TR-OADM

(up to 72) (up to 72)
OTS 1 OTS 2
M D
ALCT
OADC0104
Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s OCNC1230 OSC
D : Demultiplexing part
TR-OADM: Degree-2 node architecture explanation

All the traffic coming from direction 1 and direction 2 is first amplified by an optical preamplifier,
then it is sent both to the WMAN3 card and the Tunable Demultiplexer by means of the OADC splitter
card. Both the WMAN3 and the Tunable Demultiplexer are cards based on WSS devices.
WMAN3 provides the following functions:
WDM channels Multiplexing
The Tunable Demultiplexer implements the WDM channels De-multiplexing function.
This node architecture makes it possible to switch wavelengths connected to the WMAN3 card
between the ports of the WMAN3 itself and to dynamically select the WDM channel to be received by
any transponder locally installed, removing the need for sites interventions unless new add/drop
transponders are required

OCNC1230
1:2 OADC1100
TR-OADM
D
OADC1300
De-multiplexing
part
TDMX1180 1:8
To/from TRBD/TRBC
1
1
(up to 8)
LOFA1110
LOFA1110
VOA
VOA
x8
2
2
TDMX1180 TDMX1180

(up to 8) (up to 8)
OCNC : Optical Connectivity Coupler

- OCNC1230 is recommended for TR-OADM Degree 2 application for the following reason:
- Having one “not used” output in case of TR-OADM Degree 2 application, it provides the opportunity
to upgrade at Degree 3 application latter in the network life.
- OCNC1240 is mandatory fore TR-OADM Degree 4 application. Nevertheless, it can be used also for
Degree 2 and 3 applications. In particular when at Degree 3 application installation, it is already know
that a Degree 4 application upgrade will be made in the future.
OADC1102 : if already in place for R-OADM, before TR-OADM Degree 2. it can be kept instead of
OCNC1230.
Internal attenuators in WMAN3174 board are adjusted to take into account the following board choice:
OCNC1230, OCNC1240 or OADC1102.
TR-OADM is a configuration that brings the capability to add and drop one or more wavelengths to/from
the aggregate signal for both directions.
Up to 72 channels may be added/dropped for a total of 96 channels at 10Gb/s or 80 channels at 40Gb/s.
Each channel of the Degree-2 TR-OADM configuration may be in any of the 5 following states :
AddDrop_1 and AddDrop_2 : the channel is added and dropped for both directions.

WMAN3174 TR-OADM
OADC1750 Up to 4λ
M
4:1 4:1
Multiplexing
LOFA1110
LOFA1110
part
2
VOA
VOA
To/from TRBD/TRBC
(up to 8)
1
OADC1300 OADC1300
8:1 8:1
OADC1750 OADC1750
4:1 4:1 4:1 4:1


7.4 Degree-3 TR-OADM (Y Node) architecture _ Reminder
OCNC Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s OADC LOFA11y0
LOFA11y0
1230 0104
OSC OSC
ALCT
D M
OTS 1 OTS 3
(up to 72) (up to 72)
ALCT
M D
2 VOA 1 2 VOA 1
WMAN3174
OADC OSC
OSC OCNC
LOFA11y0 0104 Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s LOFA11y0
1230
WMAN3174
M
To/from TRBD/TRBC
OCNC
1230
OADC
ALCT
0104
(up to 72)
TR-OADM
1
2
LOFA11y0
LOFA11y0
VOA 2
VOA
OSC
OSC
1
OTS 2

The Y Node is connected to 3 lines in 3 different directions. A Y Node configuration may be used as a
connection point in a meshed network. Up to 72 channels may be added/dropped for a total of 80
channels.
Each channel of the TR-OADM Degree 3 (Y Node) configuration may be in one or more of the following
states :
AddDrop_1 and AddDrop_2 and AddDrop_3 : the channel is added and dropped for OTS 1, OTS 2 and
OTS 3 directions.
7.5 Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based) architecture _ Reminder
OADC0104
Express
OSC ADD OSC

ALCT
LOFA1110
CMDX 1
2 VOA 1
R-OADM
To/from TRBD /
TRBC (up to 8)
BMDX1000
CMDX 1
BMDX1000
To/from TRBD /
CMDX 12
TRBC (up to 8)
1 VOA 2
LOFA1110
To/from TRBD /
TRBC (up to 8)
To/from TRBD /
CMDX 12
TRBC (up to 8)
OTS 1 OTS 2
ALCT
ADD

Express


terms of remote configuration of the node. In particular, any change in the association between the
transponders and the WDM channels requires on-site interventions.
The node architecture is similar to the one of the TR-OADM: the optical amplifiers, the splitter card
providing multi-directionality (OCNC) and the WMAN3 are in the same logical position. The changes
are in the add and drop parts: both are based on fixed Mux/Demux BMDX1000 + CMDX. The fixed
Mux/Demux provide an overall insertion loss for the add and drop parts lower than that of the T&R-
OADM node, fully based on non-filtering splitters and couplers; this allows to dedicate just one port
of the WMAN3 to the whole added traffic and to strongly reduce the number of optical amplifier
necessary within the node.

Notes Page


8 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) GUI description


8.1 Introduction
The Graphical User Interface of the R/TR-OADM is mainly based on the
eight following windows, available from the « Equipment view »:
“Cross Connection Management” for creation and display purpose
“Channel Configuration” for WMAN “Add, Express or Blocked”configurations
“TDMX configuration of port” for “Drop” configuration (only for TR-OADM)
“APSD Configuration” to manage the WDM line side of the transponders
“Specific parameter configuration” to manage “Force_LOSS” parameter of
the transponders
“Current Instantaneous Measurements” may be useful to manage the WDM
line side of the transponders and check WMAN board inputs
“ALC & Output power level configuration” for the transponders
“Spectrum Acquisition” around WMAN board is strongly suggested
The global configuration of R/TR-OADM application is based on

“Transitions” between two “wavelength routing” states.
Each “Transition type” is spread in “Elementary transitions” and related
actions to be performed from the windows mentioned above.
The next following pages describe first and briefly these windows and then in details
the way to perform each transition type.


8.2 “Cross Connection Management” _ Reminder
To open “Cross Connection Management”, choose the Configuration

Cross Connection Management menu option
Set « Search Criteria » (optional) and the click on Search to display (see
below)
Click on Create to open « Main Cross Connection »

- In the « Cross Connection Management » window above, an « Express ch. 34» cross-connection,
between two OTS lines, is highlighted.
- The “Main Cross Connection” window shown below is used for creation purpose.

8.3 Getting started on WMAN 3X74 configuration
To open “Channel Configuration” open the related WMAN board view

Choose Board Configure WMAN 3x74… menu option
Set the configuration and click on Apply.

WMAN3x74 Channel Configuration Parameters

Stored Attenuation Profiles Consist in 3 registers which store the current
attenuation value assigned to a given Express
input port. For a given wavelength :
• The first register (left) stores the attenuation
value assigned to Express input port number 1.
• The second register (middle) stores the
attenuation value assigned to Express input
port number 2.
• The third register (right) stores the
attenuation value assigned to Express input
port number 3.
During operations, for a given wavelength and
a given Express input port, a memorized
attenuation can be restored if required
Power Maintain This parameter makes part of a process which • Enabled
guarantees the channel output power if : • Disabled
• Power Maintain is Enabled, AND
• Background Control Process is Enabled, AND
• Correction Process is Enabled, AND
• Control / Correction Type is set to Power

8.3 Getting started on WMAN 3X74 configuration [cont.]
From “Channel Configuration”

of WMAN board, the operator can
“Export” and “Import” a given
configuration choosing the
following menu options:
Export Save as CSV
Save as XML
Import Load XML File
Load CSV File
In that case, the operator can

choose the .csv or .xml file
location on the PC.

It could be useful to duplicate a given configuration, as a first step, on several NEs even if they may have
to be customized in a second step.
This .csv file can be open and modified « off line » using « Excel » (see the example below).
The .xls file below comes from an exported .csv file. It has been customized adding the tiles at the top of
each column.

8.4 Getting started on TDMX 1180 configuration
To open “TDMX configuration of port” window (only for TR-OADM):

Display the relevant TDMX1180 board view
Choose Board Configure TDMX1x80 … menu option

CAUTION : All used connectors must be In Service and the Transmission view must be updated.
The Channel parameter indicates the signal transmission status to output. The possible values are
Blocked (the signal is not transmitted to the output of the TDMX1180 board) or One of the 96 possible
channels.
The Output Power parameter indicates the output power to be assigned to the selected port. The
possible values are from –30 to –50dBm (1dB step).
Each time a new TDMX port is configured, this port is shown in the board view and the operator can
open the related transmission view and get back the configured frequency choosing :
Transmission Display Channel Frequency menu option.

8.5 APSD management on transponder – WDM line side
To manage the “APSD Configuration” for a given board on WDM side :

Open the Transmission view of the TRBx board
Select the “port#101-OGPI” block on WDM line side
Select Transmission APSD configuration…

The above APSD state is obtained when the when the Transponder has been declared with Line State =
OFF
After the first state modification, the two following states are available:

8.6 Modifying the transponder board configuration _ Reminder

menu option.
Performing some transitions, Force_LOSS must be modified

accordingly.


Factory
or 1.
mechanism
SBS_SUPPR - Suppression of Stimulated Brillouin Enabled
Scattering.
inside the fiber.
Element.
Un-activated

8.7 Getting started on “Current Instantaneous Measurements”
To display current measurement from a board (such as WMAN3174) :

1. Open the board view
2. Choose Board Current instantaneous measurements menu option


8.8 Output power level management on transponder
To modify the Output power level of a given a transponder:

From Equipment view, access to the Board view
Select the menu Board Optical power level configuration
The ALC & Output power level configuration dialog box is displayed.
Set the pre-emphasis by using the up and down arrows.
Click on Apply.
Wait a few seconds for the effective setting of the board. During this
process the command buttons of the dialog box are disabled.
Click on Close to finish.

Current Instantaneous Measurements for TRBD1191:

8.9 Getting started on “Spectrum Acquisition”
From the equipment view operate as follow:

1. Select a WMAN3174 board and open the board view
2. Select the menu Board Spectrum Acquisition …
- The Spectrum Acquisition window is displayed:
•Place the mouse on a

given wavelength then
the related information is
displayed

Refresh button is available at the bottom of the window.

The above example is related to a WMAN3174 board included in a “ Multi Degree 2 ” application.
- In this particular case, only Input #1 is used.
Output
LOFA11y0_Unidir Input #1 LOFA11y0_Unidir
OCNC1230 OADC0104
WMA
1 VOA 2 N 1 VOA 2
3174
OSC
D M
OSC T
ALC
For more details using Spectrum Acquisition facility, refer to the relevant part of this documentation in
“Optical power tuning”.

Notes Page


9 R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration management


9.1 Manual elementary channel state transitions overview
From \ To Blocked channel AddDrop channel Express channel
T1 • Create AddDrop T2 • Create Express cross-
cross-connection connection
Blocked
channel
T3 • Delete AddDrop T4 • Delete AddDrop cross-

cross-connection connection
• Create Express cross-
AddDrop connection
channel
T5 • Delete Express T6 • Delete express

cross-connection cross-connection
• Create AddDrop
Express cross-connection
channel

CAUTION: Respect the configuration order.
Each transition type is described with more details in the following pages.

9.2 Transition #1: from “Blocked” to “AddDrop” channel
Create an AddDrop cross-connection
1. Choose Configuration Cross Connection Management menu option,
then click Create button
2. Choose “Input” and “Output” as described below and confirm with OK.
Input: relevant port#1, channel frequency, OMSoch TP present in the
splitter board (OADC1102 or OCNC12x0) of the relevant OTS
Output:
For TR-OADM, relevant port#1 to 8, same channel frequency, OGPIoch TP
present in the TDMX1180 board of the same OTS
For ROADM, relevant port#101 to 108, same channel frequency, OGPIoch
TP present in the CMDX board of the same OTS


9.2 Transition #1: from “Blocked” to “AddDrop” channel [cont.]
To verify the channel is dropped only for TR-OADM (optional)

1. Display the relevant TDMX1180 board view
2. Choose Board Configure TDMX1x80 … menu option
3. Verify if the channel frequency to drop is assigned to the relevant port number
4. Click on Cancel to close the window.


9.2 Transition #1: from “Blocked” to “AddDrop” channel [cont.]
To verify the channel is added (optional)

2. Select the port#101-OGPI block on WDM line side
3. Select Transmission APSD configuration …
4. Verify if APSD is set to Disable and the laser is ON.
5. Verify “Force_LOSS” parameter is set to “Un-activated”.

6. Display the WMAN3x74 board view
7. Choose Board Configure WMAN3x74 … menu option
8. Check the ADDj (j=1 to 4) or INi (i=1 to 3) position for the channel.

Manual reconfiguration to tune the TRBX channel frequency:

1. Remove the existing cabling declaration between the TRBX and the TMDX boards
2. Set the related TRBX ports to OOS (Out Of service)
3. Perform “Configuration Transmission Update”

4. Modify the TRBX frequency to the expected one
5. Set the related TRBX ports to IS (In service)
6. Declare the cabling between the TRBX and the TMDX boards
7. Perform “Configuration Transmission Update”

9.3 Transition #2: from “Blocked” to “Express” channel
Create an Express cross-connection

splitter board (OADC1102 or OCNC12x0) of the 1st OTS
Output: relevant port#1, same channel frequency, OMSoch TP present
in the splitter board (OADC1102 or OCNC12x0) of the 2nd OTS
To verify the channel is unblocked (optional)

1. On the two relevant WMAN3x74 boards, display the board view
2. Choose Board Configure WMAN 3x74… menu option
3. Select the Express i (i=1 to 3) position for the channel.
4. Click on Apply.


9.4 Transition #3: from “AddDrop” to “Blocked” channel
Delete the AddDrop cross-connection

then click Search button
2. Select the AddDrop cross-connection to delete, then click Delete button.
To verify the channel is blocked (optional)

2. Select the OGPI block on WDM line side
3. Select Transmission APSD configuration…
4. Verify APSD is set to Disable and the laser is OFF
5. Verify “Force_LOSS” parameter is set to “Activated”.
6. Display the WMAN3x74 board view
7. Choose Board Configure WMAN3x74 … menu option
8. Verify the Blocked (0) position for the channel.
9. Display the relevant TDMX1180 board view only for TR-OADM
10.Choose Board Configure TDMX1x80 … menu option
11.Verify the relevant Port is Blocked.


9.5 Transition #4: from “AddDrop” to “Express” channel
1) Delete the AddDrop cross-connection

2. Select the AddDrop cross-connection to delete, then click Delete button.
The channel could be checked is blocked (see Transition #3)
2) Create an Express cross-connection

splitter board (OADC1102 or OCNC12x0) of the 1st OTS
Output: relevant port#1, same channel frequency, OMSoch TP
present in the splitter board (OADC1102, OCNC12x0) of the 2nd OTS
The channel could be checked is unblocked (see Transition #2)


9.6 Transition #5: from “Express” to “Blocked” channel
Delete the Express cross-connection

2. Select the Express cross-connection to delete, then click Delete button.



9.7 Transition #6: from “Express” to “AddDrop” channel
1) Delete the Express cross-connection

2. Select the Express cross-connection to delete, then click Delete button.



9.7 Transition #6: from “Express” to “AddDrop” channel [cont.]
2) Create an AddDrop cross-connection

splitter board (OADC1102 or OCNC12x0 or OCNC12x0) of the 1st OTS
Output:
For TR-OADM, relevant port#1 to 8, same channel frequency, OGPIoch TP
present in the TDMX1180 board of the same OTS
For ROADM, relevant port#101 to 108, same channel frequency, OGPIoch
TP present in the CMDX board of the same OTS
The channel could be checked is added and dropped (see Transition #1)


Exercise 1
Prerequisite : a TR-OADM Degree 2 or 3 is needed for this exercise
T1 Perform a manual transition from a blocked channel to an AddDrop

channel, following the instructions given by the trainer
T3 Perform a manual transition from an AddDrop channel to a Blocked
T2 Perform a manual transition from a blocked channel to an Express
T5 Perform a manual transition from an Express channel to a Blocked
Time allowed:
_____ minutes


Exercise 2
TR-OADM Degree 3 test configuration is presented here :

Note :
Ax : Analyser at the User Tx of the TRBx
Px : Power meter at the WDM Tx of the TRBx
Sx : Optical Spectrum Analyser at the WMAN3 output

Exercise 2 [cont.]
Checks to be performed for a Blocked channel :
Ax : consequent action of a LOS Line
Px : no power
Sx : no lambda
Checks to be performed for an AddDrop channel :

Ax : error free transmission
Px : power
Sx : no lambda
Checks to be performed for an Express channel :

Ax : consequent action of a LOS Line
Px : no power
Sx : lambda
Time allowed:
_____ minutes

10 ROADM (WB based) configuration management


10.1 ROADM (WB based) _ Reminder
ROADM
WMAN1100
Band 1
CMDX 1
CMDX 1
1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2
OADC1102
BMDX1x00
OADC1102
BMDX1x00
OSC OSC
To/from TRBD/TRBC
(up to 8)
2 VOA 1 2 VOA 1
CMDX 12
CMDX 12
OSC OSC
Band 12
WMAN1100

The incoming WDM spectrum is split in two parts in OADC1102 module. One part continues through
WMAN1100 (“direct” wavelengths), the other part being dropped to BMDX1000. For each wavelength to
be added in the ROADM - via CMDX and BMDX – the equivalent “direct” wavelength has to be blocked in
WMAN1100 to avoid wavelength superposition into line when “added” and “direct” wavelengths are
coupled via OADC1102.
The WMAN1100 is reconfigurable allowing flexibility in add / drop scheme. In a given band, some
channels can be thus added/dropped and some others be bypassed without regeneration.
Up to 100% of the traffic may be added/dropped for a total of 96 channels (88 channels if ALCT is
present).

10.2 ROADM (WB based) _ Operation overview
There is one common Graphical User Interface for the WMAN1100 boards:
For each channel, the traffic routing can be configured.
For each channel set in « Express » the attenuation can be tuned.
The transponder state (WDM side) is automatically managed.

The relevant cross-connections are automatically created as soon as
WMAN1100 board(s) configuration is done.

The routing configuration possibilities for each channel are the following:
Blocked, Express, AddDrop1, AddDrop2 or AddDropp12.

10.3 Graphical User Interface description
The ROADM Graphical User Interface is mainly spread over 2 windows:
« R-OADM overview » and « Cross Connection management »
1 « R-OADM overview » description:

Select a WMAN1100 board and choose Configuration ROadm menu
option to open it:
It is spread in 3 parts:
1-1 Current channel configuration state overview

In addition to R-OADM Overview and Cross Connection management, the operator can use also :
“Spectrum Acquisition” facility. This facility has been briefly described for TR-OADM application in the
related previous part. An application for R-OADM will be described briefly in the next following pages.
Refer to “Optical power tuning” part of this training documentation for more details.
All supported 96 channels (in 50Ghz grid) are spread over 4 columns and 24 rows in R-OADM Overview
window.

10.3 Graphical User interface description [cont.]
1-2 Individual channel state: “R-OADM Configuration”

To get this window click on a given channel # area (green cell)
1-3 Global and Selected Settings

In order to know which OTS line is considered as “1” and “2”, the
operator has to place the mouse on the State value (e.g. AddDrop1).
Then a bullet will appear showing the corresponding board (LOFA) and
related rack, shelf and slot #.
Global Settings can be used to manage the attenuation values or so set the following configurations:
ALL EXPRESS, ALL BLOCKED, ALL AddDrop1, ALL AddDrop2 or ALL AddDrop1&2
Selected settings can be used to set in one shot several selected channels in the following state:
SEL EXPRESS, SEL BLOCKED, SEL AddDrop1, SEL AddDrop2 or SEL AddDrop1&2

2 « Cross Connection Management » description:
Choose Configuration Cross Connection Management menu option
to open it. Then, click Search button to display:
In the above screen shot, 5 cross connections are related to the ROADM
3 « Express » and 2 « AddDrop » cross-connections
The common features of window have been previously described.

- The corresponding WMAN 1100 boards is shown below:

From the equipment view operate as follow to make a “Spectrum

Acquisition”:
From a WMAN 1100 board view, select Board Spectrum Acquisition
WMAN 1100
Input
WMAN 1100
Output

The following channels are present at the input:

[26/24], [30/26], [32/27], [36/29], [45/33,5], [46/34] and 61/41,5
As channel [36/29] is the only one set in express mode (see previous page), it is therefore the only one
present at the output.
Refer to “Optical power tuning” part of this training documentation for more details.

10.4 Single channel configuration
From Equipment view, operate as follow:
1. Select a WMAN1100 board and choose Configuration ROadm menu
option
2. From R-OADM Overview window click on the channel cell (green area)
3. In R-OADM Configuration window choose the required State
4. Click Ok to confirm this setting.
5. At the bottom of R-OADM Overview click Apply to validate the
configuration

Frequency State Values Description

Express The channel goes through the ROADM node.
AddDrop1 The channel and its associated digital signal is extracted from
WDM line1 toward client line. Then the channel and a new
digital signal from client line can be inserted into WDM line1
digital signal from client line can be inserted into WDM line 1
AND the channel and its associated digital signal is extracted
from WDM line2 toward client line. Then the channel and a new
Blocked The channel is blocked. There is no transmission whatever the
frequency state is.
- Reminder: place the mouse on the State value to know the OTS line corresponding to “1” & or “2”
- After step 4 the information in the cells related to the configured channel is shown in italic until Apply
is launched.
- More than one channel can be modified before the validation is launched using Apply.
10.5 Selected settings management
This facility allows the common configuration of several pre-selected

channels in one shot.
As an example,from Equipment view, operate as follow to set several
channels in «Express»:
option
2. From the relevant pop down menu choose SEL Express option
3. Select the channels to be configured (green cells become white and
information in italic)
4. Eventually modify the attenuation (see next page for more information)
5. Validate the setting with Apply


10.5 Selected settings management [cont.]
There are 2 ways to modify the attenuation in case of «Express» setting:

A - It can be done from the current value directly to another one, quite
different
B - It can be done step by step from the current value
Case A
Confirm the setting with this button Chosse the new attenuation
Modify the setting step by step with this button Chosse the step size
Case B
The attenuation must be set separately for each direction.

10.6 Global settings management
This facility allows the common configuration of several or all channels in

one shot.
As an example,from Equipment view, operate as follow to modify the
attenuation of all channels which are already in «Express» configuration:
option
2. From the relevant pop down menu choose ALL Express option
3. All the “Express” channels are automatically selected (green cells
become white and information in italic)
4. Modify the attenuation as previously described
5. Validate the setting with Apply

The attenuation cannot be modified when setting all channels in « Blocked » state.

10.7 Case study
This ROADM application is spread over two subracks:

Subrack #1 Subrack #2
CMDX #2 CMDX #19

WMAN1100 #3 WMAN1100 #16
OADC1102 #31 OADC1102 #35
Here after the R-OADM Overview window configuration and the related cross-connections:

Exercise
According to the trainer instructions, explore the ways to manage the

ROADM with WB configurations.
For each configuration, compare the “R-OADM Overview” and the
corresponding cross-connections.
Verify that the lambda routing is properly made (according to trainer
instructions) using “Spectrum Acquisition” facility.
Time allowed:
_____ minutes


Notes Page


11 Trail Trace Identifier management


11 Trace Trail Identifier management
11.1 OTS TTI trace management concept
The OTS TTI is a connectivity control entity supported by the 2Mb/s

supervision frame.
It is inserted at the source of an OTS physical connection for transmission.
At the sink of the OTS physical connection, the received OTS TTI is compared
with the expected one.
In case of any mismatch (cabling mistake or wrong cabling) TIM alarm is raised.
The OTS TTI includes the following parts:
SAPI: Source Address Point Identifier (16 bytes)
DAPI: Destination Address Point Identifier (16 bytes)
A specific 32 bytes field is provided for operator use
(no check on this part)

The OTS TTI is supported by the OT1 byte in 2Mb/s supervision frame.

11.2 OTS TTI trace configuration
To configure the OTS TTI trace:

1. Select the port#1-OTS block in
the Transmission view
2. Choose Transmission Trail

trace management on TP
menu option
3. Set the Expected and/or Sent
configurations
4. Confirm with related OK
buttons


11.3 ODU and OTU TTI trace management concept
The ODU or OTU TTI is a connectivity control entity supported by the

G.709 frame.
It is inserted at the source of a trail for transmission.
At the sink of a trail, the received ODU or OTU TTI is compared with the
expected one.
In case of any mismatch (cabling mistake or wrong cabling) TIM alarm is raised.
The ODU or OTU TTI includes the following parts:
SAPI: Source Address Point Identifier (16 bytes)
DAPI: Destination Address Point Identifier (16 bytes)
A specific 32 bytes field is provided for operator use (no check on this part)
ODU TTI is supported by the following boards:

TRBD11y1 and TRBC1111
OTU TTI is supported by the following boards:

TRBD11y1, TRBC1111, TRBD4x12 and TRBC4x12

The OTU TTI is supported by one byte in a multi-frame concept over 64 G.709 frames.

11.4 ODU TTI trace configuration
To configure the ODU TTI trace:

1. Select the port#101-ODU2
block in the Transmission view
menu option
configurations
buttons


11.5 OTU TTI trace configuration
To configure the OTU TTI trace:

1. Select the port#101-OTU block
in the Transmission view
menu option
configurations
buttons


11.6 RS TTI management concept
The RS TTI is a connectivity control entity carried by J0 byte in RSOH of

an SDH frame.
It is inserted at the source of a trail for transmission.
At the sink of a trail, the received RS TTI is compared with the expected one.
In case of any mismatch (cabling mistake or wrong cabling) TIM alarm is
raised.
There are 2 working modes:
“Mode 1” : J0 transports a given string (15 characters)
“One Repeat Byte”
When 1626 LM is inserted in a network, 2 cases have to be considered:

An SDH equipment creates the trace: in this case, 1626 LM monitors the trace
1626 LM boards create and monitor the trace
RS-TTI is supported by the following boards:

2xGBE_FC, ETHC1000, TRBC1111, TRBD11y1, TRBD4x12 and TRBC4x12

RS TTI : Regenerator Section Trail Trace Identifier

TIM : Trace Identifier Mismatch
“Mode 1” is based on a multi-frame concept (one byte per frame).

11.7 J0 trace configuration on 2xGBE_FC
To configure the RS TTI trace management on 2xGBE_FC board,

operate as follow:
1. Open the board view then open the port#6 Transmission view
2. Select the Port#6-RsTTP block then choose Transmission Path
Trace Configuration menu option
The JO configuration window will appear.

The JO configuration for ETHC1000 is not shown in this manual (same way to configure).

11.7 J0 trace configuration on 2xGBE_FC [cont.]
TX side configuration :
1. Select the required mode

2. Enter the trace : a string (15 characters) or one byte
3. Calculate the CRC7
4. Confirm the configuration with OK

CRC7: Cyclic Redundancy Check 7

11.7 J0 trace configuration on 2xGBE_FC [cont.]
“Expected” configuration on RX side:
1. Activate the monitoring clicking on STM Mon. Disabled / Enabled

2. Select the required mode
3. Enter the trace : a string (15 characters) or one byte
4. Calculate the CRC7
5. Confirm the configuration with OK

When the configuration is done on both sides, check the received J0 trace and related TIM alarm if any.

11.8 J0 trace monitoring on TRBD/TRBC
From the Transmission view of the TRBD or TRBC board, select the
relevant TP (see below)
1. Choose Transmission Trail Monitor Create menu option
2. Select the TM block then Transmission Path Trace Configuration
menu option
3. Activate the monitoring clicking on STM Mon. Disabled / Enabled
4. Set the expected trace
5. Confirm with OK

You can create a TM on transmission blocks on … to monitor JO trace on … layer
Port#1-OCH and Port#101-ODU2 (TRBD11y1) SDH-RS
Port#1-OCH and Port#101-ODU3 (TRBD4x12) SDH-RS
Port#x-OCH (x=1 to 4) and Port#101-ODU1 SDH-RS

(TRBC1111)
Port#x-OCH (x=1 to 4) and Port#101-ODU3
SDH-RS
(TRBC4x12)

Notes Page


12 OCH configuration


12 OCH configuration
12.1 FEC and BER threshold configuration
FEC configuration
1. From the Transmission view
of TRBD or TRBC, select the
port#101-OCH block
2. From the Transmission
menu, untick or tick before
Fec Enabled
A « F » disappears or appears
BER threshold configuration

1. From the Transmission view
of TRBD or TRBC, select the
port#101-OCH block
2. Choose Transmission BER
threshold configuration…
menu option
3. From the Low Threshold Set
list box, select the required
value
4. Click OK
LTCER: Low Threshold Corrected Error Rate

- The FEC must be “Enabled” to get any LTCER alarm.
- The operator can configure the following threshold values : from 10-3 to 10-8 (UNI) or from 10-4 to 10-8
(NNI).

Exercise
Set and observe the OTS trace configuration for a given an OTS physical
connection
Set and observe the J0 trace configuration for a given transponder
Set and observe the OTU2 trace configuration for a given transponder
For a given transponder:

De-activate and activate the FEC
Modify and restore the LCTER configuration
Time allowed:
_____ minutes


Notes Page


13 Loopbacks management


13.1 Local loopback on TRBC and TRBD
TRBC
TRBD
Loopbacks are performed for troubleshooting purposes to identify faults in the transmission path with
the help of an external test device. The external test device is used to compare the outgoing and
returning signals. The result of the loopback is shown on the external test device.
The “Local loopback” is also called “B&W line loop & continue”. The received client signal on the B&W
interface is copied and sent back through the B&W emitter. This signal is also transmitted to the
WDM emitter.
Local loopback is not supported by TRBD4x12 and TRBC4x12.

13.2 Remote loopback on TRBC and TRBD
TRBD

The “Remote loopback” is also called “WDM line loop & continue”. The received signal on the WDM
interface is copied and sent back through the WDM emitter. It is also transmitted to the User
emitter.
The behavior is exactly the same for TRBC.

It is not possible to configure a local and a Remote loopback in the same time on the same
transponder.
Moreover, Remote loopback configuration cannot be applied on two TRBD/TRBC boards with the same
channel. This problem can be encountered in an OADM configuration.

13.3 Loopback on 2xGBE_FC and ETHC1000 boards
n
Local (User) Loopback
n
Remote (Line) Loopback

13.4 Creating a local loopback
1. In Equipment view, select the board (TRBD11y1, TRBC1111,
2XGBE_FC or ETHC1000)
2. Access to the Transmission view
3. Select the Port#x-OGPI block (User side)
x=1 for TRBD11y1, x=1 to 4 for TRBC1111,
x=1 to 2 for 2XGBE_FC, x=1 to 12 for ETHC1000
4. Choose the Transmission Port Loopback
Configuration… menu option
The OGPI Termination Point is already defined
5. Click on OK twice to create the Loopback

It’s possible to create Line Loopback with either the choice Loop and Continue or Loop and Cut
depending on the selected Termination Point.

13.5 Creating a remote loopback
1. In Equipment view, select the board (TRBD11y1,
TRBD4x12,TRBC1111, TRBC4x12, 2XGBE_FC or ETHC1000)
3. Select the Port#x-OGPI block (WDM side)
x=101 for TRBD/TRBC, x=6 for 2xGBE_FC and x=13 for ETHC1000
4. Choose the Transmission Port Loopback Configuration
menu option
5. Click on OK
6. Click on OK to create the Loopback


13.6 Displaying the existing loopbacks
1. In Equipment view, choose Configuration Loopback Management

menu option
The Signal Loopback Management window appears
2. Click on Close to close the dialog box


13.7 Deleting a loopback
Select the
loopback(s)
you want to
delete
Click on
Delete
Click on Close


Exercise
Connect a SDH tester on one Transponder

Loop the Line interface with an appropriate attenuation
Check on tester that traffic is good
Configure a local Loopback on the Transponder
Open the physical loop on Line interface
Check there is no error on the tester
Delete the Loopback and check traffic is disrupted
Time allowed:
_____ minutes


Module Summary
In addition to board, modules and optical cables declaration,
some cross-connections must be created:
In TRBD1191 and in ETHC1000 boards
Warning : do not forget Configuration Transmission Update
Optical channel protection (OSNCP and OMSP):
The related cross-connections are automatically created
The operator can : Force Switch, Lockout or Release the protection state
Line state management is included in TR-OADM transitions. Nevertheless,
it is possible to manage it separately.
The R/TR-OADM (WSS based) configuration is based on “Transitions”. To
perform a transition, a set of boards must be configured accordingly and
related cross-connections may have to be created or removed.
Setting the ROADM (WB based) configuration, both WMAN1 boards,
related cross-connections and transponders states are automatically
managed.
The traces can be managed as follow:
OTS-TTI, ODU-TTI, OTU-TTI and RS-TTI are supported
FEC and BER threshold can be managed on the OCH block
Loopbacks can be set on user side (Local) or on Line side (Remote)


for this module


End of Module
Optical Channel Configuration


Section 2
NE Operation
Module 3
Optical Power Tuning


Blank Page

NE Operation Optical Power Tuning
Document History

Module Objectives
Monitor and tune the optical power levels in case of channel addition and
removal or for maintenance reasons





Table of Contents
1 Current instantaneous measurements 7

1.1 Monitoring points for transmission path 8
1.2 Monitoring points for reception path 9
1.3 Measurement from Equipment menu 10
1.4 Measurement from Board Menu 11
2 ALCT1010 board setting 13
2.1 Introduction 14
2.2 Configuring the ALC in “Dynamic” mode 16
2.3 Configuring the ALC in “Disable” mode 18
2.4 Configuring the Output power level of ALCT board 19
2.5 Current Instantaneous measurements on OADC0104 board 20
3 LOFA board setting 21
3.1 Amplifier Tuning modes _ Introduction 22
3.2 APT modes _ availability and constraints 23
3.3 Automatic Power Tuning _ POWER mode 24
3.4 Automatic Power Tuning _ GAIN mode 25
3.5 VOA modes _ availability and constraints 26
3.6 VOA setting _ MSV mode 27
3.7 Displaying the APT/VOA Configuration dialog box 28
3.8 Setting the output power of LOFA11yz : APT 29
3.9 Setting the VOA attenuation 30
3.10 LOFA “Current Instantaneous Measurements” 31
3.11 OADC1102 “Current Instantaneous Measurements” 32
235
4 Transponder output power settingAll Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 33
NE Operation4.1 Setting
Optical Power Tuningthe transponder output power 34
5 WMAN output power setting 35
5.1 Setting the WMAN output power 36

5.2 Setting the WMAN1100 attenuation 37
5.3 Setting the WMAN3174 output power 38
6 Spectrum acquisition operation 39
6.1 Loading plan at 50GHz (reminder) 40
6.2 Introduction 41
6.3 Getting started 42
6.4 Case study _ ROADM (WB based) application 43



1 Current instantaneous measurements


1.1 Monitoring points for transmission path
Transponder Channel Mux

(CMDX)
Band Mux Line
(BMDX) Amplifier
8:1
(LOFA)
12:1 WDM LINE
Loading channel OSC

(ALCT) Inter-stage
(for DCF use)
Supervision
(OSCU)
External optical Internal optical
monitoring point monitoring point

The above figures represent all the external and internal monitoring points for input and/or output
optical powers in transmission path for a “terminal application”.
The external monitoring points are accessible on the front panel of boards. They are suitable to
connect an optical spectrum analyzer or an optical photometer for example. Signal provided at these
external monitoring points comes from a tap coupler, corresponding to a small percentage of the
“traffic” signal flow. We can notice that there is no such test point on ALCT and OSCU boards.
The internal monitoring points provide from a tap coupler and after an analogue to digital conversion,
an optical power measurement accessible from specific menus in CT or OS “Equipment View”. These
“instantaneous measurements” do not concern only optical powers but also other parameters such as
current unit temperature, laser bias current or laser temperature.

1.2 Monitoring points for reception path
Transponder
Channel Mux
(CMDX)
Line Band Mux
Amplifier (BMDX)
(LOFA) 8:1
WDM LINE 12:1
OSC
Inter-stage
(for DCF use)
Supervision
(OSCU)
External optical Internal optical
monitoring point monitoring point


1.3 Measurement from Equipment menu
Select a
board Select the
right option
BMDX board
The result is
displayed

Current instantaneous measurements are available on boards such as:

TRBD11y1
TRBD4x12
TRBC1111
TRBC4x12
CMDX1010
OMDXw100_y_z
BMDX1x00
WMAN3174
TMDX1180
OADC0104
ALCT1010
LOFA11yz
PSUP1000 (Current Unit temperature only)
HKSU1000 (Current Unit temperature only)
…
Click on Refresh to update the measurement values.
For all the boards, the measurements values have an error margin of 1dB.

1.4 Measurement from Board Menu
To display current measurement from a board:

1. Open the board view (such as ETHC1000)
2. Choose Board Current instantaneous measurements menu option


1.4 Measurement from Board Menu [cont.]
Example: Current Instantaneous Measurements for TDMX1180 board


2 ALCT1010 board setting


2.1 Introduction
Pre-VOA Post-VOA IP2 OP2
1 IP1
OP OP
LOFA_T
ALCT1010 1 VOA DCU 2
2 DCU VOA 1
12
LOFA_R
BMDX1000 OP2 IP2 Post-VOA Pre-VOA IP1

OP OP
The above figure shows, the interconnections between ALCT, BMDX and LOFA
boards in case of “Terminal” mode application.
The ALCT output power level and IP1 power level depend on “Automatic Laser
Control” working mode which is configurable as shown here after:

The Automatic Laser Control working mode is configurable as follow:
1 - “Disable”
In this case, the operator directly sets the ALCT unit output power in order to get a given IP1 power
at the the LOFA_T input . Refer to the next relevant page for more configuration details.
2 – “Dynamic”
When ALC is configured in “Dynamic” mode, the output power of the BMDX (i.e. IP1, the input
power on the LOFA_T) is kept at a constant value by the laser control circuit of the ALCT1010
board.
When ALC is configured in “Dynamic” mode, the “Booster input” reference value must be set
operating as described on the next relevant page.
3 – “Loading”
This mode is not supported for 1626 LM R 5.0A
The Loading ALC is an algorithm which principle is to keep constant the BMDX mux output power
(which is constituted by the power emitted by the transponders and the ALC) at the provisioned
level. The Loading ALC session manages the emitted power of the ALCT only or of the ALCT and
tributaries. In the latter case, if there is no ALCT connected to the BMDX the Loading ALC session
manages only the tributaries emitted power.

2.1 Introduction [cont.]
LOFA11y0_Unidir
OADC0104
From other OTS lines WMAN3174 1 VOA 2
of the TR-OADM
OSC
Multiplexing ALCT
TR-OADM structure of
incoming local
traffic
To/from TRBD/TRBC
(up to 72)
The above figure shows the interconnections between WMAN3174, OADC0104,

ALCT and LOFA boards in case of “Multi degree” mode application.
The ALCT output power level and IP1 power level depend on “Automatic Laser
Control” working mode which is configurable as shown here after:

The Automatic Laser Control working mode is configurable as follow:
1 - “Disable”
In this case, the operator directly sets the ALCT unit output power in order to get a given IP1 power
at the the LOFA_T input . Refer to the next relevant page for more configuration details.
2 – “Dynamic”
When ALC is configured in “Dynamic” mode, the output power of the OADC0104 (i.e. IP1, the input
power on the LOFA_T) is kept at a constant value by the laser control circuit of the ALCT1010
board.
When ALC is configured in “Dynamic” mode, the “Booster input” reference value must be set
operating as described on the next relevant page.
3 – “Loading”
This mode is not supported for 1626 LM R 5.0A.

2.2 Configuring the ALC in “Dynamic” mode
In Equipment view,
select the LOFA11yz_R
board
1.Access to the
Transmission view
2.Select the port#1-OMS
block
3.Choose the menu
Transmission Alc
Management
4.The Automatic Laser
Control Management
dialog box is displayed.

1- Terminal, BOADM and ROADM (WB based) applications:

The principle of the Dynamic ALC is that ALCT output power is tuned in order to maintain BMDX-mux
output power (which is constituted by the power emitted by the transponders and the ALC) at a
provisioned level.
Preliminary condition :
ALCT1010 needs to receive information from BMDX to be able to operate in Dynamic mode.
Consequently, BMDX and ALCT1010 must be located in the shelf according to the following table:
ALCT slot # 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
BMDX slot # 6 5 4 3 10 9 8 7 14 13 12 11 18 17 16 15
2 – ILA PGE, ILA AGE, ROADM and TR-OADM (WSS based) applications:
The principle of the Dynamic ALC is that ALCT output power is tuned in order to maintain the
incoming power level of the related LOFA board in TX direction at a provisioned level.
Preliminary condition :
ALCT1010 needs to receive information from BMDX to be able to operate in Dynamic mode.
Consequently, ALCT1010 and OADC0104 must be located in the shelf according to the following
table:
ALCT slot # 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
OADC0104 slot
23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37
#
2.2 Configuring the ALC in “Dynamic” mode [cont.]
1. Click "Dynamic" in the “Mode Configuration" area.

2. In the Dynamic Alc Configuration area, enter the location of the
ALCT unit that must operate in Dynamic mode and click on Set.
3. In the "Power Configuration" set the Booster Input Power by using
the up and down arrows.
4. Click on Set.
5. Click on Close to finish.

Relevant Current Instantaneous Measurements can be used to check the BMDX output power
and/or amplifier input power level. Refer to the example given at the beginning of this module
“Measurement from Equipment menu” _ BMDX board

2.3 Configuring the ALC in “Disable” mode
Get the relevant

Automatic Laser
Control Management
dialog box
1. Click "Disable" in the
“Mode Configuration"
area.
2. Click on Set.
4. Configure the ALCT output
power level as shown on
the next page until the
target power is reached at
the amplifier input.

Relevant Current Instantaneous Measurements can be used to check the OADC0104 output power
and/or amplifier input power level.

2.4 Configuring the Output power level of ALCT board
1. In Equipment view, select the ALCT board

2. Access to the Board view
3. Select the menu Board Optical power level configuration
4. Set the pre-emphasis by using the up and down arrows.
5. Click on Apply.


2.5 Current Instantaneous measurements on OADC0104 board
LOFA11y0_Unidir
OADC0104
From other OTS lines WMAN3174 1 VOA 2
of the TR-OADM
OSC
Multiplexing
ALCT
TR-OADM structure of
incoming local
traffic
To/from TRBD/TRBC
(up to 72)


3 LOFA board setting


3.1 Amplifier Tuning modes _ Introduction
Two main parameters may be configured for LOFA11yz :
APT (Automatic Power Tuning) modes

Manual
POWER: Amplifier automatically controlled in power
(only for unidirectional amplifier)
GAIN: Automatic Gain Control on 1rst and 2nd stages
VOA (Variable Automatic Attenuator) modes

Manual
MSV: Middle Stage VOA tuning (only for unidirectional
amplifier)
SAC: Span Attenuation Control

- LOFA11y0 can work only in unidirectional configuration.

- LOFA11y1 has two possible configurations : unidirectional or bidirectional.
- When LOFA11yz is Unidirectional, VOA is placed at the first stage output. When LOFA11y1 is
Bidirectional, VOA is placed at the first stage input.
APT (Amplifier Power Tuning) modes :

MANUAL: the 1st and 2nd stage output power is set at the value manually provisioned.
POWER: Amplifier automatically controlled in Power (only for amplifier Unidirectional
configuration). The 1st stage output power is automatically tuned according to the provisioned 2nd
stage output power, to the measured VOA attenuation and parameters depending of the optical
design of the link. This algorithm doesn't apply to 2nd stage whose output power remains manually
tuned.
GAIN: Automatic Gain control on first and second stage. Amplifier is controlled to keep its gain
constant on the two stages. It is therefore required that a link can be upgraded without ALCT unit
but with an automatic tuning of the line amplifiers.
VOA modes :
MANUAL: VOA is set at the value manually provisioned.
MSV: Mid Stage VOA tuning (only for amplifier Unidirectional configuration); VOA is automatically
tuned according to the LOFA input and output powers in order to control and optimize its spectral
flatness.
SAC: The VOA is placed before the pre-amplifier. The VOA attenuation is tuned so as to maintain
the input power level constant on the 1st stage of the LOFA (receive side). Refer to next relevant
pages for more details.

3.2 APT modes _ availability and constraints
The “Manual” APT mode:

- is possible for all types of LOFA
boards.
- is compatible with all VOA modes for
unidirectional LOFA board.
- is compatible with Manual VOA mode
only for bidirectional LOFA board.
The “Power” APT mode:

- is possible for unidirectional LOFA
board only.
- is compatible with all VOA modes.
The Gain APT mode:

board.
- is compatible with Manual VOA mode
only.
APT Modes Description

Manual 1rst stage output power (OP1) and 2nd stage output power (OP2) values are entered
manually.
In the Manual APT mode, other APT parameters are inactivated.
Power The 2 following parameters are configured manually:

• 2nd stage output power (OP2)
• Limitation parameter of non linear effects (OP_Diff)
The configuration of these 2 parameters determines the value of 1rst stage output power
(OP1).
Gain The 2 following parameters are configured manually:

• IT
The Effective Inter-stage attenuation.
This parameter represents the attenuation between the location where
the channels are added and the 2nd stage input.
• EOL span
The Effective End Of Life span attenuation.
This parameter represents the attenuation between the upstream node
where the channels are added and the 1rst stage input.
In the Gain APT mode, other parameters are inactivated.

3.3 Automatic Power Tuning _ POWER mode
Post-VOA OP2
OP-Diff
1 Pre-VOA
OP
IP1
OP IP2
LOFA_11y0
2 DCU VOA 1
12
LOFA_11y0
IP2 Pre-VOA IP1
OP
BMDX1000 OP2 OP-Diff Post-VOA
OP

In “Power” mode, OP1 (PreVOA OP) is tuned according to the provisioned OP_Diff and OP2 and the
current VOA attenuation value. Amplifier output power (OP2) and OP_Diff are constant.
The (constant) difference between 1st and 2nd stage output power is set by setting the difference
between 2nd stage output and VOA output: OP_Diff = OP2 – PostVOA OP.
OP_Diff maintains a fixed difference between power at the input of transmission fiber and power at
the input of DCM.
The difference between 1st and 2nd stage output power changes only if the VOA losses change, i.e. to
compensate for fiber ageing. Since the VOA decreases with ageing, the 1-st stage output power also
decreases with ageing to maintain PostVOA OP constant;
The OP_Diff must be chosen in order to have the good trade-off between:
higher power at the 2nd-stage input ⇒ better amplifier noise-figure (NF)
limited power at the DCM input ⇒ nonlinear effects accumulation in the DCMs must be below a
certain threshold
An optimum OP_Diff could be identified link-by-link, but typical values can be generally applied, only
depending on the fiber type:
G652 SMF: typical OP_Diff = 8 dB
G655 TeraLight: typical OP_Diff = 6 dB
G655 E-Leaf and TrueWave-RS: typical OP_Diff = 5 dB (even lower would be possible, but typically
not possible to maintain such large power values at the output of the first stage)
“Power” mode is supported only for unidirectional amplifier.

3.4 Automatic Power Tuning _ GAIN mode
IP1 OP2 IP1
Pre-VOA
1 IP2
OP EOL Span
IT
LOFA_11yz LOFA_11yz
1 VOA DCU 2 1
2 DCU VOA 1 2
12
LOFA_11yz LOFA_11yz
IT EOL Span
BMDX1000 IP2 Pre-VOA
OP
OP2 IP1 OP2

In “Gain” mode, every amplifier stage keeps its gain constant (output power – input power = constant)
The input power is monitored, If the input power varies, the output power is changed
accordingly,
This algorithm is applied separately by 1st and 2nd stage of every amplifier.
In “Gain” mode, the amplifier automatically adapts OP1 (PreVOA OP) and OP2 to the number of input
channels. Both amplifier stages are controlled in gain (constant gain). This allows controlling at the
same time the impact of the nonlinear effects inside the transmission fiber and the DCM.
OP2 – PreVOA OP = 5 (for LOFA11y0 and LOFA11y1)

-> OP1 = PreVOA OP = OP2 – 5 or OP2 = 5 + PreVOA OP
OP2 is tuned according to the provisioned IT parameter and the current input power measurement IP2
:
IT = IP2 – PreVOA OP
-> IT = IP2 – OP2 + 5
-> OP2 = IP2 + 5 – IT
OP1 is tuned according to the provisioned EOL Span parameter and the current input power
measurement IP12 :
EOL Span = OP2 – IP1
-> EOL Span = 5 + PreVOA OP – IP1
-> OP1 = PreVOA OP = IP1 + EOL Span - 5

3.5 VOA modes _ availability and constraints
The “Manual” VOA mode:

board.
- is compatible with all APT modes
The “MSV” VOA mode:

- is possible for unidirectional LOFA
board only.
- is compatible with Manual and Power
APT modes.
The “SAC” mode can be used :

- if the VOA is placed before the LOFA
operating as pre-amplifier.

VOA Modes Description

Manual Attenuation value (VOA) is entered manually.
In the Manual VOA mode, other VOA parameters are inactivated.
MSV In the Mid Stage VOA tuning, K_Diff is entered manually:

K_Diff is the difference between the theoretical ideal flatness constant
(given by the manufacturer) and the effective flatness constant.
In the MSV VOA mode, other VOA parameters are inactivated.
SAC The Span Attenuation Control is used when the VOA is placed before the pre-amplifier.
• When a repair is made after a fiber cut, the span attenuation may be increased. When the
line is back to an operational state, the operator is able to launch the SAC function to reduce
automatically the VOA attenuation in order to keep the input power level on the 1st stage of
the LOFA (receive side) as it was before the failure.

3.6 VOA setting _ MSV mode
IP1 OP2
Gain
Pre-VOA
1 IP2
OP
Inter-Stage Loss
LOFA_T
2 DCU VOA 1
12
LOFA_R
Inter-Stage Loss
BMDX1000 IP2 Pre-VOA

OP
Gain
OP2 IP1

The MSV adjusts automatically (in real time) the mid-stage VOA to adapt the mid-stage losses to the
present amplifier gain, according to the following rules:
LOFA111z: “31-dB rule”

The amplifier shows maximum gain flatness when: amplifier gain + mid-stage losses = 31 dB
Note: 22+9=31dB
LOFA112z: “37-dB rule”

The amplifier shows maximum gain flatness when: amplifier gain + mid-stage losses = 37 dB
Note: 28+9=37dB
The constants 31 dB and 37 dB are indicated as “K_theoric” since they are theoretical (average)
value.
In a true amplifier board, the optimum constant (K_flat) can differ from K_theoric.
In this case: K_flat = K_theoric + K_diff
In very long links, where the accumulation of gain flatness imperfections can bring severe transmission
degradation, it is possible to adjust the K_Diff parameter (default = 0) by CT or OS, in order to
optimize it in field (or in the factory) for each specific amplifier. This optimization procedure is
called Specific MSV (SMSV).
The “MSV” mode is supported only for unidirectional amplifier.

3.7 Displaying the APT/VOA Configuration dialog box
1. In Equipment view, select the LOFA11yz_R board

3. Select the menu Board APT/VOA
The APT/VOA Configuration dialog box is displayed


3.8 Setting the output power of LOFA11yz : APT
1. Provision the APT mode in the APT area.

If Manual mode selected: provision the 1st and 2nd stages Output
Power, OP1 and OP2 fields
If Power mode selected : provision OP_Diff and the 2nd stage output
power OP2 fields
If Gain mode selected : provision EOLspan and IT fields
2. Click on Apply after each modifications. Wait for a few seconds for
the effective setting of the board. During this process, the
command buttons of the dialog box are disabled.
3. Click on Close to terminate.

Provisionable parameters : according to the selected APT mode, some fields are provisionable using
the up and down arrows, and the others are greyed (not provisionable).
OP1 : Output Power of 1st stage

OP2 : Output Power of 2nd stage
OP_Diff : is the difference between the line fibre input power (OP2) and the Mid-Stage payload input
power (post VOA first stage output power). Default value is 9 dB.
EOL Span : End of Life attenuation of the span. This value is estimated. This represents the
attenuation between the upstream node where channels are added and the first stage input.
IT : Amplifier Inter Stage Losses

3.9 Setting the VOA attenuation
1. Provision the VOA mode in the VOA area.

If Manual mode selected: provision the VOA attenuation
If MSV mode selected : provision K_Diff
If SAC mode is selected: tune the VOA attenuation on operator request
2. Click on Apply after each modifications.
Wait for a few seconds for the effective setting of the board. During this
process, the command buttons of the dialog box are disabled.
3. Click on Close to terminate.

Provisionable parameters : according to the selected APT mode, some fields are provisionable using
the up and down arrows, and the others are greyed (not provisionable).
Compatible APT modes are :

Manual or Power for Mid-Stage VOA mode
LOFA11y0 contains an internal VOA in order to optimize the gain flatness during the life of the system
and to avoid non-linear effects in DCF that can fill the interstage. This VOA is fixed and located at
the interstage, just before the 1st stage output front panel connector.
Unidirectional LOFA11y1 contains an internal VOA in order to optimize the gain flatness during the life
of the system and to avoid non-linear effects in DCF that can fill the interstage.
In Bidirectional configuration, the floating VOA of LOFA11y1 is before the first stage for maintain the
loss variation of the span fiber during the life of the system (ageing or repairing).

3.10 LOFA “Current Instantaneous Measurements”
IP1 OP2
Gain
Post-VOA OP OP-Diff
Pre-VOA OP
Inter-Stage Loss IP2
LOFA_T
1 VOA DCU 2


3.11 OADC1102 “Current Instantaneous Measurements”
In R-ADM application, the OADC1102 board interconnects the following

boards: the amplifier (LOFA), the BMDX and the WMAN1100 boards.
« Current Instantaneous Measurements » of OADC1102 are shown below:
WMAN1100
Band 1
CMDX 1
CMDX 1
1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2
OADC1102
BMDX1x00
OADC1102
BMDX1x00
OSC OSC
To/from TRBD/TRBC
(up to 8)
2 VOA 1 2 VOA 1
CMDX 12
OSC CMDX 12 OSC

Band 12
WMAN1100

Current Instantaneous Measurements for OADC1102:

4 Transponder output power setting


4.1 Setting the transponder output power
1. In Equipment view, select a Transponder

4. Set the output power by using the up and down arrows.
5. Click on Apply.

Current Instantaneous Measurements for TRBD1191:

5 WMAN output power setting


5.1 Setting the WMAN output power
1. In Equipment view, select a WMAN Board

4. Set the relevant attenuation value for each selected element
5. Click Apply.

WMAN1100 Laser Output Power Configuration Parameters

Parameters Description
Attenuation – Line Output Offset attenuation applied at the board output.

The assigned value includes the offset
attenuation defined in the previous parameter.
Attenuation - Channel Attenuation applied to the selected channel
WMAN3174 Laser Power Configuration Parameters

Parameters Description
Attenuation – Wavelength Offset attenuation applied to any channel going

Selective Switch input through the given Express port.
Attenuation - Channel Attenuation applied to the selected channel

5.2 Setting the WMAN1100 attenuation

Current Instantaneous Measurements for WMAN1100:

5.3 Setting the WMAN3174 output power

Current Instantaneous Measurements for WMAN3174:

6 Spectrum acquisition operation


6.1 Loading plan at 50GHz (reminder)
On G652 fiber in extended C-band

OSC ALC
8 Ch
Ch11.5
Ch19.5
Ch59.0
…
1510 nm
BAND1 … BAND4 BAND5 BAND6 BAND10 BAND11 BAND12
1568.57 nm
1530.33 nm
Submarine
Terrestrial
191.950 THz
195.900 THz
191.150 THz
194.000 THz

The extended C-band is divided into 12 bands of 8 channels maximum for a 50GHz channel spacing
plan (from 1530.33nm up to 1568.57nm). This corresponds to the maximum capacity for a LH/ULH
application (96 channels). The recommended band loading order with ALCT in band 5 is : band 7, 8,
6, 4, 9, 3, 2,10, 1,11, 12 and 5 (ALCT removed).
The communication between two adjacent WDM Network Elements is achieved via an “out-of-band”
channel (Optical Supervisory Channel) at 1510 nm.

6.2 Introduction
From 1626 LM R5.0 a new graphical facility « Spectrum acquisition » has

been designed to facilitate the checks of Operation and Maintenance
activities. It is available for WMAN boards.
It provides the inventory of the wavelengths and their power level for a given
WMAN board access (input and output).


6.3 Getting started
From the equipment view operate as follow:

1. Select a board (WMAN1100 or WMAN3174) and open the board view
2. Select the menu Board Spectrum Acquisition
- The Spectrum Acquisition window is displayed:
•Place the mouse on a

given wavelength then
the related information

Refresh button is available at the bottom of the window.

The above example is related to a WMAN3174 board included in a “ Multi Degree 2 ” application.
- In this particular case, only Output monitoring is enabled.
- The Input 1 monitoring could be enabled as well.
LOFA11y0_Unidir Output LOFA11y0_Unidir

OCNC1230 OADC0104
Up to 80λ WMAN
Input1 3174
1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2
Up to 80λ OSC
D M
OSC
ALCT

6.4 Case study _ ROADM (WB based) application
ROADM (WB based) overview (reminder)

ROADM
WMAN1100
Band 1
CMDX 1
CMDX 1
1 VOA 2 1 VOA 2
OADC1102
BMDX1x00
OADC1102
BMDX1x00
OSC OSC
To/from TRBD/TRBC
(up to 8)
2 VOA 1 2 VOA 1
CMDX 12
CMDX 12
OSC OSC
Band 12
WMAN1100


6.4 Case study _ ROADM (WB based) application [cont.]

Here above the ROADM configuration.

[26/24], [30/26], [32/27], [36/29], [45/33,5], [46/34] and 61/41,5

6.4 Case study _ ROADM (WB based) application [cont.]


[26/24], [30/26], [32/27], [36/29], [45/33,5], [46/34] and 61/41,5
As channel [36/29] is the only one set in express mode (see previous page), it is therefore the only one
present at the output.

Notes Page


How to Do it
Determine the way to approximate the optical

attenuation introduced by an external
monitoring point on a board
Time allowed:
_____ minutes

1. Connect a photometer to the external monitoring point

2. Measure the power and note it (P1)
3. Use the “current instantaneous measurement” menu option to get the
internal measurement and note it (P2)
4. Calculate optical attenuation of the corresponding monitoring point :
Att (dB) = P2 – P1

Exercise 1
Determine the optical attenuation introduced

by external monitoring points on the following boards
(if present) :
LOFA11yz
TRBD11y1
CMDX1010
BMDX1x00
OMDXw100_y_z


Exercise 2
1. Select a TRBD and note the output power from the

“Optical power level configuration” menu
2. Connect an OPM to the “VOA” output point of
corresponding TRBD and note the power
3. Decrease the output power of 2dB
4. Observe the power decrease on OPM and from the
“current instantaneous measurements” menu
5. Increase the output power of 1dB
6. Observe the power increase in the same way
7. Set the output power of TRBD to its initial value

Delta
Measurement from CT: (1) Measurement from OPM : (2)
(1) – (2)
(dBm) (dBm)
(dB)
Initial output
power = Pi
Pi - 2dB
Pi + 1dB

Notes Page



for this module


End of Module
Optical Power Tuning


Section 3
NE Maintenance
Module 1
Performance Monitoring


Blank Page

NE Maintenance Performance Monitoring
Document History

Module Objectives
Monitor the signal transmission quality in line





Table of Contents
Page
1 Introduction 7
1.1 Performance Monitoring overview 8
1.2 Monitored sections for TRBD11y1, TRBD4x12, TRBC1111 and TRBC4x12 9
1.3 Monitored sections for 2xGBE_FC & ETHC1000 boards 10
1.4 Supported performance monitoring points 11
1.5 Supported performance monitoring counters 12
2 Performance threshold tables management 15
2.1 Displaying a performance threshold table 16
2.2 Modifying a performance threshold table 17
3 Performance Monitoring configuration 19
3.1 Creating or deleting a Trail Monitor on a TP 20
3.2 Starting a performance monitoring on a TP 21
3.3 Stopping a performance monitoring on a TP 22
4 Performance data display 23
4.1 Displaying current data 24
4.2 Displaying history data 25
4.3 Displaying Ethernet layer 2 data 26
4.4 Displaying Q factor margin 28




1 Introduction


1 Introduction
1.1 Performance Monitoring overview
Performance Monitoring provides the operator with the ability to

monitor the quality of the signal flowing through the WDM network.
Selected PM points at the network boundary have to be started.
Two granularity periods are available: 15 minutes and 24 hours.
The Operator can analyze the « Current data » and the « Historical data ».
These data are based on counters.
A set of counters is dedicated to a given layer (SDH, FEC and Ethernet layer1
and 2).
PM Threshold tables are assigned to the performance points.
When a given threshold is crossed, a TCA alarm is raised.

TCA: Threshold Crossed Alarm

1 Introduction
1.2 Monitored sections for TRBD11y1, TRBD4x12, TRBC1111 and TRBC4x12

The monitored layers on TRBD11y1 board can be:

- FEC at 10Gbps based on FEC decoder info (Corrected Errors, Uncorrected Blocks).
- SDH 10G based on information (B1 byte) contained in SDH Regenerator Section 10G overhead and
specific ETSI processing.
The monitored layers on TRBD4x12 board can be:

The monitored layers on TRBC1111 board can be:

- SDH 2.5G based on information (B1 byte) contained in SDH Regenerator Section 2.5G overhead and
The monitored layers on TRBC4x12 board can be:


1 Introduction
1.3 Monitored sections for 2xGBE_FC & ETHC1000 boards
2xGBE_FC 2xGBE_FC

The monitored layers on 2xGBE_FC can be:

- Layer 1 GbE PM (client side), based on 8B/10B coding (either on GbE or FC signals).
- SDH 2.5G based on information (B1 byte) contained in SDH Regenerator Section 2.5G overhead and
The monitored layers on ETHC1000 board can be:

- Layer 1 GbE PM (client side), based on 8B/10B coding.
- Layer 2 PM

1 Introduction
1.4 Supported performance monitoring points
PM points 1626 LM ETSI
Near end egress FEC PM at 10 Gbps TRBC1111 and TRBD11y1
Near end egress FEC PM at 40 Gbps TRBD4x12 and TRBC4x12
TRBD11y1, TRBC4x12 and
Near end egress B1 PM at 10 Gbps (STM-64)
ETHC1000
Near end egress B1 PM at 40 Gbps (STM-256) TRBD4x12
Near end ingress B1 PM at 10 Gbps (STM-64) TRBD11y1, TRBC4x12
Near end ingress B1 PM at 40 Gbps (STM-256) TRBD4x12
Near end egress B1 PM at 2.5 Gbps (STM-16) TRBC1111 and 2xGBE_FC
Near end ingress B1 PM at 2.5 Gbps (STM-16) TRBC1111
Near end egress layer 1 10 GbE PM TRBD1191, only if 10GbE LAN
Near end ingress layer 1 10 GbE PM TRBD1191, only if 10GbE LAN
Near end ingress Layer 1 GbE PM 2xGBE_FC and ETHC1000
Near end ingress Layer 2 PM ETHC1000
Near end egress Layer 2 PM ETHC1000

Monitored “side” can be:

- Egress if monitoring is performed on information received from WDM side (WDM -> BW).
- Ingress if monitoring is performed on information received from B&W side (B&W -> WDM).

1 Introduction
1.5 Supported performance monitoring counters
Layers \ Counters UAS ES SES BBE BEC SCS BBU SUS
SDH-RS layer at
2.5 Gbps or 10 Gbps or X X X X
40 Gbps
FEC layer at 10 Gbps or

X X X X X
40 Gbps
Ethernet layer 1
at 1.25 Gbps (GbE)
X X X X
or 10.3125 Gbps (10GbE
LAN)

SDH-RS Layer
UAS (UnAvailable Seconds): a period of unavailable time (UAT) shall begin when 10 consecutives SES
(or SUS) events have been detected. These 10 seconds are considered to be part of the available time.
The UAS counter accumulates over the monitoring period the number of unavailable seconds. A reset is
done at the end of each period. ES, SES and BBE counting is inhibited during the unavailable time.
ES (Erroneous Second): Count of seconds with at least one B1 code violation or with at least one RS
defect.
SES (Severely Erroneous Second): Count of seconds which contains more than 2400 (approximately >
30%) B1 code violation, or at least one RS defect. A SES is also counted as an ES.
BBE (Background Block Error): Count of B1 code violations that do occur out of a SES.
FEC Layer
BEC (Background Error Corrected): count of FEC corrected errors that occurred outside a SCS (result is
divided by 512).
SCS (Severely Corrected Seconds): count of seconds with a FEC layer defect or at least one FEC
uncorrected block or more than 33 538 048 FEC corrected errors (this corresponds to a rate of FEC
corrected errors per second higher then approximately 3E-3).
BBU (Background Block Uncorrected): count of FEC uncorrected blocks that occurred outside a SUS.
SUS (Severely Uncorrected Seconds): count of seconds in which a FEC layer defect occurred or in
which more than 33 538 048 FEC blocks were uncorrected (this corresponds to a rate of FEC corrected
errors per second higher then approximately 3E-3).
Ethernet Layer 1
UAS (UnAvailable Seconds): a period of unavailable time (UAT) shall begin when 10 consecutives SES
(or SUS) events have been detected. These 10 seconds are considered to be part of the available time.
The UAS counter accumulates over the monitoring period the number of unavailable seconds. A reset is
done at the end of each period. ES, SES and BBE counting is inhibited during the unavailable time.
ES (Erroneous Second): Count of seconds with at least one ICG (Invalid Code Group) for Ethernet
1Gb/s, one HCV (Header Code Violation) for Ethernet 10Gb/s or with at least one Ethernet defect.
SES (Severely Erroneous Second): Count of seconds which contains more than 10000 ICG for Ethernet
1Gb/s, more than 255 HCV for Ethernet 10Gb/s or at least one Ethernet. A SES is also counted as an ES.
BBE (Background Block Error): Count of ICG that do occur out of a SES for Ethernet 1Gb/s, count of
HCV that do occur out of a SES for Ethernet 10Gb/s.
1 Introduction
1.5 Supported performance monitoring counters [cont.]
Ethernet layer 2 counters
Counter Meaning
TRCF Total Received Correct Frames
TRCO Total Received Correct Octets
TRSEF Total Received Service errored Frames
TTF Total Transmitted Frames
TTO Total Transmitted Octets
TDF Total Dropped Frames

Ethernet Layer 2
TRCF: Total Received Correct Frames

TRCF counts the number of valid frames received by each Ethernet port.
TRCF sums the number of received unicast, multicast and broadcast frames.
TRCO: Total Received Correct Octets
TRCO counts the number of valid bytes received by each Ethernet port.
TRSEF: Total Received Service Errored Frames
TRSEF counts the number of errored frames received by each Ethernet port.
TTF: Total Transmitted Frames
TTF counts the number of frames transmitted by each Ethernet port.
TTF sums the number of transmitted unicast, multicast and broadcast frames.
TTO: Total Transmitted Octets
TTO counts the number of bytes transmitted by each Ethernet port.
TDF: Total Dropped Frames
TDF counts the number of frames dropped by each Ethernet port.

Notes Page


2 Performance threshold tables management


2.1 Displaying a performance threshold table
1. In Equipment view, choose

Configuration
Performance Threshold
Tables… menu option
2. In the PM Threshold Table
Select window, select one table
3. Click on Display…
Default tables


2.2 Modifying a performance threshold table
Define new
value for
alarm
clearing
threshold
Define new
value for
alarm
raising
threshold
Apply
Define
Severity for
TCA

For quality supervision purposes, the recorded errors through the performance counters can be
compared to threshold levels. If a counter value has crossed a threshold level, a Threshold Crossing
Alarm (TCA) is transmitted to the alarm manager.
The threshold values are defined in threshold tables together with a severity and a flag indicating
whether crossing this value should be notified by an alarm and logged or only stored in the current
problem list. The user can display and modify such tables.
Different thresholds can be assigned for granularity of 15 minutes and 24 hours.
The TCA only reports the value of the counter which has crossed the threshold, it does not provide a
complete set of all counters. Therefore, the user has to explicitly retrieve all current performance
data after receiving the alarm. The user can retrieve this information from a dialog box.
The system behavior concerning the clearance of 15 min. and 24 h TCAs differs:
15 min. (explicit clearance):
A TCA is only indicated once in the alarm manager, even if the same threshold is crossed several
times a day.
TCAs are automatically cleared by the system after one 15 min. interval for which the counter was
below the TCA low threshold.
24 h (implicit clearance):
A TCA is indicated for each interval in which the related threshold has been crossed. The system
implicitly clears TCAs, at the end of the 24 hours (midnight).
For all periods, stopping a PM causes related TCA clearance.

Notes Page


3 Performance Monitoring configuration


3 Performance monitoring configuration
3.1 Creating or deleting a Trail Monitor on a TP
In Equipment view, select one

transponder or concentrator
(TRBD111y1, TRBD4x12, TRBC1111,
TRBC4x12 or 2xGBE_FC)

2. Select the relevant TP (see below)
Monitor Create or Delete
menu option
A Trail Monitor block appears or

disappears beside the selected
TP

Reminder for Trail Monitor creation:
You can create a TM on transmission blocks on … to start PM on … layers
Port#1-OCH and Port#101-ODU2 (TRBD11y1) SDH-RS
Port#1-OCH and Port#101-ODU3 (TRBD4x12) SDH-RS

SDH-RS
(TRBC1111)
SDH-RS
(TRBC4x12)
Port#x-OCH (X=1 to 2) (2xGBE_FC) Ethernet 1Gbits/sec
Deleting a TM stops automatically all PM running on corresponding block.

3.2 Starting a performance monitoring on a TP
In Equipment view, select

one transponder or
concentrator (TRBD111y1, Select a counting period
TRBD4x12, TRBC1111,
TRBC4x12, 2xGBE_FC or
ETHC1000)
Tick to
1. Access to the Transmission start PM
view and select the
2. Choose the Transmission
Performance Keep or set the
Configure Performance Threshold Table
Monitoring menu option configuration
(PM Configuration
window appears) and
operate as shown :
6. Click Apply to confirm
Reminder to start PM on a given monitoring point:
To start PM on … in a … board Select …

TRBD11y1 Port#1-OCH or Port#101-ODU2
TRBD4x12 Port#1-OCH or Port#101-ODU3
Port#x-OCH (x=1 to 4) or
TRBC1111
Port#101-ODU1
SDH / RS
Port#x-OCH (x=1 to 4) or
TRBC4x12
Port#101-ODU2
2xGBE_FC Port#6-RsTTP
ETHC1000 Port#13-RsTTP
TRBD11y1 or TRBD4x12 or
FEC Port#101-OCH
TRBC1111 or TRBC4x12
ETHC1000 Port#x-OCH (x=1 to 9 or 12)
Ethernet 1 Gb/s L1
2xGBE_FC Port#x-OCH (X=1 to 2)
Port#x-OCH (x=1 to 9 or 12) or
Ethernet L2 ETHC1000
Port#13-RSTTP
Ethernet 10 Gb/s L1 TRBD1191 Port#1-OCH
3.3 Stopping a performance monitoring on a TP

one transponder or
concentrator (TRBD111y1,
Select a counting period
TRBD4x12, TRBC1111,
ETHC1000). Untick to
stop PM
1. Access to the Transmission
view and select the
Performance
Configure Performance
Monitoring menu option
(PM Configuration
window appears) and
operate as shown :
6. Click Apply to confirm.

4 Performance data display


4.1 Displaying current data

one transponder or
concentrator (TRBD111y1,
TRBD4x12, TRBC1111,
ETHC1000)
1. Access to the Transmission

view and select the
relevant TP
Performance
Display Current Data
menu option
Example for SDH or Ethernet L1

PM

Administrative State : indicates whether the PM data collection is locked or unlocked. “Locked” means
that historical PM still remains available when PM is stopped.
Operational State : indicates whether PM is enabled or disabled.
Suspect Data : indicates if during the current period, a data collection problem occurred (« Yes » or
« No ») leading to an incomplete or invalid counting period. It can be due to a PM counters reset
action, a NE reset…
Threshold Table : indicates which threshold table is assigned to the entity.
Current Problem List : indicates if counter value thresholds have been crossed during the current period.
Elapsed Time : indicates the time which has elapsed since the monitoring interval was started.
To set to zero all counters in current period, click on Reset.
To update the counter values, click on Refresh. Refresh action is only available on operator request.
Wait at least 20 seconds between 2 Refresh actions.
As soon as Performance Monitoring is started, current PM data are collected.

4.2 Displaying history data
From the Transmission view, select the relevant TP and choose the
Transmission Performance Display History Data menu option

To update the counter values, click on Refresh.
User can have access up to the 16 previous 15-minutes periods and the previous 24H period.

4.3 Displaying Ethernet layer 2 data
To display the Ethernet L2

counters values in “PM
Current Data” window ,
operate as previously
described selecting « 15 min
L2 » tab
Example for Ethernet L2 PM


4.3 Displaying Ethernet layer 2 data [cont.]
To display « Ethernet Maintenance data” operate as follow:

1. Select the relevant TP then Transmission Performance
Display Maintenance Counters
2. Operate as follow:
Select the polling time Launch the polling
Select the number

of retries

This facility on 1320CT is available only when the Local Access is granted.
The polling time possibilities are: 5, 10, 30 and 60 seconds.
The displayed counter values are the difference between the current and the previous ones.

4.4 Displaying Q factor margin
From the Equipment view, choose the Diagnosis Counters menu

option and operate as follow:
Select OTS
Tick counters you want to display
Apply

Based on FEC decoding, Q factor is calculated from measured Bit Error Rate every 5s and 30s.
- In fact, user has access to the margin on Q factor (or “channel margin”). This relative value is given
comparing the “received” Q factor with the minimum Q factor value resulting in a 10-13 BER after FEC
correction.
Not Valid

Exercise
Display the threshold table #3

Modify ES counter settings in threshold table #3
Set the “value up” threshold at 10 (instead of 50)
Change “Warning” severity to major
Connect an SDH analyzer on this Transponder and start measurement
Configure a PM on one transponder
Insert errors from SDH analyzer to crossover ES threshold
Check alarms on TM block
Display current PM data
After two periods of 15 minutes, display historical PM data and check
alarms clearing
Stop PM and delete TM
Set back the table#3 ES threshold to its initial value
Optional
Pad
B&W WDM
TRBD
SDH
Line output
ANALYSER
VOA
Line
input
1620LM

Module Summary
Performance Monitoring applies to

SDH Regeneration Section based on B1
OCH trail based on FEC
Ethernet layer 1 and L2 (ETHC1000 only)
Counting periods are 15 minutes for Ethernet Layer 2, 15 minutes and 24H for
SDH, FEC and Ethernet Layer 1
Alarms may be raised if threshold tables are attached to PM

“Value up” threshold to raise alarms
“Value down” threshold to clear alarms
Threshold Tables to attach can be “by default” or user specific
Performance reports
Current counters
Historical counters
Maintenance data for Ethernet L2
Channel margin



for this module


End of Module
Performance Monitoring


Section 3
NE Maintenance
Module 2
Alarms Handling


Blank Page

NE Maintenance Alarms Handling
Document History

Module Objectives
Handle the alarms raised by the NE





Table of Contents
1 Alarms threshold configuration 7

1.1 Introduction 8
1.2 Displaying an alarm threshold table 9
1.3 Creating an alarm threshold table 10
1.4 Modifying an alarm threshold table 11
1.5 Assigning an alarm threshold table 12
1.6 Deleting an alarm threshold table 13
1.7 Example: FUE alarm threshold management 14
2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting 17
2.1 Alarms in TRBD11y1 Transmission view 18
2.2 Alarms in TRBC1111 Transmission view 21
2.3 Alarms in LOFA11y0 Transmission view 24
2.4 Degree-2 TR-OADM_Reminder 25
2.5 Alarms in Degree-2 TR-OADM_Express channel 26
2.6 Alarms in Degre-2 TR-OADM_AddDrop channel 28
2.7 Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_Reminder 32
2.8 Alarms in Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_Express channel 33
2.9 Alarms in Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_AddDrop channel 35
2.10 Alarms in TRBD4x12_UNI and TRBD1191_NNI Transmission view 38
2.11 Alarms in Line Repeater Transmission view 39
2.12 Alarms in 2xGBE_FC Transmission view 40
2.13 Alarms in ETHC1000 Transmission view 41
2.14 Network view situation – Example 1 42
325
2.15 Network view situation – Example 2 © Alcatel-Lucent 2009
All Rights Reserved 43
2.16
NE Maintenance Network
Alarms Handling view situation – Example 3 44
3 Automatic Power Shutdown 45
3.1 Overview 46
3.2 Laser class 47
3.3 Risks 48
3.4 Laser safety labels 49
3.5 Line Repeater situation – APSD Process 50
3.6 Line Repeater situation – Alarm status 51
3.7 OADM Situation – APSD Process 52
3.8 OADM Situation – Alarm status 53
3.9 APSD management for LOFA boards 54
3.10 APSD management for EMPM1000 board 55
3.11 APSD management for TRBx, 2xGBE_FC and ETHC boards 56
3.12 TRBx shutdown criteria configuration 57
3.13 TRBx shutdown criteria 1 58
3.14 TRBx shutdown criteria 2 59



1 Alarms threshold configuration


1.1 Introduction
An alarm threshold defines triggering points of for alarms such as:

IPL (Input Power loss)
LOMS (Loss Of Multiplex Section)
OPL (Output Power Loss)
IPD (Input Power Degradation)
Alarm threshold configuration apply for the following boards:

Transponders, CMDX, BMDX, OMDX and LOFA
OADC, OCNC, TDMX and WMAN
Each of the above boards are assigned with a default threshold table
which holds the alarm threshold values at port level for IPL, LOMS, OPL,
IPD alarms.
Customized tables can be created and then assigned to one or more board

The default threshold tables cannot be modified.

1.2 Displaying an alarm threshold table
From a Board view (e.g.

LOFA11yz)
1. Choose the Board
Alarm threshold
configuration menu option
2. In the Threshold table list,
select one table and click on
View
3. Click on Cancel to close the
dialog box
4. Back to the Alarm
Threshold Configuration
dialog box, click on Close to
finish.
- Some examples are shown

below:
LOFA
BMDX
CMDX
OMDX

1.3 Creating an alarm threshold table
1. In Equipment view, select one board such as LOFA11yz

3. Choose the Board Alarm threshold configuration menu option
4. In the Threshold table list, select one existing table
5. Click on Clone
6. In the Table name field, define the name of the new table
7. In the Threshold fields, define the new value for each threshold
8. Click on Clone to create the new table
9. Select the new table in Alarm threshold configuration window
10. Click on Apply to assign the new table to the board types that are
displayed in Board type area
Up to 14 alarm threshold tables can be created in the 1626 LM.

1.4 Modifying an alarm threshold table
1. In Equipment view, select one LOFA11yz board
4. In the Threshold table list, select the table to modify
5. Click on Modify
6. In the Threshold fields, define the new value for each threshold
7. Click on Modify to modify the table and close the dialog box

The default table and the current table cannot be modified.

1.5 Assigning an alarm threshold table
From a Board view (e.g.

LOFA11yz)
1. Choose the Board
Alarm threshold
configuration menu option
2. In the Threshold table list,
select the table to assign
3. Click on Apply to confirm
4. Close the window.


1.6 Deleting an alarm threshold table
1. In Equipment view, select one LOFA11yz board
4. In the Threshold table list, select the table to delete
5. Click on Delete
6. Click on Delete to delete the threshold table and close the dialog box

WARNING : The default table and current table cannot be deleted.

1.7 Example: FUE alarm threshold management
1. For a given Transponder supporting FUE alarm (such as TRBD1191), open

the board view and then the Alarm threshold configuration window:
2. Select the current Alarm threshod table then View

3. Get or modify FUE threshold at the bottom of the window
4. Confirm if needed with Confirm

FUE : FEC Uncorrected Errors
The block size managed by the smeraldo ASIC (used in all 10Gbs TRBx of the 1626 LM) is 1020 bits. During
one second there are 10709225316/1020=10499450 blocks.
A specific new alarm (FUE=FEC uncorrected errors) is implemented in R 5; this alarm is raised if the UE
count overcomes a defined threshold in an observation window of 1s.
The FUE default threshold value is 10499451, which corresponds to no alarm in default state.

Exercise
Select a LOFA11yz board

Display the default alarm threshold table
Create a new table and modify the thresholds
Assign it to the board
Assign again the default alarm threshold table to the board
Delete your threshold table
Time allowed :
______ minutes


Notes Page


2 Main transmission alarm troubleshooting


2.1 Alarms in TRBD11y1 Transmission view
CMDX1010
BMDX1000
Line Terminal
TRBD1191
Client
NE 193550 LOFA11y0_T
TRBC1111 Band 6
VOA
Client 1 2
NE 193650
OSCU1010 2 1
LT
VOA
ALCT1010
2 1
194150
LOFA11y0_R
Band 5
TRBD11y1
Transmission
view

Port#1-OGPI:
LOS: Loss Of Signal - The incoming signal is lost on TRBD11y1 User side.
URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable - Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. Can be
an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.
Port#1-OCH:
LOF: Loss Of Frame - The optical signal is received with a non conform content. The frame cannot
be decoded.
AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised
as an AIS. The problem is related to the client network.
Port#1-OCH_TM:
SSF: Server Signal Failure - Relevant in the context of remote network management. In such
context, SSF alarm indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised.
LBER: Low Bit Error Rate - The SDH signal is degraded. 10E-6 LBER threshold is reached or
exceeded.
AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – Alarm meaningless in this context and never raises.
TIM: Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received RS-TTI is not the expected one.
PM-AS: Performance Monitoring-Alarm Synthesis – At least one Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) has
been reached or exceeded.

2.1 Alarms in TRBD11y1 Transmission view [cont.]
CMDX1010
BMDX1000
Line Terminal
TRBD1191
Client
TRBC1111 Band 6
VOA
Client 1 2
NE 193650
OSCU1010 2 1
LT
VOA
ALCT1010
2 1
TRBD11y1
Transmission
194150
LOFA11y0_R
view
Band 5

Port#101-ODU2:
be decoded.
as an AIS. The problem is related to the WDM network.
SSF: Server Signal Failure – Relevant in the context of remote network management. In such
otnTIM: Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received ODU-TTI is not the
expected one.
Port#101-OTU:
otnTIM : Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received OTU-TTI is not
expected one from a remote equipment.
Port#101-OCH:
LTCER: Low Threshold Corrected Error – Indicates a degradation of the transmission via high
correction rate (FEC).
be decoded.
FUE: FEC Uncorrected Errors – The WDM signal is degraded.
PM-AS: Performance Monitoring Alarm Synthesis – At least one Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) has
Port#101-OGPI:
LOS: Loss Of Signal - The incoming signal is lost on TRBD11y1 WDM side.

2.1 Alarms in TRBD11y1 Transmission view [cont.]
CMDX1010
BMDX1000
Line Terminal
TRBD1191
Client
TRBC1111 Band 6
VOA
Client 1 2
NE 193650
OSCU1010 2 1
LT
VOA
ALCT1010
2 1
194150
LOFA11y0_R
Band 5
From TRBD11y1
Transmission
view
5

Port#102-OGPI:
LOW: Loss Of Wavelength - Alarm meaningless in this context and never raises.
LOS: Loss Of Signal - The incoming signal is lost for the MUX/DEMUX.
Port#1-#193550-OMSoch:
URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable - Alarm meaningless in this context and never raises.

2.2 Alarms in TRBC1111 Transmission view
CMDX1010
BMDX1000
Line Terminal
TRBD1191
Client
Band 6 VOA
TRBC1111
1 2
Client
NE 193650
OSCU1010 2 1 LT
ALCT1010 VOA
2 1 TRBC1111
Transmission
194150
Band 5 LOFA11y0_R
view

Port#1-OGPI:
LOS: Loss Of Signal - The incoming signal is lost on TRBC1111 User side.
Port#1-OCH:
be decoded.
Port#1-ODU1:
be decoded.
otnTIM : Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received ODU-TTI is not

2.2 Alarms in TRBC1111 Transmission view [cont.]
CMDX1010
193700
BMDX1000
Line Terminal
TRBD1191
Client
TRBC1111 Band 6
VOA
Client 1 2
NE 193650
OSCU1010 2 1
LT
VOA
ALCT1010
2 1
TRBC1111
Transmission
194150
view
LOFA11y0_R
Band 5

Port#101-ODU2:
be decoded.
expected one.
Port#101-OTU:
Port#101-OCH:
be decoded.
Port#101-OGPI:
LOS: Loss Of Signal - The incoming signal is lost on TRBC1111 WDM side.

2.2 Alarms in TRBC1111 Transmission view [cont.]
CMDX1010
BMDX1000
Line Terminal
TRBD1191
Client
TRBC1111 Band 6
VOA
Client 1 2
NE 193650
LT
OSCU1010 2 1
VOA
ALCT1010
2 1
194150
LOFA11y0_R
Band 5
From TRBC1111
Transmission
view
6

Port#108-OGPI:

2.3 Alarms in LOFA11y0 Transmission view
CMDX1010
BMDX1000
Line Terminal
TRBD1191
Client
TRBC1111 Band 6
VOA
Client 1 2
NE 193650
LT
OSCU1010 2 1
VOA
ALCT1010
2 1
194150
LOFA11y0_R
Band 5
LOFA11y0
Transmission
view
Port#1-OTS:
LOSC: Loss Of Supervisory Channel detected on OSCU receive side
LOSCF: Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame detected on OSCU receive side
LOS: Loss of Signal detected at the input port of the LOFA receiving from the line AND at OSCU
receive side (if OSCU exists)
CSF: Communication Subsystem Failure - LAPD configuration problem.
otnTIM: Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received OTS-TTI is not the
expected one.
Port#1-OMS_A:
LOMS: Loss Of Multiplex Section – The signal payload is lost whereas the supervision signal is
received.
DMS: Degraded Multiplex Section - Alarm not yet available.
Port#1-OMS:

2.4 Degree-2 TR-OADM_Reminder
OCNC1230
OADC0104
Up to 96λ
OSC Up to 96λ OSC

ALCT
D M TR-OADM

(up to 72) (up to 72)
OTS 1 OTS 2
M D
ALCT
Up to 96λ

Up to 96λ
OADC0104
OSC OCNC1230 OSC

2.5 Alarms in Degree-2 TR-OADM_Express channel
OTS 1 Channel 31,5 : Express channel OTS 2
OCNC1230
OADC0104
Up to 80λ
O Up to 80λ OSC
S
ALCT
C
D M
LOFA11y0
Transmission
view

Port#1-OTS:
expected one.
Port#1-OMS_A:
received.
DMS: Degraded Multiplex Section – The alarm is not yet available..
Port#1-OMS:
LOW: Loss Of Wavelength detected at the input port of the OCNC receiving from the line.

2.5 Alarms in Degre-2 TR-OADM_Express channel [cont.]
Channel 31,5 : Express channel
OTS 1 OTS 2
M D
ALCT
Up to 80λ

Up to 80λ
OADC0104
OSC OCNC1230 O
S
C

Port#1-OTS:
expected one.
Port#1-OMS_A:
received.
Port#1-OMS:

2.6 Alarms in Degre-2 TR-OADM_AddDrop channel
OTS 1 Channel 34 : AddDrop channel OTS 2
OCNC1230
Up to
OADC0104
80λ
O Up to 80λ OSC
S ALCT
C
D M
LOFA11y0
Transmission
view

Port#1-OTS:
expected one.
Port#1-OMS_A:
received.
Port#1-OMS:

2.6 Alarms in Degree-2 TR-OADM_AddDrop channel [cont.]
Up to 96λ
1:2 OADC1100
TR-OADM
D
OADC1300
De-multiplexing
part
TDMX1180 1:8
193400
TRBD
Client
NE

LOW: Loss Of Wavelength - Loss Of Wavelength detected at the input port of the OCNC receiving
from the line.
URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable - Underlying Resource Unavailable - Indicates that an NE
internal failure has occurred. Can be an hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.
Port#2-OGPI:
LOS: Loss Of Signal - The incoming signal is lost on TDMX1180 channel port side.

Port#101-OGPI:


Up to 96λ
1:2 OADC1100
TR-OADM
D
OADC1300
De-multiplexing
part
TDMX1180 1:8
193400
TRBD
TRBD11y1
Transmission
Client
NE
view

-Port#101-ODU2:
be decoded.
expected one.
Port#101-OTU:
Port#101-OCH:
be decoded.
Port#101-OGPI:

WMAN3174 TR-OADM
OADC1750 Up to 4λ
M
4:1 4:1
Multiplexing
part
193400
TRBD
Client
NE
TRBD11y1
Transmission
view

Port#1-OGPI:
Port#1-OCH:
be decoded.

2.7 Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_Reminder
OADC0104
Express
OSC ADD OSC

ALCT
LOFA1110
CMDX 1
2 VOA 1
R-OADM
To/from TRBD /
TRBC (up to 8)
BMDX1000
CMDX 1
BMDX1000
To/from TRBD /
CMDX 12
TRBC (up to 8)
1 VOA 2
LOFA1110
To/from TRBD /
TRBC (up to 8)
To/from TRBD /
CMDX 12
TRBC (up to 8)
OTS 1 OTS 2
ALCT
ADD

Express


terms of remote configuration of the node. In particular, any change in the association between the
transponders and the WDM channels requires on-site interventions.
The node architecture is similar to the one of the TR-OADM: the optical amplifiers, the splitter card
providing multi-directionality (OCNC) and the WMAN3 are in the same logical position. The changes
are in the add and drop parts: both are based on fixed Mux/Demux BMDX1000 + CMDX. The fixed
Mux/Demux provide an overall insertion loss for the add and drop parts lower than that of the T&R-
OADM node, fully based on non-filtering splitters and couplers; this allows to dedicate just one port
of the WMAN3 to the whole added traffic and to strongly reduce the number of optical amplifier
necessary within the node.

2.8 Alarms in Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_Express channel
OTS 1 Channel 29 : Express channel OTS 2
OADC0104
Express
ADD OSC
O
S ALCT
LOFA1110
CMDX 1
2 VOA 1
C BMDX1000
LOFA11y0
Transmission
view

Port#1-OTS:
expected one.
Port#1-OMS_A:
received.
Port#1-OMS:

2.8 Alarms in Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_Express channel [cont.]
Channel 29 : Express channel
CMDX 1
BMDX1000
To/from TRBD /
TRBC (up to 8)
1 VOA 2
LOFA1110
OTS 1 OTS 2
ALCT
ADD

Express

OSC Up to 80λ at 40Gb/s OCNC1230 O
S
C

LOW: Loss Of Wavelength - Loss Of Wavelength detected at the input port of the OCNC receiving
from the line.
Port#1-OTS:
expected one.
Port#1-OMS_A:
received.
Port#1-OMS:

2.9 Alarms in Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_AddDrop channel
Channel 34,5 : AddDrop channel
OTS 1 LOFA11y0_Unidir Up to 96λ at 10Gb/s
Express
1 VOA 2 WMAN3174
OSC ADD
LOFA1110
2 VOA 1
CMDX
TRBD1191
BMDX1000
Client
NE 193450
TRBD11y1
Transmission
view

Port#1-OGPI:
Port#1-OCH:
be decoded.
Port#101-ODU2:
be decoded.
expected one.

2.9 Alarms in Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_AddDrop channel [cont.]
Express
1 VOA 2 WMAN3174
OSC ADD
LOFA1110
2 VOA 1
CMDX
TRBD1191
BMDX1000
Client
NE 193450

Port#101-ODU2:
be decoded.
expected one.
Port#101-OTU:
Port#101-OCH:
be decoded.
Port#101-OGPI:

2.9 Alarms in Degree-2 ROADM (WSS based)_AddDrop channel [cont.]
Express
1 VOA 2 WMAN3174
OSC ADD
LOFA1110
2 VOA 1
CMDX
TRBD1191
BMDX1000
Client
NE 193450

Port#102-OGPI:
URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable - Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. Can be an
hardware failure or an internal cabling failure.
LOW: Loss Of Wavelength - Loss Of Wavelength detected at the input port of the OCNC receiving from the
line.
Port#1-OTS:
LOS: Loss of Signal detected at the input port of the LOFA receiving from the line AND at OSCU receive side
(if OSCU exists)
otnTIM: Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received OTS-TTI is not the expected one.
Port#1-OMS_A:
LOMS: Loss Of Multiplex Section – The signal payload is lost whereas the supervision signal is received.
DMS: Degraded Multiplex Section – The alarm is not yet available.
Port#1-OMS:
SSF: Server Signal Failure – Relevant in the context of remote network management. In such context, SSF
alarm indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised.
AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS.
The problem is related to the WDM network.

2.10 Alarms in TRBD4x12_UNI and TRBD1191_NNI Transmission view
TRBD4x12_UNI TRBD1191_NNI
Transmission Transmission
view view

Port#1-OGPI:
Port#1-OCH:
LOF: Loss Of Frame - The optical signal is received with a non conform content. The frame cannot be
decoded.
AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS.
The problem is related to the client network.
Port#101-OTU:
otnTIM : Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received TTI is not expected one from a
remote equipment. Wrong configuration of OUT section.
Port#101-OCH:
LTCER: Low Threshold Corrected Error – Indicates a degradation of the transmission via high correction rate
(FEC).
decoded.
FUE: Fec Uncorrected Errors – The WDM signal is degraded.
PM-AS: Performance Monitoring Alarm Synthesis – At least one Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) has been
reached or exceeded.
Port#101-OGPI:
URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable - Equipment failure (RUP, RUM, RUTM) detected on TRBD board.

2.11 Alarms in Line Repeater Transmission view
LOFA11y0_Unidir
1 VOA 2
To/from To/from
LR
OSC OSC
WDM WDM
line line
2 VOA 1
LOFA11y0
OSC OSC Transmission
LOFA11y0_Unidir view

Port#1-OTS:
expected one.
Port#1-OMS_A:
received.
DMS: Degraded Multiplex Section – The alarm is not yet available.

2.12 Alarms in 2xGBE_FC Transmission view
2xGBE_FC board
User side
*
Front side
#1 GE or FC #2 GE or FC
#1 GFP-T #2
Mapping
VC-4-6/7v VC-4-6/7v
Virtual
Concatenation
Concentration in STM 16 or OC 48
(Bridge & Switch)
SFP SFP
Line #1 Line #2
Not used in
1626 LM R5.0 Front side


2.13 Alarms in ETHC1000 Transmission view
ETHC1000 board
User side *
#1 GE #12 GE
VLAN tagging
#xx #yy
Ethernet layer 2
10GE WAN 10GE WAN
Line P#13 Line P#14
Matrix Back
plane
access
10GE WAN 10GE WAN
XFP P#13 XFP P#14
Line #1 Line #2
Front side Front side


2.14 Network view situation – Example 1
IPL (1st stage
SSF
1 LOS
(port#1-OTS) 2
input) (minimum
attenuation 5 SSF
(port#1-OMS) 6 (port#101-
reached) ODU2)
CMDX1010 CMDX1010
BMDX1000
OMS Trail
TRBD1111 LOFA11y0_T LOFA11y0_R
Client VOA VOA Client

NE 1 2 1 2 NE
ODU2 Trail
TRBD1111
4 - SD 4 - SD 3 - SD
LOFA11y0_R LOFA11y0_T
VOA VOA
ALCT1010
2 1 2 1 ALCT1010
3 - SD 4 - SD 4 - SD
OTS
Physical
connection
BMDX1000
IPL (1st stage

SSF input) (minimum
6 (port#101- 5 SSF 2 attenuation 1 LOS
(port#1-OTS)
ODU2) (port#1-OMS)
reached)

IPL: Input Power Loss.

COCE: Configuration Or Customization Error.
SSF: Server Signal Failure.
LOS: Loss Of Signal.

AIS
1 LOS 2 IPL
(client input) 3 (port#101-
(port#1-OGPI) ODU2)
CMDX1010 CMDX1010
BMDX1000 BMDX1000
ODU2 Trail
LOFA11y0_T LOFA11y0_R

NE 1 2 1 2 NE
TRBD1111 TRBD1111
OpS
Physical
connection
VOA VOA
ALCT1010
2 1 2 1 ALCT1010
OTS Physical connection


AIS: Alarm Indication Signal.

1 LOS
(port#10x-OGPI)
2 IPL
(mux input x)
CMDX1010 CMDX1010
BMDX1000 BMDX1000
LOFA11y0_T LOFA11y0_R
TRBD1111 TRBD1111
NE 1 2 1 2 NE
OpS
Physical
connection
VOA VOA
ALCT1010
2 1 2 1 ALCT1010
OTS Physical connection



3 Automatic Power Shutdown


3.1 Overview
What : Safety procedure
Why : Human eye damage risk in case of fibre break due to high
power outgoing the device (≈ 23dBm)
Where : On LOFA
Two cases : Line with and without OADM
How : Automatic laser pump shutdown when LOS detected
The APSD complies with IEC 60825 1 & 2 and ITU-T G.664
recommendations. - For more details, refer to the relevant
« Technical handbook » such as 3AL 75138 EAAA Ed1.

Optical safety: general rules

On handling optical equipment or units or cables always check that laser labels are properly affixed
and that the system complies with applicable optical standards.
DANGER! Possibility of eyes damage: invisible infrared radiations emitted by the fiber optic
transmitters can cause eyes damages. Carefully observe the specific procedures for installation /
turn-up and commissioning / maintenance of units containing laser devices or cables transporting
optical signals, described in the relevant installation / turn-up and commissioning / maintenance
documents and the following general rules:
1. Laser radiation is not visible by the naked eye or with laser safety glasses. Although it cannot be
seen, laser radiation may be present.
2. Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable,
unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
3. Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable or connector, unless it is absolutely known that no laser
radiation is present.
4. All optical connectors, terminating either fibers and transmitters/receivers, are provided with
protective covers that must always be used, as soon as possible, when any optical link is
disconnected for installation/test/maintenance purposes or whatever operation.
5. Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable
by means of magnifiers/microscopes, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
A magnifier/microscope greatly increases the damage hazard to the eyes.
6. Never point an unterminated optical fiber splice, cable or connector to other persons, unless it is
absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
7. Always remove electrical power from near and far optical transmitters before disconnecting optical
links between the transmitter and the receiver.
8. Wearing of laser safety goggles or eyes shields is recommended for every person working on optical
devices, whenever the above listed rules cannot be followed.
3.2 Laser class
The International Electro technical Commission IEC825:

Gives the safety recommendations.
Grades laser in 5 classes according to their risk.
Power (mW)
1000
Class 4
100
10
Class 3B
1
Class 3A
0.1
0.01 Class 2
0.001
Class 1
Wavelength
(nm)
400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600

Telecom laser domain

Class
1 3A 3B 4
10 17 27 dBm
1550nm
(10) (50) (500) (mW)
9.5 15 27 dBm
1300nm
(10) (32) (500) (mW)
-4 +2.5 27 dBm
850nm
(0.4) (2) (500) (mW)

3.3 Risks
Class 1 No hazard if used in normal conditions*.

* If you do not look directly and closely at the laser beam.
Class 2 Only concerns the band ranging from 400 to 700nm.
No hazard if used in normal conditions, except if you

Class 3A use optical appliances (binoculars, microscope,
monocular, etc.).
Class 3B Hazard if you look directly at the laser beam.
Class 4 Hazard for eye and skin, fire risk.

dBm Definition
dBm is defined as power ratio in decibel (dB) referenced to one milliwatt (mW). It is an abbreviation
for dB with respect to 1 mW and the "m" in dBm stands for milliwatt.
dBm is different from dB. dBm represents absolute power, whereas dB is a ratio of two values and is
used to represent gain or attenuation. For example, 3 dBm means 2 mW, and 3 dB means a gain of 2.
Similarly, -3 dBm means 0.5 mW, whereas -3 dB means attenuation of 2.
The formula to calculate dBm from mW is:
dBm = 10 log10( P )
1mW

3.4 Laser safety labels
Indications given on panels and safety interlockers:

Optical Safety compliance with European Norms

Compliancy to Optical Safety Norms is declared in that the equipment satisfies
standardized Norms:
• EN 60825-1 ed.1994 + A11 ed.1996 + A2 ed.2001
• IEC 60825-1 ed.1993 + A2 ed. 2001 (1999)
• EN 60825-2 ed.2000
• IEC 60825-2 ed.2000
Hazard Level classification and standards

The classification refers to the IEC 60825 Standard (with amendments 1 & 2).
This recommendation defines 4 HAZARD LEVELs for optical fiber applications in third
window (1500 - 1800 nm):
• HAZARD LEVEL 1, for optical power below +10mW (10dBm)
• HAZARD LEVEL 1M, for optical power in [10mW; 136mW] (10dBm to 21,3dBm)
• HAZARD LEVEL 3B, for optical power in [136mW; 500mW] (21,3dBm to 27dBm)
• HAZARD LEVEL 4, for optical power higher than 500mW (>27dBm).
G.664 standard defines the optical safety mechanisms:

• Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS): Procedure to automatically shutdown the output
power of laser transmitters and to avoid exposure to hazardous levels
• Automatic Power ShutDown (APSD): Procedure to automatically shutdown the output
power of optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.

3.5 Line Repeater situation – APSD Process
No signal
LOFA_T_1 LOFA_W_E LOFA_R_2
1 2 3 4 5 6
SD SD
Section 1 Section 2
LT1 Repeater LT2
SD SD
12 11 10 9 8 7
LOFA_R_1 LOFA_E_W LOFA_T_2
No signal

After the fiber cut in section 1, first stage of LOFA_W_E detects a LOS. As a consequence, this LOFA
shuts down his first stage and then sends a shutdown command to the opposite LOFA (LOFA_E_W)
through the back panel. Because there is no amplification anymore in Repeater towards the LT1, the
signal received at LOFA_R_1 becomes very low (attenuated by sections 1 and 2). This very low level
is considered as a LOS. Therefore, LOFA_R_1 acts as LOFA_W_E, shutting down his first stage and
sending also a shutdown command to opposite LOFA (LOFA_T_1).

3.6 Line Repeater situation – Alarm status
No signal LOS LOMS No traffic
LOFA_T_1 LOFA_W_E LOFA_R_2
1 2 3 4 5 6
SD SD
Section 1 Section 2
LT1 Repeater LT2
SD SD
12 11 10 9 8 7
LOFA_R_1 LOFA_E_W LOFA_T_2
LOMS No traffic

At the LOFA_W_E input, Optical Supervisory Channel and WDM channels are not detected because of
the fibre cut in Section 1, causing the LOS alarm. At the LOFA_R_2 input, Optical Supervisory
Channel and some power (noise) in the WDM window are detected, explaining the absence of LOS
alarm but LOMS is raised.
At the LOFA_R_1 input, power corresponding to the WDM window is below the acceptable level,
because of the total shutdown of LOFA_E_W. Nevertheless, Optical Supervisory Channel is not
impacted, being independent on amplification. As a consequence, LOFA_R_1 raises a LOMS alarm.

3.7 OADM Situation – APSD Process
No signal
LOFA_T_1 LOFA_R_W LOFA_T_E LOFA_R_2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SD SD
Section 1 Section 2
LT1 OADM LT2
SD SD
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
LOFA_R_1 LOFA_T_W LOFA_R_E LOFA_T_2
No signal

In case of OADM, APSD will work in the way and will result in the same situation after a fibre cut
occurring in section 1.

3.8 OADM Situation – Alarm status
on TRBx for all

pass-through channels
No signal LOS SSF
LOFA_T_1 LOFA_R_W LOFA_T_E LOFA_R_2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SD SD
Section 1 Section 2
LT1 OADM LT2
SD SD
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
LOFA_R_1 LOFA_T_W LOFA_R_E LOFA_T_2
LOMS No Traffic

At the LOFA_R_2 input, we receive the added channels in OADM going through LOFA_T_E and the
Optical Supervisory Channel. Assuming that the multiplex power is higher than the Degraded level,
there is no alarm on this LOFA_R_2. Though channels coming from LT1 going to LT2 are lost in
section 1, resulting in LOW alarms in all corresponding transponders of LT2.
Because of LOFA_T_W total shutdown, there is no acceptable WDM signal power anymore detected at
the LOFA_R_1 input, the Optical Supervisory Channel being the only one signal detected, hence the
LOMS alarm on LOFA_R_1.

3.9 APSD management for LOFA boards
To get and modify the APSD state, operate as follow from the board
view:
1. Select Board APSD configuration…
2. Select a LOFA stage then Configuration
3. Modify the configuration if needed
4. Clik OK to confirm or close


3.10 APSD management for EMPM1000 board
To get and modify the APSD state, operate as follow from the board
view:
1. Select Board APSD configuration…
2. Modify the configuration if needed
3. Click OK to confirm or close

The control board in EMPM1000 includes logical control of laser shutdown command. It polls the signal on
backplane (GEN_APSD, LOS_2MBPS, BOFA/LOFA_SD) and the SPIDER according to loaded configuration
(enabling signals) generates the shutdown commands. A Software shutdown command is also available.
The optical input detects the presence of an optical signal coming from defined optical ports within the
1626LM equipment (see installation handbook for the detailed connection descriptions), the APSD
functionality is triggered when no optical signal is detected.

3.11 APSD management for TRBx, 2xGBE_FC and ETHC boards
To get and modify the APSD state, operate as follow:

1.Open the Transmission view of the board
2.Select the OGPI block
3.Select Transmission APSD configuration…
4.Modify the configuration if needed:
- Disable or Laser Forced Off
5.Clik OK to confirm or close

This APSD state is obtained when the when the Transponder has been declared with Line State = OFF

3.12 TRBx shutdown criteria configuration
To get and modify the

TRBD/TRBC shutdown
criteria, operate as follow:
1. Open the Transmission
view of the board
2. Select the port#x-OGPI
(User side)
3. Select Transmission
Shutdown criteria
configuration
4. Identify the current
configuration and / or
modify if needed
5. Clik OK to confirm or
close
Not available on TRBD1131

Incoming alarms -A group of specific WDM incoming Radio button: On

alarms that can be raised from the - The associated Incoming Alarms
transmission blocks of TRBC/TRBD / Action is selected
boards.
- By default the first group is
- For each group of alarms selected
corresponds a set of 3 associated Radio button: Off
actions - The associated Incoming Alarms
/ action is not selected
Action - Defines the resultant consequence AIS
on the signal if one of the incoming - AIS (Alarm Indicator Signal) is
alarm is raised. inserted toward client/user side.
SHUTDOWN
- If one of the corresponding
alarms is raised, the client/user
side laser is shutdown.
TRANSPARENT
- The signal flows without any
change.

3.13 TRBx shutdown criteria 1
User WDM
TRBD
GEN_AIS

Port#101-ODU2:
LOF: Loss Of Frame - The optical signal is received with a non conform content. The frame cannot be decoded.
AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as an AIS. The
problem is related to the WDM network.
SSF: Server Signal Failure – Relevant in the context of remote network management. In such context, SSF alarm
indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised.
otnTIM: Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received ODU-TTI is not the expected one.
PM-AS: Performance Monitoring-Alarm Synthesis – At least one Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) has been reached
or exceeded.
Port#101-OTU:
otnTIM : Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received OTU-TTI is not expected one from
a remote equipment.
Port#101-OCH:
LTCER: Low Threshold Corrected Error – Indicates a degradation of the transmission via high correction rate
(FEC).
LOF: Loss Of Frame - The optical signal is received with a non conform content. The frame cannot be decoded.
PM-AS: Performance Monitoring Alarm Synthesis – At least one Threshold Crossing Alarm (TCA) has been reached
or exceeded.
Port#101-OGPI:
URU: Underlying Resource Unavailable - Indicates that an NE internal failure has occurred. Can be an hardware
failure or an internal cabling failure.
The generic AIS [STM-AIS] is a new maintenance signal at STM-N level
a continuous repeating 2047-bit PN-11 (1 + x9 + x11) sequence
In existing SDH equipment, the generic AIS is detected as a STM-LOF.

3.14 TRBx shutdown criteria 2
User WDM
TRBD
SD

Port#101-ODU2:
decoded.
AIS: Alarm Indication Signal – A remote network element delivers a fault indication which is raised as
an AIS. The problem is related to the WDM network.
SSF: Server Signal Failure – Relevant in the context of remote network management. In such context,
SSF alarm indicates the operator that a primary transmission alarm has been raised.
expected one.
Port#101-OTU:
otnTIM : Optical Transport Network Trace Identifier Mismatch – The received OTU-TTI is not expected
one from a remote equipment.
Port#101-OCH:
decoded.
Port#101-OGPI:

Discover
After Trainer has generated various faults on the training equipment

(fiber disconnection, board removal, wrong trace identifier,…), identify
the corresponding alarms raised by the NE
Give an explanation for each resulting alarm
Time allowed :
______ minutes



for this module


End of Module
Alarms Handling


Section 3
NE Maintenance
Module 3
Boards Replacement


Blank Page

NE Maintenance Boards Replacement
Document History

Module Objectives
Replace any board, belonging to Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R5.0A, respecting

the safety rules and applying the appropriate procedure





Table of Contents
1 Board handling 7
1.1 Tools 8
1.2 Board extraction 9
1.3 Board insertion 10
2 Board replacement procedures 13
2.1 Overview 14
2.2 Replacing the master ESCT2000 board 15
2.3 Replacing the Mass Memory on the ESCT2000 board 16
2.4 Replacing a PSUP unit 17




1 Board handling


1 Board handling
1.1 Tools
For boards without levers

Electrostatic discharge cable
For SFP modules


Tool : any time you handle a board, you should use the electrostatic discharge cable, this one being
connected to the rack earth, to avoid any damage due to potential electrical discharge from your
body into the board.
Tool : this metallic rod must be used to extract boards without levers such as RAIU, PSUP…Normally,
this tool is located at the rear of each shelf cover.
Tool : this tool must be used to remove / insert SFP modules from/ in 2xGE_FC or ETHC1000 boards.
XFP modules do not need any tool to be removed / inserted. They are equipped with a built-in lever.

1 Board handling
1.2 Board extraction
Use the electrostatic discharge cable
Verify that each optical fiber is labeled
Disconnect cables on the board faceplate
Use caps on optical fibers to avoid dust exposure
Remove screws fixing the board to the shelf
Extract the board
or


1 Board handling
1.3 Board insertion
Use the electrostatic discharge cable

Pre-set the board by aligning this one in the
orange rail
Open the levers
Push the board on the front panel and check
at the end that levers
(if present) are pre-set


1 Board handling
1.3 Board insertion [cont.]
Close the levers (if present) to
complete board insertion
Screw the board to the shelf
Reconnect cables on the board
Before connecting fibre to the board, make sure there is no dust on optical
connector, using a scope. Clean until there is no dust spot anymore on the optical
surface

Forbidden operations for unit insertion :

Do not push just on one lever only
Do not force the units
Avoid impact during board handling
Avoid impact on adjacent boards during board insertion

Notes Page


2 Board replacement procedures


2 Procedures
2.1 Overview
Use the same board type Master ESCT card and Mass
Refer to the Part Number Memory
ON/OFF dip switches on board
MIB Restore/Activate
Software download
PSUP
TRU –48V power switch
No need to reconfigure the slot Other boards

Software and slot configuration No specific procedure
automatically downloaded

Most of the boards in 1626LM do not need any specific procedure to be replaced. Operators just have
to follow the safety rules regarding the board handling (see previous chapter) .
Furthermore, there is no need of slot reconfiguration and software download. This will be done
automatically by the EC function through SC function.
In the case of a Master ESCT2000 / Mass Memory or PSUP1000 replacement, Operators should follow a
specific procedure (see after).

2.2 Replacing the master ESCT2000 board
Yes No
Does the Mass Memory work properly ?
Unplug the ESCT2000 from the master shelf

Take a new ESCT2000 with a new Mass
Memory loaded with the same software release
Remove the Mass Memory from the broken ESCT
Set the dipswitch #1 to ON and #2 to ON

Take a new ESCT2000
Plug in the new ESCT2000 in the master shelf
Put the Mass Memory on the new ESCT2000.
Check that dipswitches are set to OFF Wait for the communication is restored
(EC LED is red, SC LED is green)
Plug the new ESCT2000 in the master shelf
Configure Comm./Routing parameters, Restore a
NE backup and Activate it.
Wait for the communication is restored
(EC and SC LEDs are green)
Start Supervision and open the
Set all dipswitches to OFF and plug the ESCT2000 back
Equipment view to check database

The ESCT2000 board located in the master shelf supports a Flash memory (8GB) containing Software applications
and NE data base.
DIP SWITCHES CONFIGURATION :

1 ON / 2 OFF : Clear the hardware configuration and the Communication& Routing parameters. EC
communication with any SC is disabled.
1 OFF / 2 ON : Clear the hardware configuration and upload Communication & Routing parameters. EC
communication with any SC is disabled.
1 ON / 2 ON : In Testing mode, the communication and routing physical database is not backed up on the EEPROM.
EC communication with any SC is disabled. Once the configuration is checked to be convenient for the NE
configuration, the DIP SWITCH position should go to the Normal position. This mode is used to check if a
configuration is ready to be applied.
1 OFF / 2 OFF : Normal position.
Local Configuration Data (communication and routing parameters) are located both in NE Database (Flash
memory) and in an external media (EEPROM).
The NE Database is a logical database which aggregates several physical databases. There is a database for the
Hardware Equipment Configuration, the Performance Monitoring, and for Communication and Routing topics.
The EEPROM stores all the necessary data to keep supervision of the NE (communication and routing parameters)
even if the physical database is damaged.
The Local Configuration (communication and routing parameters) is duplicated in the physical database for
commodity (2 storage areas are dedicated to communication and routing parameters in the physical database).
Actually each time the NE restarts, the content of the Local Configuration of the physical database is backed up
and the EEPROM content is erased by this backup.
The Local Configuration Data (communication and routing parameters) in EEPROM is always rewritten by the Local
Configuration backed up from the physical database when the NE restarts.
The EEPROM media is used as a persistency reference of the Local Configuration Data.

2.3 Replacing the Mass Memory on the ESCT2000 board
Yes Is there a Mass Memory configured in a No

Dummy NE with the last NE configuration ?

and remove the Mass Memory
Put a new Mass Memory loaded with the
same software release on the ESCT
Remove the Mass Memory from the ESCT
Set the dipswitch #1 to ON and #2 to ON
Put the new Mass Memory with the NE

Plug in the ESCT2000 in the master shelf
configuration, on the ESCT

(EC LED is red, SC LED is green)
Plug the ESCT2000 in the master shelf
Configure Comm./Routing parameters, Restore a NE

backup and Activate it.
(EC and SC LEDs are green)
Start Supervision and open the
Set all dipswitches to OFF and plug the ESCT2000 back
Equipment view to check database

This block
This switch

2.4 Replacing a PSUP unit
1. Ensure that the second PSUP board is inserted, works properly, has
no active alarms and the green LED is lit
Do not plug out any PSUP boards or disconnect any power cable before switching
off the related circuit breaker in the TRU! This can cause a flashover at the PSUP
board power connectors or at the backplane pins.
2. Turn off the power of the PSUP board to be replaced. Therefore

switch off the related circuit breaker in the TRU
3. Disconnect the power cable on the front side
4. Plug out the faulty PSUP board and remove it
5. Plug in the new PSUP board
6. Connect the power cable on the front side
7. Turn on the power of the new PSUP board. Therefore switch on the
related circuit breaker in the TRU
8. Check that the green LEDs of both PSUP boards are lit


Notes Page


Exercise 1
Proceed to a PSUP replacement on your NE without completely turning

off the corresponding shelf, following the appropriate procedure
Use the installed PSUP as a spare
____ minutes


Exercise 2
Make a backup of your NE

if not already done
Connect a SDH tester to one transponder at least and run traffic
through your NE
Replace the Flash memory of your NE following the appropriate
procedure
Use a spare Flash memory if possible.
At the end of the procedure, make sure that traffic was not disrupted
and NE configuration is compliant with the original one
Put back the original Flash memory in your NE
______ minutes



for this module


End of Module
Boards Replacement


Section 4
SPLM Operation
Module 1
SPLM Overview


Blank Page

SPLM Operation SPLM Overview
Document History

Module Objectives
Describe the SPLM tool and get started on SPLM workspace





Table of Contents
1 SPLM description 7
1.1 1626 LM management _ Reminder 8
1.2 Introduction 9
1.3 SPLM architecture 10
2 Getting started on SPLM workspace 11
2.1 Getting the workspace 12
2.2 Main window description 13




1 SPLM description


1 SPLM description
1.1 1626 LM management _ Reminder
1350 OMS
Three software applications SPLM
can be used to operate and
maintain the WDM network :
1320 CT
1350 OMS DCN
DCN
SPLM Tool GNE Q3
DCC/OSC BtB DCC/OSC
BtB WDM
Metro ring network

F LR
SPLM BOADM
1320 CT DCC/OSC DCC/OSC
Each NE can be managed either locally through F interface with a 1320 Craft Terminal or remotely
through Q3 interface with an Operation System : 1353 Node Manager and 1354 Regional Manager. In
latter case, the directly connected NE to OS (via a LAN or a DCN) is known as Gateway NE.
When connected to a NE via F or Q3 interface, it is possible to reach any other NE belonging to the same
optical sub-system via two “out-of-band” Data Communication Channels, carried by the OSC :
OMS-DCC terminated in terminals and OADM (3 bytes)
OTS- DCC terminated in all equipment (9 bytes)
In addition to DCC, the supervision frame carried by the OSC can also transport one EOW (voice channel)
and one 64kb/s auxiliary data channel. A User Data Channel at 2Mbit/s (G.703) between each NE is
available for any purpose, carried also by the OSC.
Most of the time, when a Network Element is under 1353 NM control (and eventually 1354 RM control),
the 1320 CT operator can only display the equipment configuration, the cross-connections and the
alarms status. No modification can be done from the 1320 CT in this case.
“Full access” (display and modification rights) from 1320 CT can be “Requested” by the 1320 CT
operator (in case of urgent needs during a DCN problem for instance) or “Granted” by the 1353 NM
operator.

optimization for a given photonic subnetwork. SPLM is integrated in the 1350OMS from NR9.1 (1626LM
R5.0A), SPLM is also available as a side application of the Craft-Terminal from 1626LM R5.0.

1 SPLM description
1.2 Introduction

The Alcatel-Lucent Smart Photonic Layer Manager is a GUI-based tool
dedicated to optical line optimization for a given photonic subnetwork.
SPLM tool is co-hosted with 1320 CT on a PC or with 1350 OMS on a server.
In the current release the SPLM:

provides a network topology management function,
calculates and displays the available channel margin for each channel,
tunes the output power of WSS based boards for TR-OADM and ROADM (WSS based)
configurations.
With SPLM you can:

manage a graphical representation of the optical network with the ability of
displaying OTS, OMS and OCH layers,
identify the channels to be monitored,
anticipate the required tuning tasks to avoid any transmission service disruption
when BER becomes too high and FEC does not correct transmission errors,
tune the optical spectrum to be as flat as possible at terminal, ROADM (WSS based)
and TR-OADM nodes, via APE process.

The « Subnetworks » are managed as « Lines » in the SPLM GUI.

1 SPLM description
1.3 SPLM architecture
* 1626LM R 5.0A
is managed by
1350 OMS and not
by 1353NM /
1354RM
*

The SPLM is made up with the following set of functional blocks :

TM (Topology Management) : it provides features allowing to manage the photonic network topology.
LO (Line Optimization) : it provides the features allowing the optimization of physical parameters
along the photonic line. It implements the following groups of features :
APE Sequencer, used to optimize meshed photonic lines.
APA Sequencer (Next Release) : APA (and CTR) global optimization algorithms executed in an
automatic way.
Line Tuning, providing a set of global commands applicable to the photonic line, and usable by any
other block or directly by the SPLM USM (especially used by APA Sequence or APE Sequencer).
LC (Line Commissioning) (Next Release) : it provides the features allowing to manage the photonic
line automatic commissioning. This module is able to parse a LDT file, check the compliancy of its
content with the NE current data, display it and allow the modifications of some parameters by the
operator, and apply the parameters to the NEs of the photonic line, with respect to a given sequence
of operations, defined in the Commissioning handbook.
FL (Fault Location) (Next Release) : it provides features allowing to diagnose Root Alarm (Alarm
correlation) of a trail or to diagnose the different parts of the trail to find the faulty part.

2 Getting started on SPLM workspace


2 Getting started on SPLM Workspace
2.1 Getting the workspace
From 1320 CT PC desktop double click on the SPLM icon and login as
follow:
Login: “Operator”
Password: “operator”


2.2 Main window description

Area # Description
1 Menu Bar: The area where all action menus and submenus are available.
2 Resource Tree: The area where the subnetwork components are graphically
represented in a hierarchical tree structure.
3 General Information Status: The area where operation status are displayed
for the selected operation entity:
• Node
• Physical link/OMS trail/ OCH group
• Subnetwork

2.2 Main window description [cont.]
7
Area # Description
4 Network Displaying Tools: The area where network displaying tool icons are
available.
5 Network Map: The map which displays a graphical representation of the
photonic subnetwork nodes.
6 Graphic Tools: Icons which activate management tasks.
7 SPLM Software Manager Status: A graphical representation of the
connection
status between SPLM GUI and SPLM manager process.
Node connection states colour convention:

Red: SPLM cannot reach the node
Orange: the node is not connected to SPLM
Green: he node is connected to SPLM
SPLM Manager Connection States

Red: SPLM software manager is stopped
Yellow: SPLM software manager is running. SPLM GUI is not connected to the SPLM manager process
Green: SPLM software manager is running. SPLM GUI is connected to the SPLM manager process



From Components menu option, several lists are available :

- Filtering area is available on the left side

- Making a right click on any column header, it is possible to customize the list:

From any list

such as Physical
Links Manager a
Print button is
available.
The operator
can select
one of the
printers
already
installed on
the PC.


Notes Page



for this module


End of Module
SPLM Overview


Section 4
SPLM Operation
Module 2
Topology Management


Blank Page

SPLM Operation Topology Management
Document History

Module Objectives
Setup the relevant SPLM configuration





Table of Contents
1 Photonic Network construction 7

1.1 Topology processing rules 8
1.2 Photonic Network example 9
1.3 Managing the map background 10
1.4 Calibrating a map _ Step 1 11
1.7 Calibrating a map _ Steps 4 & 5 14
1.8 Displaying the Photonic Line list 15
1.9 Declaring a Photonic Line 16
1.10 Deleting a Photonic Line 17
1.11 Displaying the Node list 18
1.12 Declaring and uploading a Node 19
1.13 Displaying Node information 20
1.14 Modifying or deleting a Node 21
1.15 Adding Node in a Photonic Line 22
1.16 Creating a Physical Link between two nodes 23
1.17 Showing boards for a Physical Link 25
1.18 Deleting a Physical Link 26
2 Photonic Line life cycle management 29
2.1 Displaying general information for a Photonic Line 30
2.2 Synchronizing a Photonic Line 31
2.3 Validating a Photonic Line 32
425
2.4 Main resources managed in a Photonic All Rights ReservedLine
© Alcatel-Lucent 2009 33
2.5
SPLM Operation Displaying
Topology Management OMS Trail list 35
2.6 Displaying OCH Trail list 36
2.7 Displaying the channel margin 37

3 Basic administration tasks 41
3.1 Modifying Password 42
3.2 Saving the SPLM database 43
3.3 Loading the SPLM database 44
3.4 Managing SPLM Software Agent 45



1 Photonic Network construction


1.1 Topology processing rules

The SPLM is made up with the following set of functional blocks :

TM (Topology Management) : it provides features allowing to manage the photonic network topology.
LO (Line Optimization) : it provides the features allowing the optimization of physical parameters
along the photonic line. It implements the following groups of features :
APE Sequencer, used to optimize meshed photonic lines.
APA Sequencer (Next Release) : APA (and CTR) global optimization algorithms executed in an
automatic way.
Line Tuning, providing a set of global commands applicable to the photonic line, and usable by any
other block or directly by the SPLM USM (especially used by APA Sequence or APE Sequencer).
LC (Line Commissioning) (Next Release) : it provides the features allowing to manage the photonic
line automatic commissioning. This module is able to parse a LDT file, check the compliancy of its
content with the NE current data, display it and allow the modifications of some parameters by the
operator, and apply the parameters to the NEs of the photonic line, with respect to a given sequence
of operations, defined in the Commissioning handbook.
FL (Fault Location) (Next Release) : it provides features allowing to diagnose Root Alarm (Alarm
correlation) of a trail or to diagnose the different parts of the trail to find the faulty part.

1.2 Photonic Network example

The above figure details the main resources managed by the SPLM (Photonic Network, Nodes,
Photonic Lines), and the way they are organized through an example:
The Photonic Network owns 14 Nodes (6 LT, 2 LR, 4 OADM and 2 BtoB), and manages 4 Photonic
Lines: 2 point to point Photonic Lines (PL2 and PL4), 1 “T “Photonic Line (PL1) and 1 ring Photonic
Line (PL3).
A Photonic Network (only one is managed) is a WDM network composed of the several elements
(subnetwork, node, port, physical link, trail, …).
A Photonic Subnetwork (also called Photonic Line) is a set of nodes whose boundaries are:
Either LT (Line Terminal) or BtB (Back to Back Terminal) if any in the Photonic Network.
OADM if there is neither LT nor BtB in the whole Photonic Network.
A Photonic Subnetwork contains nodes, a set of physical links, a set of OMS trails, a set of OCH trails, a
set of OCH groups. It may represent a simple point-to-point WDM line, or a more complex topology such
as a ring.

1.3 Managing the map background
Before the network construction
phase, the operator has to choose a
given map background.
It could be done using one of the
default available background.
Nevertheless, it is still possible to «

Calibrate » a default map.
This is done zooming in a selected
geographical from a larger map (such
as world map or any other default
one).
At the end of the calibration phase,

the selection becomes one more
available choice for network
construction phase.


1.4 Calibrating a map _ Step 1
To calibrate a map, select the Map Calibrate menu option. Then

follow the procedure step by step:






1.7 Calibrating a map _ Steps 4 & 5


1.8 Displaying the Photonic Line list
To display the Line list choose Components Line menu option.


1.9 Declaring a Photonic Line
1. To declare a Line, right click in the list and select Add menu option.
2. Fill in the Add Photonic Line window
3. Click OK to launch the declaration.

The available Conf. Types are : Submarine and Terrestrial (to be selected for 1626 LM)
The available Topology types are: Undefined (for meshed structure), Point to Point or Ring.

1.10 Deleting a Photonic Line
1. To delete a Line, select the Line in the list then right click and choose
Delete menu option.
2. Click OK in the Photonic Line Deletion message window.
Make sure that « Service State » = « Defined » to be able to

delete the line.
CAUTION:
- It is not possible to delete a Subnetwork which topology has been completed.
For such a subnetwork:
• Service State is Validated.
• All the relevant trails have been calculated by SPLM and this the reason why you cannot delete it.
- Prior to subnetwork deletion, the Service State must be updated to Defined.
- When the subnetwork deletion is done, all the associated configuration related to nodes
and physical links are lost.

1.11 Displaying the Node list
To display the Node list choose Components Nodes menu option.


1.12 Declaring and uploading a Node
1. To declare a
Node right click
in the list
2. Choose Add
Node menu
option
3. Fill in the Add
Node window
and launch the
declaration with
OK.
To upload the
node
configuration:
1. Select the node
in the list
2. Right click and
choose Upload.
The Node creation can be done before the subnetwork / Line creation as the related association is not
included in the Node creation window.
Select a town gives the opportunity to place the Node at one particular place on the world map.
Upload step:
- Node State turns to Uploading. When upload is complete, Node Sate becomes Ready. If upload fails,
Node State becomes Declared.

1.13 Displaying Node information
There are two

ways to get the
Node
Configuration:
Select the node in
the list, right
click and choose
Show or Modify
menu options


1.14 Modifying or deleting a Node
Select the Node in the list then right click and choose:
Modify or Delete menu options.

Modification
- The following parameters can be modified: « Conf. Type » and « GIS coordinate ».
Deletion
- The node must not be declared as part of a subnetwork to be able to launch the deletion.

1.15 Adding Node in a Photonic Line
From the Resource tree:

1. Select the Line / Subnetwork
2. Right click and choose Add Nodes.
From “ Add/Remove Node(s) in Photonic

Line “ window:
1. From Available nodes select a node and click
Add>> to get Associated nodes
2. Confirm with OK.


1.16 Creating a Physical Link between two nodes
1. From the Network

map, click on “Trace
Link” icon first
2. Then draw the

physical link between
two Nodes

A Physical Link is identified by two boundaries. The boundaries are identify with the following
information:
Source node, source physical port.
Destination node, destination physical port.

1.16 Creating a Physical Link between two nodes [cont.]
3. Fill in the creation window and confirm with OK.


1.17 Showing boards for a Physical Link
From Physical Links Manager window, select a Physical Link, right

click and choose Show Boards menu option.


1.18 Deleting a Physical Link
From Physical Links Manager, select a Physical Link, right click and
choose Delete menu option.
Make sure that « Progress State » of the related subnetwork /

line is “Defined” or “Under Construction” to be able to delete the
Physical Link.

Exercise
Get started on SPLM workspace.

Choose a given map background
Declare a Photonic Line
Declare the nodes
Upload the node configuration
Add the nodes in the Photonic Line
Create the Physical Links between the nodes
Time allowed:
_____ minutes


Notes Page


2 Photonic Line life cycle management


2.1 Displaying general information for a Photonic Line
From the Resource tree, select a Line / Subnetwork, right click and
choose Show menu option.

The Subnetwork / Line life cycle is based on 2 parameters:
Service State
Defined
Subnetwork configuration and Physical layer declaration are not complete
Optimization is not possible.
Topology can be changed.
Validated
Subnetwork configuration is complete. This value results from the validation process performed by the
operator. It’s not possible to modify the Subnetwork topology.
Progress State
Defined
Under Construction
Correspond to Service State = Defined
Ready to Finalize
Waiting for OMS Trails, OCH Trails, or OCH Groups calculation.
Under Finalization
OMS Trails OCH Trails OCH Groups calculation in progress.
Ready for use
No operation in progress. Data ready for optimization or Commissioning procedures.
Correspond to Service State = Validated
Under Synchronization
Synchronization in progress.
Corresponds to Service State = Defined or Validated
Under Optimization
Optimization in progress.

2.2 Synchronizing a Photonic Line
Synchronize SPLM with a real subnetwork to upload the up-to-date

subnetwork configuration into SPLM to make sure of the exact match
between:
the real subnetwork topology and configuration, and
the representation of the subnetwork topology and configuration into SPLM.
To synchronize a Line / Subnetwork:

From the Resource tree, select a Line / Subnetwork, right click and choose
Other Actions menu option, then Synchronize


2.3 Validating a Photonic Line
A Line / Subnetwork can be validated when:

Line is declared,
Nodes have been added to the line,
Physical links have been declared.
The validation process will trigger the creation of all the relevant
trails of the transmission layer.
Once a subnetwork topology is validated, you cannot modify it

unless you change its Service State with Invalidate command.
To validate a Line / Subnetwork:

From the Resource tree, select a Line / Subnetwork, right click and choose
Other Actions menu option, then Validate


2.4 Main resources managed in a Photonic Line

The SPLM relies on a topology based with the 3 layers :

Physical layer (Physical Links, Physical Ports)
OMS layer (OMS Trails, OMS Ports) (relies on physical layer)
OCH layer (OCH Trails, OCH Ports) (relies on OMS layer)
The managed entities follow the next basic rules:

Each Node is declared inside one Photonic Network
A Photonic Line is defined by a list of Nodes, located in the same Photonic Network
Each Node may contain a set of Physical ports, a set of OMS ports, a set of Bands and OCH ports
In LR Nodes, there are no OCH ports (OMS Ports are cross-connected, i.e. channels are not
demultiplexed)
In a given Photonic Line, each Node is linked to the next Node through a Physical Link (manually
defined by the operator)
OCH trail route relies on a set of OMS trails
OMS trail route relies on a set of Physical Links

2.4 Main resources managed in a Photonic Line [cont.]

An OMS Trail is identified by two boundaries. The boundaries are identify with the following information:
Source node, source OMS port.
Destination node, destination OMS port.
An OCH Trail is identified by two boundaries. The boundaries are identify with the following information:
Source node, source OCH port.
Destination node, destination OCH port.
An OCH Group is a set of OCH trails using the same route (i.e. relying on the same OMS trails, in the
same order).
The OMS Trail, the OCH Trail, the OCH group shall automatically be built by the system in case of
finalization of the photonic subnetwork.

2.5 Displaying OMS Trail list
From the main window of the SPLM GUI choose:

Components OMS Trail menu option.

From the map, click
OMS trails are graphically displayed in red color.

2.6 Displaying OCH Trail list
From the main window of the SPLM GUI choose:

Components OCH Trail menu option.

From the map, click
OCH Groups are graphically displayed in blue color.

2.7 Displaying the channel margin
To display the channel margin, operate as follow:

1. From SLPM resource tree, expand Line to display subnetwork
resources.
2. Expand the relevant subnetwork type.
3. Select the relevant subnetwork and right-click Other Actions
Centralized Channels Margin.
Result: The Photonic Line Channel Margin dialog box is
displayed.
4. Click Yes.


2.7 Display the channel margin [cont.]
When the Centralized Channel Margin window is displayed. The

channel margin values are flagged to ?.? before calculation.
5. Click Get Margin to start channel margin calculation.

Result: The Start Channel Margin Algorithm dialog box is
displayed.
6. Click Yes.


2.7 Display the channel margin [cont.]
As soon as the calculation is done, the following fields are completed:

Error, Output Power (dBm), Margin (dB) and BER.
7. Click OK to close the END OF OPTIMIZATION dialog box.


Exercise
Display general information for the Photonic Line

Synchronize the Photonic Line
Validate the Photonic Line
Display the OMS Trail list
Display the OCH Trail list
Display the channel margin
Time allowed:
_____ minutes


3 Basic administration tasks


3.1 Modifying Password
To change the
« Operator » password,
operate as follow:
1. From the SPLM GUI
main window, choose
Administration
Operator Profile
Modify Password menu
option
2. Fill in the window
accordingly
3. Confirm with OK.


3.2 Saving the SPLM database
To save the SPLM

database, operate as
follow:
main window, choose
Administration
Database Save the
database menu option
accordingly
3. Launch with Save.
4. Click OK in the Save
Database dialog box.


3.3 Loading the SPLM database
To load the SPLM

database, operate as
follow:
main window, choose
Administration
Database Load the
database menu option
accordingly
3. Launch with Open.
4. Click OK in the Load
Database dialog box.


3.4 Managing SPLM Software Agent
To manage SPLM software agent, operate as follow:

1. From the SPLM GUI main window, choose Administration
Manager menu option
2. Assign NSAP address to the SPLM manager software agent.

3. Start and Stop the SPLM manager software agent.
4. Connect or Disconnect the SPLM software agent to the SPLM
database.
The NSAP address assigned to the SPLM

manager software agent is the NSAP
address of the local NE connected to the
CT

Exercise
Save the SPLM database

Modify the Photonic network
Load the SPLM database
Verify a NSAP address is assigned to the SPLM manager software agent
Disconnect and connect the SPLM software agent to the SPLM database
Time allowed:
_____ minutes


Module Summary
The SPLM is made up with the following set of functional blocks in

R 5.0A:
TM (Topology Management)
LO (Line Optimization)
The main steps to create a Photonic Network:

Declare at least one Photonic Line
Declare the nodes
Upload the node configuration
Add the nodes in the Photonic Line(s)
Create the Physical Links between the nodes
Synchronize the Photonic Line(s)
Validate the Photonic Line(s)


Notes Page



for this module


End of Module
Topology Management


Section 4
SPLM Operation
Module 3
Line Optimization


Blank Page

SPLM Operation Line Optimization
Document History

Module Objectives
Run the APE sequencer for channel optimization or deletion





Table of Contents
1 Getting ready to APE 7

1.1 Introduction 8
1.2 Automatic Level Control (ALC) 11
1.3 Setting the Initial ALC Target Reference Power 12
2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization 13
2.1 Setting WMAN3 and TDMX Reference Power 14
2.2 Running the APE sequencer 19
2.3 Verifying WMAN3 Reference Power 20
2.4 Verifying APT/VOA Configuration on LOFA 21
2.5 Verifying TDMX Reference Power 22
2.6 Verifying output power level on transponder 23
3 Running the APE sequencer for channel deletion 25
3.1 Introduction 26
3.2 Selecting channel(s) to delete 27
3.3 Running the APE sequencer 30




1 Getting ready to APE


1.1 Introduction
Automatic Power Equalization (APE) is an optimization algorithm run

by the operator in case of ADD or REMOVE of service.
The goal of APE algorithm is to obtain and maintain, at the output of
a Network Element, a channel power (Pref) in function of the span and
the data rate.
3 channels at 1rst
installation
WMAN3 Reference P_BOOSTER_INPUT
Power=-19dBm (NDT) = - 16dBm LOFA11y0_Unidir
2dB
OADC0104
WMAN3174 1 VOA 2
- 14dBm OP2=+8dBm
(NDT)
OSC
ALCT
P_ALC_INIT_COM
=-16dBm (NDT)

NDT : Network Description Table.
APE algorithm is run during Commissioning procedure for Long Haul systems in case of
first installation or ADD of service or REMOVE of service.
APE algorithm applies only to the following nodes in R 5.0A:

Line Terminal, Back-to-Back Terminal, ROADM (WSS based), TR-OADM (WSS based) and
AGE repeaters.

The power tuning process is the following:

The user indicates channels which must be optimized.
SPLM regroups these channels which have the same route / optical path
(same source , pass-thru nodes and destination).
Each group of channels will be optimized into the same APE Line Sequencing
demand.
SPLM indicates this list of channels to the different NEs.
NEs calculate new attenuations for selected channels in function of Pref and
Pch (read from Optical Channel Monitor) and send these attenuations to
WMAN3 board.
APE algorithm can be run if the Automatic Level Control is set to a

reference power value first (P_ALC_INIT_COM provided by NDT).
Once the ALC reference power is set, one or several OCH groups
can be selected to start the APE algorithm.

NDT: Network Design Table.

The APE sequencer runs automatically all the required actions:

To set all the involved amplifiers to Gain mode, to deactivate control loops of WMAN
boards, to avoid conflicts between board processes and APE process.
To apply relevant reference powers to all the involved boards and nodes of a selected
group of channels.
P_BOOSTER
3 _INPUT =
1 channel is added: - 15dBm >
4 channels now P_ALC_INIT
1 WMAN3 Reference _COM
LOFA11y0_Unidir
2dB
Power=-19dBm (NDT)
OADC0104
WMAN3174 1 VOA 2
- 13dBm OP2=+9dBm
(total power
change) OSC 5
2 ALCT
New Initial ALC Target
Reference Power 4
=-15dBm
At the end of APE process:

To set all the involved amplifiers back to Power-MSV mode.
To re-activate control loops of WMAN boards.


1.2 Automatic Level Control (ALC)
During 1626 LM life cycle, the transmitted channel number can vary to
a large extent. This is mainly due to the fact that the first installed
channel number can be quite low compared to 1626 LM maximum
capacity. It is therefore necessary to keep the channels’ power within
the correct transmission limits whatever their actual number.
This adjustment is called Automatic Level Control (ALC) and it is
performed by means of an extra channel that enables the total optical
power to be kept constant at the input of the booster whatever the
number of channel is.
Before running the APE process, you need to assign a specific initial
reference power value to the ALC. This power value is given by the
Network Description Table (NDT) which is provided at the
commissioning phase. The ALC power value is related to your network
configuration and the number of channels supported by your network.
The ALC:
ALC enables to maintain the booster amplifier input at a constant power.
helps to keep low enough the transmitted power per channel for a low
channel count to avoid non-linear effects on working channels.
helps to compensate for the power variations when some channels are
missing.
As ALC acts on the booster amplifier input via the ALCT board, it is
located within an OMS Trail.


1.3 Setting the Initial ALC Target Reference Power
Make sure the Network Description Table (NDT) is available and
amplifiers have been set to their initial output power before setting
the Initial ALC Target Reference Power (P_ALC_INIT_COM).
1. From the map, click
OMS Trails are graphically

displayed in red color
2. Select an OMS Trail
3. Right-click and select
Set Initial ALC Target
Reference Power
The Initial ALC Target
Reference Power window
appears.
4. From Initial ALC Target Ref.
Power, set the required
value for both direction
(Go and Return) .
5. Click OK.
The Initial ALC Target Reference Power is set only at first installation.

2 Running the APE sequencer for channel
optimization


2 Running the APE sequencer for channel optimization
2.1 Setting WMAN3 and TDMX Reference Power
OCH groups are graphically displayed in blue color

2. Select one or several OCH group(s)
3. Right-click and select Optimize with APE
The Optimization (APE) of Photonic Line window is displayed and
lists all the OCH groups of the subnetwork.


2.1 Setting WMAN3 and TDMX Reference Power [cont.]
4. Verify that Optimize Channels radio button is activated.
5. Verify that all the requested OCH groups have the Involved status.
To add an OCH group for power setting:
From the list, select an OCH group.
Right-click and select Involved.
To remove an OCH group from power setting process:
Right-click and select Not Involved.


6. Double-click ... in the relevant Configure Pref/Ptx cell
corresponding to an OCH group selected for reference power
setting.
The Configure Pref/Ptx on OCH Group window is displayed and all
the boards of the selected OCH group are listed, sorted by
direction and by node.


7. Double-click... in the relevant Configure Pref/Ptx cell
corresponding to the board selected for reference power setting.
The Configure Pref/Ptx on OCH Group window is displayed and
Reference Power values are listed for each channel frequency
supported by the selected board of a specific node for a given
direction.


8. Update the reference power.
The update applies on the reference power of the selected board
of a specific node for a given direction.
In case of Line Terminal or Back-to-Back Terminal, check that the
power corresponds to the related transponder output power.
To update the reference power channel by channel:
Click Pref by Channel radio button.
Click on Pref Value (dBm) cell corresponding to the related channel
frequency and assign the relevant value.
Click Apply and OK to return to the previous window.
Repeat action Step 7 or Click Quit to return to the Optimization (APE)
of Photonic Line window.
To update the reference power for all channels:
Click Global Pref (by OCH Group) radio button.
Each frequency row are greyed.
The Enter a Global Pref Value (dBm) combo box is activated.


2.2 Running the APE sequencer
Running the APE sequencer in GO direction then RETURN direction.
9. From Optimization (APE) of Photonic Line window, Click Start.

10. Click OK
11. Click Yes to start the APE sequencer.

12. Click Quit to return to the initial window.

A trace of all the performed actions is displayed.

2.3 Verifying WMAN3 Reference Power
To open “Channel Configuration” window:

Display the relevant WMAN board view
Choose Board Configure WMAN 3x74… menu option


2.4 Verifying APT/VOA Configuration on LOFA
To open “APT/VOA Configuration” window:

Display the relevant LOFA board view
Choose Board APT/VOA menu option


2.5 Verifying TDMX Reference Power
To open “TDMX configuration of port” window:

Display the relevant TDMX1180 board view
Choose Board Configure TDMX1x80 … menu option


2.6 Verifying output power level on transponder
To verify the output power level of a given a transponder:

Display the relevant transponder board view
Choose Board Optical power level configuration menu option


Notes Page


3 Running the APE sequencer for channel deletion


3.1 Introduction
Use this procedure when you want to run the APE sequencer in the
context of preparing your network for channel deletion.
This procedure:
assigns to the relevant ports of boards crossed by the channels to be deleted,
the minimum output power, namely:
-27 dBm for WMAN boards,
-30 dBm for TDMX boards.
runs the APE sequencer, taking into account the channels to ignore.
After this procedure, you can delete the related cross connections
without any impact on the traffic.


3.2 Selecting channel(s) to delete
OCH groups are graphically displayed in blue color

2. Select one or several OCH group(s)
3. Right-click and select Optimize with APE
The Optimization (APE) of Photonic Line window is displayed and
lists all the OCH groups of the subnetwork.


3.2 Selecting channel(s) to delete [cont.]
4. Verify that Delete Channel(s) radio button is activated.
5. Verify that all the requested OCH groups have the Involved status.
To add an OCH group for power setting:
Right-click and select Involved.
To remove an OCH group from power setting process:
Right-click and select Not Involved.


3.2 Selecting channel(s) to delete [cont.]
6. Double-click ... in the relevant Select Channel(s) to delete cell.
The Select OCH Trails to delete on OCH Group window is
displayed.
7. To flag channels for deletion:
From Available OCH Trails, select a channel.
Click >>> .
The channel is removed from Available OCH Trails and added to OCH Trails
to delete.
To cancel channel deletion flagging:
From OCH Trails to delete, select a channel.
Click <<< .
The channel is removed from OCH Trails to delete and added to Available
OCH Trails.
8. Click OK.
The Optimization (APE) of Photonic Line window is displayed.


3.3 Running the APE sequencer
9. From Optimization (APE) of Photonic Line window, Click Start.
10. Click OK
11. Click Start
12. Click Yes to start the APE sequencer.
9. Click Quit to return to the initial window.
Don’t forget to delete the relevant cross connections (next step).

A trace of all the performed actions is displayed.

Exercise
According to the trainer instructions:

Set the Initial ALC Target Reference Power
Select one OCH group in a Photonic Line
Run the APE sequencer for channel optimization for a given direction
Verify the results
Run the APE sequencer for channel deletion
Verify the results
Time allowed:
_____ minutes


Notes Page



for this module


End of Module
Line Optimization


Section 5
RMPM Operation and Maintenance
Module 1
RMPM Description


Blank Page

RMPM Operation and Maintenance RMPM Description
Document History

Module Objectives
Describe the Alcatel-Lucent RMPM





Table of Contents
1 Product description 7
1.1 Distributed Raman Amplification 8
1.2 The Alcatel-Lucent Raman Multi Pump Module 13
1.3 Pump Module Block Diagram 15
1.4 RMPM software structure 16
2 Cabling description 19
2.1 RMPM implementation in ETSI rack 20
2.2 Optical cabling 21
2.3 Optical cabling in a terminal site 24
2.4 Optical cabling in a line repeater site 25
2.5 Optical cabling in a BOADM site 26
2.6 Electrical cabling 27
3 Remote management 33
3.1 RMPM communication 34
3.2 Remote management 35
3.3 One RMPM in the first remote site 36
3.4 One RMPM in the second remote site 37
3.5 Two RMPM in the first remote site 38
3.6 RMPM in several remote sites 39
4 Housekeeping management 41
4.1 Introduction 42
4.2 External Points view 43
4.3 Commands 44
515
4.4 Inputs All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009 45
5 Laser
RMPM Operation safety
and Maintenance RMPM Description 47
5.1 Laser class _ reminder 48
5.2 Risks _ reminder 49

5.3 Safety instructions 50
5.4 Automatic Power Reduction 51
5.5 Automatic Power Reduction mechanisms 52
5.6 Automatic Return from shutdown caused by APR 53
5.7 Warnings 54



1 Product description


1.1 Distributed Raman Amplification
Excited atoms : high energy level
Stimulated
emission
Short wavelength
source
Residue
emission
Low energy level atoms

A Raman amplifier is based on the Raman scattering process.
SRS (Stimulated Raman Scattering) is caused by the interaction of light with molecular vibrations. Light
incident on the molecules creates scattered light at a longer wavelength than that of the incident
light. A portion of the light travelling at each frequency is downshifted across a region of lower
frequencies. The light generated at the lower frequencies is called the Stokes wave. The fraction of
power transferred to the Stokes wave grows rapidly as the power of the input signal is increased. In
multiwavelengths systems, the shorter-wavelength channels will lose some power to the longer-
wavelength channels. To reduce the amount of loss, the power on each channel needs to be below a
certain level.
In WDM systems, Spontaneous Raman effect is undesirable since it may result in amplification of
adjacent channels.
In the Raman amplifier, SRS (Stimulated Raman Scattering) produces photons with the same
wavelength, phase and polarization than the transmitted signal and thus the stimulated scattering
mechanism can be used to amplify the signal.

1.1 Distributed Raman Amplification [cont.]
Raman amplification can be used to reduce the impact on the OSNR of

the longest spans
the longest spans have the strongest impact on the received OSNR
Amplified
DCM signals DCM
Optical
pump power
EDFA Raman EDFA
pumps
The effect of the Raman amplifier can be roughly seen as a reduction of

the span losses


Raman amplification in a WDM line reduces the gain of involved EDFA

and improves the OSNR

In the last 20 to 40 Km of transmission line adjacent to Raman source, the pump wavelength is
attenuated and the outgoing signal is amplified.
Raman
pump EDFA
unit
WDM C Band signals Pump
and in band OSC

Raman amplification performance depends on the fiber type of the line:


Gain and gain equalization are achieved by adjusting pumps’ power
Resulting gain profile
P1 P2 P3 P4
Gain [dB]
Wavelength [nm]


1.2 The Alcatel-Lucent Raman Multi Pump Module
RMPM1200, two pumps Raman amplifier, typ. 475mW (+27 dBm) pump
power, Min Gain = 9dB, Min OSNR improvement ≈ 5.5dB
RMPM1300, three pumps Raman amplifier, typ. 690mW (+28,5 dBm) pump
power, Min Gain = 14dB, Min OSNR improvement ≈ 7.5dB
Three operating modes: Max pump power, Manual pump power, Gain
setting
1530-1562nm operating bandwidth, from Band #1 to Band #10 of the 1626
LM loading plan
Flat gain shape (Max ∆G = 1.4 dB)
Low insertion loss

The Raman Multi-Pump Module (RMPM) is a device which ensures extra power margins for long spans
applications within the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM.
When used in conjunction with conventional Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifiers (EDFA) technology,
Distributed Raman Amplification (DRA) enables many important applications, such as single span links
up to ≈ 300km, long span masking in multi-span links, or ultra long haul links.
dBm Definition
dBm is defined as power ratio in decibel (dB) referenced to one milliwatt (mW). It is an abbreviation for
dB with respect to 1 mW and the "m" in dBm stands for milliwatt.
dBm is different from dB. dBm represents absolute power, whereas dB is a ratio of two values and is used
to represent gain or attenuation. For example, 3 dBm means 2 mW, and 3 dB means a gain of 2.
dBm = 10 log10( P )
1mW

1.2 The Alcatel-Lucent Raman Multi Pump Module [cont.]
Maximum span loss with current specifications ≈ 52dB for RMPM1300 and
49dB for RMPM1200
Dual pumping wavelength: 1424nm & 1452nm
Designed for most deployed fibers: SMF (G.652), LEAF (G.655), TeraLight
(G.555), TrueWave (G.655), PSCF (G.654) and DSF (G.653)
Safety and automatic power reduction
SNMP management interface
Redundant hot swappable power supplies and fans


1.3 Pump Module Block Diagram
WDM 1480/1550.
Line Pass band I: WDM for coupler Output
1420-1480 supervisory (wideband 1550)
Pass band II: 1510/C Band 2x2
1500-1565
1510nm
OSC
Detector Coupler
Pump Power Coupler 1%,
(DW)
Back reflection
2x2
(DW)
Detector 2x2 Detector Coupler Monitor
DPes Dpin 50%
EDFA (WB)
Detector
Osc
Forward
WDM pump combiner
Detector Detector
Short Band Dpin
Line
Pump 1 Pump 2 Pump 3

1452nm 1452nm 1424nm DC Mod

The block diagram describes the main building blocks of the pump module within the RMPM.
Various detectors exist within the pump module :

Detector Pes – Measures back reflected light in the pump wavelengths entering through the line port.
Detector Short Band DC – Measures ASE power within the Short Band (1500-1520nm for C-Band
amplifiers) entering through the line port. In counter propagating direction the measured power also
includes that of the supervisory channel, typically located within the Short Band.
Detector Short Band MOD – This detector is used only in counter-propagating operation, and measures
the modulation power of the OSC.
Detector Pump power – This detector measures the composite pump power exiting the line port.
Detector Dpin Line – This detector measures the power within the C Band entering the amplifier from
the line port.
Detector Dpin EDFA – This detector measures the power within the C Band entering the amplifier from
the EDFA Port
Detector OSC forward – This detector is used in co-propagating operation, and measures the
supervisory channel power entering from the supervisory port.

1.4 RMPM software structure
RAMAN amplifier software in charge of:

Optical data traffic
Eye-safety mechanism
EMS software
For monitoring and controlling the RAMAN remotely
Implements an SNMP agent
SNMP is a standard network management protocol
RAMAN amplifier software
EMS GUI software (file: raman_yyyy.H64)
(Java applet)
(file: raman_xxxxalc.con)
EMS SNMP Agent software

(file: raman_zzzzalc.bin)

1.4 RMPM software structure [cont.]
GUI software
A Java applet is loaded via the network into any web browser upon
typing the unit’s IP address.
HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) and SNMP communication.
Internet Explorer 1) http:// 150.1.1.192 port 80
2) Retrieve Java applet

(HTTP ‘Get’ request)
3) Send Java applet

(and HTTP header)
4) SNMP communication

Control parameters
Through the EMS GUI software interface, the user is able to:
Shutdown or restart manually the RMPM
Configure the automatic shutdown process of the RMPM
Adjust the Raman gain from 3dB to the maximum available gain
Adjust the Raman pump diode power from 50mW to the maximum available power
Set the RMPM to get the maximum available power and the line fiber type
Monitoring parameters
Through the EMS GUI software interface, the user should be able to monitor:
Individual and total launched pump power (in mW)
For each pumping wavelength, pump current and pump temperature
Total signal input power, OSC input power (in dBm)
Cause of an RMPM shutdown
Absence of 48V power supply at each connector input
History of most important parameters (pump power, OSC band power, back-reflection power)

Notes Page


2 Cabling description


2.1 RMPM implementation in ETSI rack
It’s recommended
to implement the
RMPM in the ETSI
Optinex rack as
follows :

The RMPM1x00 is an add-on board to the 1626LM. It does not fit into the 1626LM shelf but in the Optinex
ETSI rack.

2.2 Optical cabling
1626LM NE

The pump power is launched contra-directionally in the line fiber then it acts as a distributed pre-
amplifier for the LOFA.
The RMPM can be associated to a line amplifier and also to the pre-amplifier of the line terminal.

2.2 Optical cabling [cont.]
The E2000 high power cable is connected to the Line Port (Green
connector) :
The RMPM Output port (MU type) is connected to the Input port of the
LOFA :


2.2 Optical cabling [cont.]
The RMPM OSC port (MU type) is connected to the OSC Input port of
the OSCU :
The RMPM Monitor port (MU type) can be connected to an Optical

Spectrum Analyzer :


2.3 Optical cabling in a terminal site


2.4 Optical cabling in a line repeater site


2.5 Optical cabling in a BOADM site


2.6 Electrical cabling
Two power supply cables coming from the Top Rack Unit are
connected to the RMPM :
There are two redundant power connectors on the front panel of the
RMPM. The RMPM can work when only one of the connectors is
connected to a power supply.


2.6 Electrical cabling [cont.]
The Housekeeping connector allows the user to manage some

electrical relays and opto-couplers in order to monitor some status of
the Raman Pump Module or to remotely command its restart and
shutdown. Through the DB25 housekeeping connector, up to 8 status
and up to 8 commands can be managed.

NC means not connected, GND means ground.

The Ethernet cable is connected to the Ethernet port in the RMPM.
The Ethernet port is the Craft Terminal Connector used for connecting
the RMPM to an Ethernet network (LAN) via a HUB or Switch device or
a peer device (e.g a PC equipped with Ethernet Network card)


The RS232 connector (DB9) is used for first time setup upon
integration of the RMPM into the network or modifying configuration.
The RS232 connector is usually used to configure the IP address of the
RMPM or to modify the SNMP security passwords to upgrade its
software.


RMPM front panel has four LED indicators :
The four front panel LEDs indicate pump unit status


Notes Page


3 Remote management


3 Remote management
3.1 RMPM communication
Manager RMPM
(GUI) (EMS)
Management Application
SNMP Data
GetRequest, GetResponse, SetRequest
SNMP
SNMP Traps (Alarm on/off) Agent MIB

The RMPM is managed through its own Graphical User Interface running on a PC, either locally or
remotely through a LAN.

3 Remote management
3.2 Remote management
Simple web-based user interface (GUI)

Seamless and unlimited access and control of RMPM units from everywhere
in the organization network and via the internet, depending on security
restrictions.
The GUI is accessible from any remote location
Using OSCU and USIB board from 1626LM
Using G.703 – Ethernet media converter
Using Ethernet HUB for more than one RMPM in one site
Through OSC + USIB link, a media converter is necessary between the

USIB and the RMPM to convert the 64kb/s G703 frame into 10M
Ethernet frame.


3 Remote management
3.3 One RMPM in the first remote site


3 Remote management
3.4 One RMPM in the second remote site

Note : In such case the USIB in intermediate sites must be de-configured (for the OSC traffic to be in
pass-through).

3 Remote management
3.5 Two RMPM in the first remote site


3 Remote management
3.6 RMPM in several remote sites


Discover
Looking at the training equipment, identify the optical cabling between

the RMPM and the 1626LM.
Each group of trainees will make a clear graphical schema to illustrate

the optical cabling he discovered.
Looking at the training equipment, identify the electrical connectors

used at level of RMPM and the way to manage it.
Time allowed : ___ minutes


4 Housekeeping management


4.1 Introduction
Input (CPI#) and output (CPO#) housekeeping points are managed by

the operator.
Input housekeeping points correspond to the external defect which not

concern the NE itself and are reported by means of gates on the
controller card.
Output housekeeping points, which are managed by the equipment,

can be declared and managed by the operator.
Two commands and four alarms synthesis are available for RMPM.


4.2 External Points view

Warning: the quantity of Housekeeping points must be checked case by case according to 1626 LM
release. As example: in R3.0 there are 8 input and 8 output points but from R5.0 there are 9 input and
9 output points (see the above screen shot)

4.3 Commands
Commands
Manual shutdown
Manual restart
A single RMPM is connected to the HSKU (recommended

configuration for Outputs (commands)) :

Two RMPM are connected to the HSKU (recommended configuration for Outputs (commands)) :

4.4 Inputs
A single RMPM is connected to the HSKU (recommended

configuration for Inputs (alarms)) :

Two RMPM are connected to the HSKU (recommended configuration for Inputs (commands)) :

Notes Page


5 Laser safety


5 Laser safety
5.1 Laser class _ reminder
The International Electro technical Commission IEC825:

Gives the safety recommendations.
Grades laser in 5 classes according to their risk.
Power (mW)
1000
Class 4
100
10
Class 3B
1
Class 3A
0.1
0.01 Class 2
0.001
Class 1
Wavelength
(nm)
400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600

Telecom laser domain

Class
1 3A 3B 4
10 17 27 dBm
1550nm
(10) (50) (500) (mW)
9.5 15 27 dBm
1300nm
(10) (32) (500) (mW)
-4 +2.5 27 dBm
850nm
(0.4) (2) (500) (mW)

5 Laser safety
5.2 Risks _ reminder
Class 1 No hazard if used in normal conditions*.

* If you do not look directly and closely at the laser beam.
Class 2 Only concerns the band ranging from 400 to 700nm.
No hazard if used in normal conditions, except if you

Class 3A use optical appliances (binoculars, microscope,
monocular, etc.).
Class 3B Hazard if you look directly at the laser beam.
Class 4 Hazard for eye and skin, fire risk.

dBm Definition
dBm is defined as power ratio in decibel (dB) referenced to one milliwatt (mW). It is an abbreviation
for dB with respect to 1 mW and the "m" in dBm stands for milliwatt.
dBm is different from dB. dBm represents absolute power, whereas dB is a ratio of two values and is
used to represent gain or attenuation. For example, 3 dBm means 2 mW, and 3 dB means a gain of 2.
dBm = 10 log10( P )
1mW

5 Laser safety
5.3 Safety instructions
Precautions to be taken in class 3A… Hazard in class 3B and 4:

So you need to quantify and locate the corresponding power.
INSTRUCTIONS BASIC PRINCIPLES

The optical interfaces peculiar Do not observe a connector
to powers 3A, 3B and 4 are or a fiber in its longitudinal
identified by the following axis.
symbol:
Do not observe a connector
or a fiber unless you are at
a distance of 10 cm or
more.
Place systematically the

protective caps on a free
connector.
LASER RADIATION:
DO NOT LOOK INSIDE
THE BEAM
CLASS-3A LASER
RADIATION UNIT


5 Laser safety
5.4 Automatic Power Reduction
During normal operation, when the Raman amplifier is connected

through the line port to a closed fiber transmission line, the amplifier
may emit up to 29 dBm (700 mW)
A potential hazard can occur in case of fiber break or connector

opening. To avoid this risk, the Raman Amplifier is equipped with four
different firmware mechanisms designed to detect a fiber break or
connector opening, and to activate Automatic Power Reduction
(APR) of the Raman pumps to reduce output power to below the level
defined for Class 1M laser products.
The Raman amplifier product is thus classified as a Class 1M laser

product according to IEC 60825-1:1993+A1:1997+A2:2001, and
CDRH 21 CFR §1040.10.


5 Laser safety
5.5 Automatic Power Reduction mechanisms
Pump power back-reflection
The pump back reflection entering the Raman unit from the line port is
continuously monitored, and compared to the output pump power. Changes
in the back reflection level indicate an open connector in the system.
Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC)

This mechanism continuously monitors the presence of the OSC signal.
Absence of the signal indicates an open connector or fiber break.
Amplified Spontaneous Emission (ASE) in the short band:

This mechanism continuously monitors the ASE (or Noise) in the Short Band
(1500-1520nm for the case of a C-Band amplifier) entering the Raman unit
from the line port. Changes in ASE indicate an open or degraded line (high
loss points).
Signal Band Power

The total signal band (C-Band) power is monitored, and changes in the
signal band power (simultaneously with other mechanisms) indicate an open
or degraded transmission line.
High loss along the transmission line, and in particular discrete loss points occurring close to the
Raman amplifier, can severely decrease the available pump power for DRA (Distributed Raman
Amplification), and thus the achievable Raman gain. Discrete loss points can occur due to dirty or
faulty connectors, or sharp bends and other stress point along the fiber.
High back-reflection is often associated to loss, and thus can occur at discrete loss points. If there is
high back-reflection, then part of the pump-energy propagating along the line will be back-
reflected, and will return to the pump laser diode from which it originated. A high level of back-
reflection can degrade the performance of the laser-diode, and thus decrease the available pump
power.
The Raman amplifier provides four independent laser-protection mechanisms related to safety of
operating personnel and transmission equipment.
There are two levels of APR protection :

The product level of protection, based on two of the mechanisms (Pump power back-reflection,
Amplified Spontaneous Emission in the Short Band), ensures that the product itself is qualified as
Class 1M (according to IEC 60825-1 and CDRH 21 CFR §1040.10), so that any open connector or broken
fiber in the direct vicinity of the amplifier will activate Automatic Power Reduction (APR) of the
Raman pumps.
The system level of protection, based on all four mechanisms, enables classification of the full
communication system (according to IEC 60825-2) as Class 1M. Those mechanisms ensure that when
the transmission line fails (even tens of kilometers from the amplifier location), APR of the Raman
pumps will be activated).

5 Laser safety
5.6 Automatic Return from shutdown caused by APR
Two possible scenarios can automatically restart the RMPM :
When RMPM detects modulated OSC signal with power > -42dBm.
When RMPM detects Carrier Wave power in OSC Band > -50dBm for
2 pump module or > -52.5dBm for 3 pump module.
In both of these cases, if RMPM turns “ON” and one of the reasons for APR
still exists, RMPM will shutdown within 150 ms.


5 Laser safety
5.7 Warnings
The product level of APR protection is password protected.

Alcatel-Lucent advises to keep the APR protection at all times and not
disable it.
Once the product level of APR protection is disabled, the amplifier is

classified as a Class 4 laser product, and exposure to direct or
scattered radiation may cause severe physical injury.



for this module


End of Module
RMPM Description


Section 5
RMPM Operation and Maintenance
Module 2
RMPM Handling and Maintenance


Blank Page

RMPM Operation and Maintenance RMPM Handling and Maintenance
Document History

Module Objectives
Get started and maintain the RMPM in operating conditions





Table of Contents
1 Getting started on RMPM GUI 7

1.1 Getting the workspace 8
1.2 Graphical User Interface – “Main” Tab 10
1.3 System configuration parameters 11
1.4 Pump operating modes 12
1.5 ARP Time configuration 13
1.6 Safety parameters 14
1.7 Status parameters 15
1.8 Product parameters and history 16
1.9 Alarms 17
1.10 HSKU Operation & Command Status 18
1.11 RMPM Reboot 23
1.12 Graphical User Interface – “Events History” Tab 24
1.13 Graphical User Interface – “Pumps Pwr Chart” Tab 25
1.14 Graphical User Interface – “OSC Band Pwr Chart” Tab 26
1.15 Graphical User Interface – “Back reflection Pwr Chart” Tab 27
2 RMPM Maintenance 29
2.1 Replacing a Power supply 30
2.2 Replacing a FAN 31
2.3 Replacing the Dust Filter 32




1 Getting started on RMPM GUI


1.1 Getting the workspace
1. Open a web browser (such as Internet Explorer) application

2. Type the specific unit’s IP address in the address field
(this is the HTTP connection request to the unit)
RMPM acts as an HTTP (web) server with fully customizable web pages

150.1.1.192 is the default RMPM IP @
For the above case, the IP @ of the PC is 150.1.1.2 / 255.255.255.0 . Both, RMPM and PC are located in
the same subnetwork: 150.1.1.0
If it is not possible to reach the RMPM, contact your administrator who will check the IP address and the
DCN state.

1.1 Getting the workspace [cont.]
GUI Login screens are displayed:
Enter the SNMP passwords:

Default passwords are:
public for Read Password
private for Write Password
Enter the user password:

Super user who can change RMPM
settings
Monitor user who can only view RMPM
information
Example: Sup123
The main GUI will be displayed


1.2 Graphical User Interface – “Main” Tab

The RMPM GUI Panel consists of five tabs.
The “Main” tab, shown above, contains eight sub-windows and three operating icons. The eight sub-
windows are :
Configuration – General operating parameters
Status – General Status information
RMPM Production Parameters – Production related information
History since reboot – Events that occurred in the past 24 hours since reboot
Communication – Indicates if communication is operative
Sample – SNMP protocol related parameters
Alarms – graphical representation of high importance alarms
HSKU Command Status – Indication for commands given through Housekeeping port and not through
management
Operating icons are :

On / Off switch (green / red icon)
Restart button (blue icon)
Return to factory settings button (red arrow icon

1.3 System configuration parameters
Operating Mode
Pump Operating Mode (Max pump power, Manual pump power, Gain
setting).
W1 Manual Power Set (mW)

Power settings in mW of the 1452nm pump(s). Relevant only in Manual
pump power operating mode.
W2 Manual Power Set (mW)

Power settings in mW of the 1424nm pump. Relevant only in Manual pump
power operating mode.
Manual Gain Set (dB)

Relevant only in Gain setting operating mode. Sets pump powers in order to
achieve required gain and optimal gain flattening for required fiber type.
Line Fiber Type

Transmission line fiber type (for adaptive Gain Flattening) : SMF, Leaf,
Truewave, G654, Teralight or G653 (DSF).


1.4 Pump operating modes
Max pump power mode To change the operating mode,

In this mode, maximum pump power operate as follow:
(EOL) is launched through the line port
into the transmission fiber. The ratio
between different wavelength pumps is 1. Click on the … on the right to
set according to the transmission fiber
type.
open the Operating Mode
With this operating mode, best OSNR window
improvement occurs. 2. Choose the required mode
Gain setting mode 3. Click on OK to confirm
In this mode, the pump power of each
wavelength is adjusted to provide a
required average gain and gain
flattening according to the
transmission fiber type.
Manual pump power mode

Cancel
In this mode, the pump power for each
of the pump laser diodes can be set
manually.
No gain flattening mechanism in this
mode.
Gain setting mode

- To change the gain configuration, operate as follow:
1. Click on the … on the right to open the Manual Gain set (dB) window
2. Enter the required gain
3. Click on OK to confirm
Manual pump power mode

- To change the pumps power settings configuration, operate as follow:
1. Click on the … on the right to open the Wx Manual Power set window for W1 and / or W2
2. Enter the required power level
3. Click on OK to confirm

1.5 ARP Time configuration
In case of problem, the RMPM To change the ARP Time, operate

will shutdown according to the as follow:
«Pumps Shutdown switches »
configuration.
1. Click on the … on the right to
open the ARP Time window
After relevant repair action, the
2. Choose the required setting
RMPM will restart according to the
« Automatic Restart Procedure 3. Click on OK to confirm
Time » configuration
By default, the ARP Time is set to
10 seconds.
Cancel


1.6 Safety parameters
Input Loss
Whether to enable or disable pumps shutdown or activating in case of line
input loss in the C Band.
High Temp
Whether to enable or disable pumps shutdown in module in case module PCB
temperature exceeds 85°C.
High Back Reflection

Whether to enable or disable pumps shutdown in module in case High Back
reflection ration threshold (in dB relative to pumps power) or transient in
back reflection.
OSC Loss
Whether to enable or disable pumps shutdown in case OSC modulation loss.
OSC Band Drop

Whether to enable or disable pumps shutdown in case of less than required
power in 1500-1520nm Band, or of a sudden drop in this Band.
Change password – This allows changing the password that is required to disable switch status
High Back Reflection Threshold (dB) – Threshold relative to pump power in which back-reflection
alarm/shutdown becomes active.
Pump power [dBm] + High Back Reflection threshold [dB] > Back reflected power [dBm]
OSC Band Threshold [dB] – Threshold for transient in OSC Band loss in which a change of ASE level in
the 1500-1520 nm Band in a period of less than 150 ms, activates alarm/shutdown.
OSC Band Threshold = Expected OSC Band power – OSC Band Power + 1
ARP Time - Delay between Automatic shutdown and Restart. Can be set to any value between 1
second to 100 seconds. Default value 10 seconds.
CAUTION : To guarantee the laser safety, all switches (Input Loss, High Temp., High Back Reflection,
OSC Loss, OSC Band Drop) must be enabled.

1.7 Status parameters
Status
Detailed Raman Status. When OK then Raman is properly operating.
Otherwise detailed faults/alarms are reported. When a status item follows
OK then this item is of minor importance.
RMPM Temp
Temperature of PCB Pizza Box (Celsius).
The Pizza Box temperature should typically be the ambient temperature.
Internal Module Temp

Temperature (PCB) of Raman module (Celsius).
The module temperature should be below 75°C before starting.
Gain (dB)
Module Gain when it is operated in Gain setting Mode.
Input Power
Total input Power from the Line (dBm). This also takes into account the back-
reflected pump power (noise).
Pumps Power – Combined total Pumps Power (mW).

OSC Band Power – Power in 1500-1520nm band (ASE power + OSC Power in dBm).
For RMPM1300, -52dBm < OSC Band Power < -20dBm
For RMPM1200, -49.5dBm < OSC Band Power < -20dBm
OSC Power – Power of modulated OSC in dBm.
Back Reflection Power – Back Reflection power (dBm).
Back Reflection Ratio – Ratio (dB). of the Back relection power to the pumps power
It should be > -22dB.
For good fibers it should be around -30dB.
Power W1 – Pump power in 1452 nm wavelength band in mW.
Power W2 – Pump power in 1424 nm wavelength band in mW.
Current (1) – Pump #1 current in mA.
Fans Status – Fans status : OK or Fail Fan 1 or 2 or 3 or 4.
Internal Pwr Supply Stat. – Power Supply Status : OK or fail of Power Suply 1 or fail of power supply 2.
Pumps Status - Raman pumps status : Pumps Active or Shutdown.
OSC State – Modulated Optical Supervisory Channel signal status : Exists or Not exists.

1.8 Product parameters and history
RMPM Production Parameters

Serial Number
Software Version
Hardware Version
Firmware Version
Production date
History Since Reboot

This window shows the number of
times since reboot that:
Pumps off event occurred
OSC Band Loss event occurred
High Back Reflection event
occurred


1.9 Alarms
Pumps On
Green = Pumps On
Red = Pumps Off
OSC Band Loss

Green = Power in 1500-1520nm band is OK
Red = Power in 1500-1520nm indicates
fiber cut and shutdown occurred
High Back Reflection

Green = No High Back Reflection in pump
band
Red = High Back Reflection (transient or
threshold) occurred followed by a
shutdown
OSC Loss
Green = OSC exists (modulated signal)
Red = OSC does not exist
Input Loss
Green = Input signal in C Band above threshold
Red = Input signal in C Band below threshold, restart can not occur
Internal Power Supply

Green = Internal power supply is OK
Red = Internal power supply failed
Ext. Power Supply A or B

Green = Power Supply A or B is OK
Red = Power Supply A or B failed
ARP pause
Green = Raman in steady
Red = Raman amplifier in ARP pause (length dictated by ARP time parameter). Raman amplifier will
turn on when ARP pause will be terminated.

1.10 HSKU Operation & Command Status
In the related 1626 LM NE, some External Points (inputs and outputs)
have to be customized as follow:
1. Open the External Points window selecting View External Points
2. Right click and select Show External Input Points or Show External
Output Points or Show All External Points
3. Select an Input and/or an Output point (such as ExtInPt#1 or
ExtOutPt#1001), then right click and select Configuration
4. Update the User label accordingly and confirm with OK
In case of single associated RMPM, the following External Points have

to be configured as described below:
ExtInPt#1, 2, 7 and 8 _ ExtOutPt#1001 and 1002
- External Points _ Input Points User Label settings
- External Points _ Output Points User Label settings

1.10 HSKU Operation & Command Status [cont.]
External outputs #1001 (Manual shutdown) and #1002 (Manual restart)

can be used together to shutdown and restart the RMPM. To perform
these actions, operate as follow:
Shutdown steps:
1. From 1626 LM USM, open the External Points window selecting View
External Points
2. Select #1001 (Manual shutdown) then right click and select Configuration
3. Set External State = On then confirm with OK (RMPM will shutdown)
4. Set back External State = Off then confirm with OK (RMPM will remain
in shutdown state)


Restart steps:
1. From 1626 LM USM, open the External Points window selecting View
External Points
2. Select #1002 (Manual restart) then right click and select Configuration
3. Set External State = On then confirm with OK (RMPM will restart)
4. Set back External State = Off then confirm with OK (RMPM will remain
in started state)


Line Degraded Alarm

This alarm is an OR function of all the following alarms and warnings :


RMPM Degraded Alarm

This alarm is an OR function of all the following alarms and warnings :


1.11 RMPM Reboot
Reboot description
Equivalent to power down and up through 48V power supply
Configuration parameters before the reboot kept in memory are re-applied
To perform a reboot cycle, operate as follow:

1. From the “Main” tab, click on the relevant icon
2. Click on Yes in the dialog box to confirm the action
3. After a few seconds, make sure that RMPM is back in operational state


1.12 Graphical User Interface – “Events History” Tab
Meaning of the event codes:

2176: OSC loss along with ARP time
4096: Not stabilized mode (NST). Pumps on (after APR shutdown or power
up)
32768: House Keeping shutdown or restart command

The Events History tab summarizes the events, time and date stamped as shown above.
- Refer to the Appendix (RMPM status codes and ALS code numbers) for more details.
The events history can be cleared by pressing “Reset Events History” button in the GUI.
Note 1 : If there is no real-time clock hardware in the RMPM, events will be logged, but the time-
stamp will show “0-0-0 0:0:0:”.
Note 2 : Events will be logged also when the GUI window is not opened.

1.13 Graphical User Interface – “Pumps Pwr Chart” Tab
Week number
The Pumps Pwr Chart tab shows pumps output power weekly average samples.

1.14 Graphical User Interface – “OSC Band Pwr Chart” Tab
Week number

The OSC Ban Pwr Chart tab shows the OSC Band power weekly averaged samples.

1.15 Graphical User Interface – “Back reflection Pwr Chart” Tab
Week number

The Back Reflection Pwr Chart tab shows the back reflection power weekly averaged samples.

Exercise
According to the instructions of the trainer :

Get started on RMPM GUI
Discover the current configuration and status of the RMPM
Using ON/OFF button, shutdown and restart the RMPM. Analyze the
alarm status for each case.
Customize the user label of the relevant House Keeping points
Using House Keeping points shutdown and restart the RMPM
Launch an RMPM reboot
Analyze the Events history
Compare the charts and the current related values
Verify that the Back-reflection pump ratio is greater than -22dB
____ minutes


2 RMPM Maintenance


2 RMPM maintenance
2.1 Replacing a Power supply
RMPM has a redundant power supply. At service time, shut down the
related RMPM power access to be able to replace the faulty part.
Take off lid at upper cover of RMPM by taking out the seven screws as
shown in the figure below
Take out the three screws harnessing the small PCB card with defective
power supply on it to the RMPM motherboard
Pull out the power supply
Replace with new power supply (insert power supply card into socket)
Harness power supply PCB with screws to motherboard PCB
Put back lid and close the screws
Extract the board


2 RMPM maintenance
2.2 Replacing a FAN
RMPM has a redundant FAN. At service time, shut down the

related RMPM power access to be able to replace the faulty part.
Take out the six screws connecting the side cover of RMPM as seen in
the drawing below.
Disconnect the wire to wire connector of the defective FAN
Take out the defective FAN
Replace with a new FAN
Connect new FAN with the wire to wire connector
Put back side cover and six screws


2 RMPM maintenance
2.3 Replacing the Dust Filter
To allow good air flow into module while maintaining good protection
from dust entering the module, a dust filter is located in front of
fans.
It is possible to replace the dust filter taking out the two screws in
the front panel that are related to the dust filter cassette


Exercise
Proceed to a FAN replacement on your RMPM without completely

turning off the power supply, following the appropriate procedure
Use the installed FAN as a spare
____ minutes


Notes Page



for this module


End of Module
RMPM Handling and Maintenance


Section 6
Appendix
Module 1
Miscellaneous


Blank Page

Appendix Miscellaneous
Document History

Module Objectives
None





Table of Contents
1 SFP modules 7
2 XFP modules 9
3 ALCT channels 11
4 Transponder channels 13
4.1 Frequency allocation plan for 50GHz grid 14
4.2 Frequency allocation plan for 100GHz grid 17
5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting 19
5.1 Equipment alarm list 20
5.2 RUP, RUM alarm description and related corrective actions 22
5.3 RUTM, UEP alarm description and related corrective actions 23
5.4 RUU, OCCO alarm description and related corrective actions 24
5.5 SCP alarm description and related corrective actions 25
5.6 LAN, PP alarm description and related corrective actions 26
5.7 VM, HT alarm description and related corrective actions 27
5.8 TF, TD alarm description and related corrective actions 28
5.9 OPL alarm description and related corrective actions 29
5.10 IPL alarm description and related corrective actions 30
5.11 OPD, IPD alarm description and related corrective actions 31
5.12 COCE alarm description and related corrective actions 32
5.13 HVCSP alarm description and related corrective actions 33
5.14 PD, UDCL alarm description and related corrective actions 34
5.15 WD alarm description and related corrective actions 35
5.16 AUP, EM alarm description and related corrective actions 36
615
5.17 TOOR alarm description and Allrelated corrective
Rights Reserved actions
© Alcatel-Lucent 2009 37
6
Appendix Ethernet
Miscellaneous frames overview 39
6.1 IEEE 802.1 frame 40
6.2 “Tagged” Ethernet frames 41

6.3 VLAN stacking in ETHC 1000 board 42
7 WIS overview 43
7.1 WAN PHY RS Overhead 44
7.2 WAN PHY MS Overhead 45
8 RMPM status codes and ALS code numbers 47
8.1 Raman Amplifier Status Codes 48
8.2 ALS Code Numbers 50
9 Abbreviations and Acronyms 53



1 SFP modules


SFP modules list
Description
Equipped on Equipped on Equipped on
ACRONYM (Interface / Module type / TRBC1111 2xGBE_FC ETHC1000
Connector / fiber type)
I-16.1 / B&W SFP / LC /
I-16.1 DDM
SMF
S-16.1 / B&W SFP / LC /
S-16.1 DDM
SMF
L-16.1 / B&W SFP / LC /
L-16.1 DDM
SMF
L-16.2 / B&W SFP / LC /
L-16.2 DDM
SMF
1000BASE-SX / B&W SFP /
1GbESXDDM
LC / MMF
1000BASE-LX/LH / B&W SFP
1GbELXDDM
/ LC / SMF
1000BASE-ZX / B&W SFP /
1GbEZXDDM
LC / SMF
FC/2FCmm / B&W SFP / LC
FC/2FCmm
/ SMF
FC/2FCmm / B&W SFP / LC
FC/2FCsm
/ SMF
APD DWDM / DWDM SFP /
DWA200->600
LC / SMF
The Digital Diagnostic Monitoring (DDM) is an SFP function supporting analog parameters measurements
as temperature, laser bias, laser power. It is an optional feature: the availability information is
present in the SFP remote inventory.

2 XFP modules


XFP modules list
Description
Equipped on Equipped on Equipped on
ACRONYM (Interface / Module type / TRBD1191 TRBC4x12 ETHC1000
Connector / fiber type)
I-64.1/10GBASE-L / B&W XFP
XI641
/ LC / SMF
S-64.2b/10GBASE-E / B&W
XS642
XFP / LC / SMF
10GBASE-S / B&W XFP / LC /
X10GBASES
MMF
P1L1-2D2 (L-64.2) / B&W XFP
XP1L12D2
/ LC / SMF


3 ALCT channels


ALCT frequencies
BAND# ALCT Frequency

2 195.35 THz
3 194.95 THz
4 194.55 THz
5 194.15 THz
6 193.75 THz
7 193.35 THz
8 192.95 THz
9 192.55 THZ
10 192.15 THz
11 191.75 THz
12 191.35 THz

ALCT board is not available in Band 1.

4 Transponder channels


4.1 Frequency allocation plan for 50GHz grid


4.1 Frequency allocation plan for 50GHz grid [cont.]


4.1 Frequency allocation plan for 50GHz grid [cont.]


4.2 Frequency allocation plan for 100GHz grid


Notes Page


5 Main equipment alarm troubleshooting


5.1 Equipment alarm list
Probable cause Alarm type Page

1 RUP Equipment 22
2 RUM Equipment 22
3 RUTM Equipment 23
4 UEP Equipment 23
5 RUU Equipment 24
6 OCCO Equipment 24
7 SCP Equipment 25
8 LAN Equipment 26
9 PP Equipment 26
10 VM Equipment 27
11 HT Equipment 27
12 TF Equipment 28
13 TD Equipment 28
14 OPL Equipment 29
15 IPL Equipment 30
16 OPD Equipment 31


5.1 Equipment alarm list [cont.]
Probable cause Alarm type Page

17 IPD Equipment 31
18 COCE Equipment 32
19 HVCSP Equipment 33
20 PD Equipment 34
21 UDCL Equipment 34
22 WD Equipment 35
23 AUP Equipment 36
24 EM Equipment 36
25 TOOR Equipment 37


5.2 RUP, RUM alarm description and related corrective actions
RUP
RUM


5.3 RUTM, UEP alarm description and related corrective actions
RUTM
UEP


5.4 RUU, OCCO alarm description and related corrective actions
RUU
OCCO


5.5 SCP alarm description and related corrective actions
SCP


5.6 LAN, PP alarm description and related corrective actions
LAN
PP


5.7 VM, HT alarm description and related corrective actions
VM
HT


5.8 TF, TD alarm description and related corrective actions
TF
TD


5.9 OPL alarm description and related corrective actions
OPL


5.10 IPL alarm description and related corrective actions
IPL


5.11 OPD, IPD alarm description and related corrective actions
OPD
IPD


5.12 COCE alarm description and related corrective actions
COCE


5.13 HVCSP alarm description and related corrective actions
HVCSP


5.14 PD, UDCL alarm description and related corrective actions
PD
UDCL


5.15 WD alarm description and related corrective actions
WD


5.16 AUP, EM alarm description and related corrective actions
AUP
EM


5.17 TOOR alarm description and related corrective actions
TOOR


Notes Page


6 Ethernet frames overview


6.1 IEEE 802.1 frame
Destination Source
Type or
Preamble MAC MAC Data FCS
Length
Address Address
8 6 6 2 - 4
Number of bytes
The common fields are:

Preamble - Used to synchronise the receivers
MAC addresses - Destination and Source MAC @ such as: 00 20 60 12 34
Type - Indicate the type of protocol used by the upper layer
Length - Length of the data field
Data - From 46 to 1500 bytes
FCS - Frame Check Sequence also called CRC taking into
account the fields from Destination MAC @ to Data

CRC: Cyclic Redundancy Check

6.2 “Tagged” Ethernet frames
Destination Source Type

Preamble MAC MAC 1Q TCI or Data FCS
Address Address Length
8 6 6 2 2 2 - 4
Number of bytes
Customer VLAN tag
Destination Source Type

Preamble MAC MAC 1Q TCI 1Q TCI or Data FCS
Address Address Length
8 6 6 2 2 2 2 2 - 4
Number of bytes
Provider VLAN tag Customer VLAN tag

The “added” fields (802.1P/Q), in a given VLAN (Virtual Local Area network), are:
1Q - 802.1Q field (a constant fixed value: 8100)
TCI - Tag Control Information
3 bits: user priority 802.1P (8 levels: from 0 to 7)
1 bit: CFI (Canonical Field Identifier)
12 bits: VLAN identifier 802.1Q (0 to 4095)
VLAN tags can be stacked when crossing the service provider networks. In such a case:
The first tag : IEEE 802.1 P/Q is also called “customer tag”
The second tag : IEEE 802.1ad is called Q in Q tag or provider tag

6.3 VLAN stacking in ETHC 1000 board
---
Source Type
MAC 1Q TCI 1Q TCI 1Q TCI or Data FCS
Address Length
6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 - 4
WDM VLAN tag Provider VLAN tag Customer VLAN tag

Number of
bytes
A « WDM tag » is added on all frames carried on the 10 GbE interface.

The « WDM tag » follows 802.1ad concept.
The « WDM tag » is added even if the incoming frames are already tagged twice.
The tag is added for each 1 GbE port and removed before user restitution.


7 WIS overview


7 WIS overview
7.1 WAN PHY RS Overhead
The WAN Interface Sublayer (WIS) is specified by IEEE 802.3ae.
Byte Description STM-64/OC-192 1OGE WAN PHY

A1 Framing Frame alignment Fixed : 0xF6
A2 Framing Frame alignment Fixed : 0x28
J0 RS Trace User programmable RS message
Z0 Growth Undefined Unused : 0xCC
B1 RS BIP-8 Bit interleave Parity for RS error monitoring of previous frame
E1 Orderwire optional 64kbps channel between STE
F1 RS User Channel optional for user communication Unused : zero
D1-D3 RS DCC optional for data communication

The WIS provides a simplified SONET/SDH framer for the 10 Gbit/s Ethernet WAN PHY, as well, as
SONET/SDH management information. The WIS operates between the 64B/66B PCS (Physical Coding
Sublayer) and serial PMD (Physical Medium Dependant) layers common to the LAN PHY.

7 WIS overview
7.2 WAN PHY MS Overhead
Byte Description STM-64/OC-192 1OGE WAN PHY
Location of SPE in each STS relative to the pointer (in bytes). Also used
H1,2 Pointer byte
for frequency justification
Used to adjust the fill of input buffers in Fixed : 0x00, no pointer
H3 Pointer action case of negative pointer justification. Also action required
used for frequency justification
B2 MS BIP-1536 Bit interleave Parity for MS error monitoring of previous frame
Request (bits 1-4) : Specifies Automatic Fixed : 0x0, no request
K1 Linear APS Protection Switching request type
Channel (bits 5-8): Channel to switch from Fixed : 0x1, working channel
Channel (bits 1-4): Channel to switch to Fixed : 0x1, working channel
redundancy (bit 5) : 1+1 or 1:n Fixed : 0 1+1
K2 Linear APS Status (bits 6-8): Indicates MS-AIS (111), indicate MS-RDI, MS-AIS or
MS-RDI (1110), bi-directional (101), set to zero
unidirectional (100), rest undefined
D4-D12 MS DCC optional for data communication Unused : zero
Synchronisation status Fixed : 0x0F, no MS synch
S1 Synch
required
Z1, Z2 Growth Undefined Unused : zero
M1 FEBE Reports detected Block Errors (B2) to Far End
E2 Orderwire optional 64kbps channel between STE Unused : zero


Notes Page


8 RMPM status codes and ALS code numbers


8.1 Raman Amplifier Status Codes

The Raman Amplifier Status Codes appear in the “Status” parameter.

8.1 Raman Amplifier Status Codes [cont.]


8.2 ALS Code Numbers

The ALS Code Numbers are listed for different types of events.

8.2 ALS Code Numbers [cont.]

The APRs are shutdown scenarios. The ALS code numbers corresponding to the various APR scenarios
described in the table above.
The sum of these numbers is displayed together with the « ALSnnn » status code, where « nnn » is the
sum (for example, if both input loss and high back reflection : status : ALS 3).

Notes Page


9 Abbreviations and Acronyms


Abbreviations and Acronyms
A E
ACO
ADM
Switch toOff
Alarm Cut notes view!
Add and Drop Multiplexer
EC
EDFA
Equipment Controller
Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier
AIS Alarm Indication Signal EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read
ALC Automatic Loading Channel Only Memory
ALCT Automatic laser ConTrol EMPM External Multi Pump Module
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown EOL End Of Life
AMS Alcatel (Proprietary) Maintenance Signal EOW Engineering Order Wire
APE Automatic Power Equalization ES Erroneous Seconds
APR Automatic Power Reduction ESCT Equipment Shelf Controller
APSD Automatic Power ShutDown ESD Electrostatic Discharge
APT Automatic Power Tuning ETHC ETHernet Controller
AS Alarm Surveillance
ASAP Alarm Severity Assignment Profile F
ASE Amplified Spontaneous Emission FC Fiber Channel
FCS Frame Check Sequence
B FDI Forward Defect Indication
BBE Background Blocks Errors FEC Forward Error Corrector
BBU Background Blocks Uncorrected FIT Failure In Time
BEC Background Errors Corrected FPGA Field Programmable Date Array
BER Bit Error Rate
BMDX Band Multiplexer / DemultipleXer G
BNC Bayonet Not Coupling GCC Generic Communication Channel
B-OADM Band-OADM GFP Generic Framing Procedure
BOFA Band Optical Fiber Amplifier GIS Geographic Information System
BOL 6 1 54Beginning Of Life GNE
Gateway Network Element
BtB Appendix Back-to-Back
Miscellaneous GUI Graphical User Interface
B&W Black & White
H
C HK House Keeping
CBR Constant Bit Rate HSKU HouSe Keeping Unit
Ch Channel
CLNP Connection Less Network Protocol I
CM Channel Margin IEC International Electrotech. Commission
CMDX Channel Multiplexer / DemultipleXer IL Insertion Loss
CPE Customer Premises equipment IPL Input Power Loss
CPI Card Presence Interface ISPB Intra Shelf Parallel Bus
CSF Customer Sub-system Failure ISSB Intra Shelf Serial Bus
CT Craft Terminal
CWDM Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing L
LAN Local Area Network
D LAPD Link Access Protocol for D channel
DCC Data Communication Channel LH Long Hall
DCF Dispersion Compensating Fiber LM Light manager
DCN Data Communication Network LOF Loss Of Frame
DCU Device Compensating Unit LOFA Line Optical Fiber amplifier
DDM Digital Diagnostic Monitoring LOMS Loss Of Multiplex Section
DMS Degraded Multiplex Section LOS Los Of Signal
DTV Digital Threshold Voltage LOSC Loss Of Supervisory Channel
DW Digital wapper LOSCF Loss Of Supervisory Channel Frame
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing LR Line Repeater
LSP Laser Shutdown for Protection
LT Line Terminal
M
MAC Media Access Control
MCC Multirate Channel Card
MIB Management Information Base
MSV Mid-Stage VOA
MZ Mach-Zehnder
Abbreviations and Acronyms [cont.]
N S
NDC Negative Dispersion Chromatic SAC Span Attenuation Control
NE Switch
Networkto notes view!
Element SBS Stimulated Brillouin Scattering
NF Noise Figure SC Shelf Controller
NNI Network to Network Interface SCS Severely Corrected Seconds
NRZ Non Return to Zero SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
NSAP Network Service Access Point SES Severely Erroneous Seconds
NTP Network Time Protocol SFF Small Form Factor
SFP Small Form Factor Pluggable
O SMF Single Mode Fiber
OADC Optical Add & Drop Coupler SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
OADM Optical Add & Drop Multiplexer SONET Synchronous Optical NETwork
OAM Operation And Maintenance SPC Super Physical Contact
OCC Optical Channel Carrier SPI Serial Peripheral Interface
OCH Optical CHannel SDH Physical Interface
OCPU Optical Channel Protection Unit SPLM
Smart Photonic Layer Manager
OCHA Optical CHannel Adaptation SSF
Server Signal Failure
OCM Optical Channel Monitoring SUS
Severely Uncorrected Seconds
OCNC Optical CoNnectivity Coupler
ODU Optical channel Data Unit T
OGPI Optical Generic Physical Interface TCA Threshold Crossing Alarm
OH Over Head TCI Tag Control Information
OMDX Optical Multiplexer / DemultipleXer TCO Total Cost of Ownership
OMS Optical Multiplex Section TDF Total Dropped Frames
OMSP Optical Multiplex Section Protection TDM Time Division Multiplexing
OMSA Optical Multiplex Section Adaptation TEC Thermo-Electric Cooler
OPS 6Appendix Optical Physical Section
1 55
TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch
Miscellaneous
OPU 1626 LM (Light
Optical channel Payload Unit
Manager) R 5.0A Operation and Maintenance
TDMX Tunable DeMux
OS Operation System TP Termination Point
OSA Optical Spectrum Analyzer TRBC TRiButary Concentrator
OSC Optical Supervisory Channel TRBD TRiButary Direct
OSCU Optical Supervisory Channel TRCF Total Received Correct Frames
OSNCP Optical Sub-Network Connection TRCO Total Received Correct Octet
Protection TR-OADM Tunable & Reconfigurable OADM
OSNR Optical Signal to Noise Ratio TRSEF Total Received Service Errored Frames
OTN Optical Transport Network TRU Top Rack Unit
OTS Optical Transport Section TTF Total Transmitted Frames
OTU Optical channel Transport Unit TTI Trail Trace Identifier
TTO Total Transmitted Octets
P
PCB Printed Circuit Breaker U
PCS Physical Coding Sublayer UDC User Data Channel
PDG Polarization Dependant Gain UFEC User Forward Error Correction
PDL Polarization Dependant Loss ULH Ultra Long Hall
PGE Programmable Gain Equalization UNI User to Network Interface
PM Performance Monitoring URU Underlying Resources Unavailable
PMD Polarization Mode Dispersion USIB USer Interface Board
PSUP Power SUPply
V
R VLAN Virtual Local Area Network
RAIU Rack Alarm Interface Unit VOA Variable Optical Amplifier
RM Remote Monitoring VSR Very Short Reach
RMPM Raman Multi Pump Module
ROADM Reconfigurable OADM
RPO Receiver Parameter Optimization

Abbreviations and Acronyms [cont.]
W
WAN Wide Area Network
WB Switch to notes
Wavelength Blocker view!
WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing
WIS WAN Interface Sublayer
WMAN Wavelength MANager
WSS Wavelength Selective Switch


Notes Page


End of Module
Miscellaneous


Last But One Page
1 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

@@PRODUCT
@@COURSENAME
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR

@@COURSENAME - Page 1
Passing on and copying of this document, use and communication of its
contents not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel-Lucent
All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent @@YEAR
@@COURSENAME - Page 2

7 - 1626 Light Manager R5.0A Operation and Maintenance

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

7 - 1626 Light Manager R5.0A Operation and Maintenance

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

All rights reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

Switch to notes view!

2 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Operation and Maintenance

All rights reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

Switch to notes view!

4 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

2. RMPM Handling and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

Switch to notes view!

6 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Operation and Maintenance

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

Switch to notes view!

Welcome to 1626 LM (Light Manager) R5.0A Operation and Maintenance

Upon completion of this course, you should be able to:

describe the main characteristics of the Alcatel-Lucent 1626 LM R 5.0A,

1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Operation and Maintenance

describe the SPLM tool and get started on SPLM workspace,

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

Switch to notes view!

8 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

Where you can get further information

1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Operation and Maintenance

If you want further information you can refer to the following:

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

Switch to notes view!

10 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

This page is left blank intentionally

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

Did you meet the following objectives ?

Yes (or No (or

2 To be able to describe the main

9 To be able to handle the alarms raised by

12 To be able to setup the relevant SPLM

13 Run the APE sequencer for channel

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

Switch to notes view!

Yes (or No (or

14 To be able to describe the Alcatel-Lucent

15 To be able to get started and maintain the

12 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0 Operation and Maintenance

Thank you for your answers to this questionnaire

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2008

1626 LM (Light Manager) R 5.0A

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

112 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

This page is left blank intentionally

Edition Date Author Remarks

01 2009-03-25 Steunou L. First edition

All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

112 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

113 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

114 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

116 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

117 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

119 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

1 1 10 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

1 1 11 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

1 1 15 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

1 1 17 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009

1 1 19 All Rights Reserved © Alcatel-Lucent 2009